Download ONKYO TX-NR929

Contents
AV RECEIVER
TX-NR929
Safety Information and Introduction ............2
Table of Contents ...........................................6
Connections .................................................14
Turning On & Basic Operations..................25
Instruction Manual
Playback........................................................33
Advanced Operations ..................................57
Controlling Other Components...................87
Appendix .......................................................96
Internet Radio Guide
Remote Control Codes
En
Safety Information and Introduction
WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN
OR MOISTURE.
CAUTION:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED
SERVICE PERSONNEL.
WARNING
AVIS
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE
NE PAS OUVRIR
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within
an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the
user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous
voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may
be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of
electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert the user to the
presence of important operating and
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the appliance.
Important Safety Instructions
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with dry cloth.
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
8. Do not install near any heat sources such as
radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other
apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce
heat.
9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized
or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two
blades with one wider than the other. A grounding
type plug has two blades and a third grounding
prong. The wide blade or the third prong are
provided for your safety. If the provided plug does
not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for
replacement of the obsolete outlet.
10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or
pinched particularly at plugs, convenience
receptacles, and the point where they exit from
the apparatus.
11. Only use attachments/accessories specified by
the manufacturer.
12. Use only with the cart,
PORTABLE CART WARNING
stand, tripod, bracket, or
table specified by the
manufacturer, or sold with
the apparatus. When a cart
is used, use caution when
moving the cart/apparatus
S3125A
combination to avoid injury
from tip-over.
13. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or
when unused for long periods of time.
14. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
Servicing is required when the apparatus has
been damaged in any way, such as power-supply
cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or
objects have fallen into the apparatus, the
apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture,
does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
15. Damage Requiring Service
Unplug the apparatus from the wall outlet and
refer servicing to qualified service personnel
under the following conditions:
A. When the power-supply cord or plug is
damaged,
En-2
B. If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen
into the apparatus,
C. If the apparatus has been exposed to rain or
water,
D. If the apparatus does not operate normally by
following the operating instructions. Adjust
only those controls that are covered by the
operating instructions as an improper
adjustment of other controls may result in
damage and will often require extensive work
by a qualified technician to restore the
apparatus to its normal operation,
E. If the apparatus has been dropped or
damaged in any way, and
F. When the apparatus exhibits a distinct change
in performance this indicates a need for
service.
16. Object and Liquid Entry
Never push objects of any kind into the apparatus
through openings as they may touch dangerous
voltage points or short-out parts that could result
in a fire or electric shock.
The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or
splashing and no objects filled with liquids, such
as vases shall be placed on the apparatus.
Don’t put candles or other burning objects on top
of this unit.
17. Batteries
Always consider the environmental issues and
follow local regulations when disposing of
batteries.
18. If you install the apparatus in a built-in installation,
such as a bookcase or rack, ensure that there is
adequate ventilation.
Leave 20 cm (8") of free space at the top and
sides and 10 cm (4") at the rear. The rear edge of
the shelf or board above the apparatus shall be
set 10 cm (4") away from the rear panel or wall,
creating a flue-like gap for warm air to escape.
Safety Information and Introduction
Precautions
1. Recording Copyright—Unless it’s for personal
use only, recording copyrighted material is illegal
without the permission of the copyright holder.
2. AC Fuse—The AC fuse inside the unit is not userserviceable. If you cannot turn on the unit, contact
your Onkyo dealer.
3. Care—Occasionally you should dust the unit all
over with a soft cloth. For stubborn stains, use a
soft cloth dampened with a weak solution of mild
detergent and water. Dry the unit immediately
afterwards with a clean cloth. Don’t use abrasive
cloths, thinners, alcohol, or other chemical
solvents, because they may damage the finish or
remove the panel lettering.
4. Power
WARNING
BEFORE PLUGGING IN THE UNIT FOR THE
FIRST TIME, READ THE FOLLOWING SECTION
CAREFULLY.
AC outlet voltages vary from country to country.
Make sure that the voltage in your area meets the
voltage requirements printed on the unit’s rear
panel (e.g., AC 230 V, 50 Hz or AC 120 V, 60 Hz).
The power cord plug is used to disconnect this
unit from the AC power source. Make sure that
the plug is readily operable (easily accessible) at
all times.
For models with [POWER] button, or with both
[POWER] and [ON/STANDBY] buttons:
Pressing the [POWER] button to select OFF
mode does not fully disconnect from the mains. If
you do not intend to use the unit for an extended
period, remove the power cord from the AC outlet.
For models with [ON/STANDBY] button only:
Pressing the [ON/STANDBY] button to select
Standby mode does not fully disconnect from the
mains. If you do not intend to use the unit for an
5.
6.
7.
8.
extended period, remove the power cord from the
AC outlet.
Preventing Hearing Loss
Caution
Excessive sound pressure from earphones and
headphones can cause hearing loss.
Batteries and Heat Exposure
Warning
Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) shall
not be exposed to excessive heat as sunshine,
fire or the like.
Never Touch this Unit with Wet Hands—Never
handle this unit or its power cord while your hands
are wet or damp. If water or any other liquid gets
inside this unit, have it checked by your Onkyo
dealer.
Handling Notes
• If you need to transport this unit, use the original
packaging to pack it how it was when you
originally bought it.
• Do not leave rubber or plastic items on this unit
for a long time, because they may leave marks
on the case.
• This unit’s top and rear panels may get warm
after prolonged use. This is normal.
• If you do not use this unit for a long time, it may
not work properly the next time you turn it on, so
be sure to use it occasionally.
For U.S. and Canadian models
FCC CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Note:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed
to provide reasonable protection against harmful
En-3
interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there
is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following
measures:
–Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
–Increase the separation between the equipment
and receiver.
–Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit
different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
–Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV
technician for help.
This device complies with Industry Canada licenceexempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie
Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doit pas
produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil
doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,
même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en
compromettre le fonctionnement.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in
conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
Safety Information and Introduction
RF Exposure Compliance
Modèle pour les Canadien
IMPORTANT
This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation
exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment and meets the FCC radio frequency
(RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65
and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF)
Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of
RF energy that it deemed to comply without
maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE).
But it is desirable that it should be installed and
operated keeping the radiator at least 20 cm or more
away from person’s body (excluding extremities:
hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition
aux rayonnements énoncées pour un environnement
non contrôlé et respecte les régles les
radioélectriques (RF) de la FCC lignes directrices
d’exposition dans le Supplément C à OET65 et
d’exposition aux fréquences radioélectriques (RF)
CNR-102 de l’IC. Cet équipement émet une énergie
RF trés faible qui est considérée conforme sans
évaluation de l’exposition maximale autorisée.
Cependant, cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé
en gardant une distance de 20 cm ou plus entre le
dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à l’exception des
extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles).
REMARQUE: CET APPAREIL NUMÉRIQUE DE
LA CLASSE B EST CONFORME À LA NORME
NMB-003 DU CANADA.
Sur les modèles dont la fiche est polarisée:
ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS
ÉLECTRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS
LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE
CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER
JUSQU’AU FOND.
The plug is fitted with an appropriate fuse. If the fuse
needs to be replaced, the replacement fuse must
approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362 and have the
same ampere rating as that indicated on the plug.
Check for the ASTA mark or the BSI mark on the
body of the fuse.
If the power cord’s plug is not suitable for your socket
outlets, cut it off and fit a suitable plug. Fit a suitable
fuse in the plug.
For British models
For European Models
Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the
power supply cord of this unit should be performed
only by qualified service personnel.
Declaration of Conformity
We declare, under our sole
responsibility, that this product
complies with the standards:
–Safety
–Limits and methods of
measurement of radio disturbance characteristics
–Limits for harmonic current emissions
–Limitation of voltage changes, voltage fluctuations
and flicker
–RoHS Directive, 2011/65/EU
–Hereby, Onkyo Corporation, declares that this
TX-NR929 is in compliance with the essential
requirements and other relevant provisions of
Directive 1999/5/EC.
For Canadian Models
NOTE: THIS CLASS B DIGITAL APPARATUS
COMPLIES WITH CANADIAN ICES-003.
For models having a power cord with a polarized
plug:
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK,
MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT,
FULLY INSERT.
IMPORTANT
The wires in the mains lead are coloured in
accordance with the following code:
Blue: Neutral
Brown: Live
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this
apparatus may not correspond with the coloured
markings identifying the terminals in your plug,
proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured blue must be connected to
the terminal which is marked with the letter N or
coloured black.
The wire which is coloured brown must be connected
to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or
coloured red.
–С настоящето, Onkyo Corporation, декларира, че
TX-NR929 е в съответствие със съществените
изисквания и другитеприложими разпоредби на
Директива 1999/5/EC.
–Onkyo Corporation tímto prohlašuje, že TX-NR929
splňuje základní požadavky a všechna příslušná
ustanoveni Směrnice 1999/5/ES.
–Undertegnede Onkyo Corporation erklærer herved,
at følgende udstyr TX-NR929 overholder de
væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv
1999/5/EF.
En-4
Safety Information and Introduction
–Hiermit erklärt Onkyo Corporation, dass sich das
Gerät TX-NR929 in Übereinstimmung mit den
grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen
einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie
1999/5/EG befindet.
–Käesolevaga kinnitab Onkyo Corporation seadme
TX-NR929 vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ
põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele
teistele asjakohastele sätetele.
–ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Ο ΚΑΤΑΣΚΕΥΑΣΤΗΣ Onkyo
Corporation ∆ΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ TX-NR929
ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩ∆ΕΙΣ
ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ
∆ΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ ΤΗΣ Ο∆ΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ
–Por la presente, Onkyo Corporation, declara que
este TX-NR929 cumple con los requisitos
esenciales y otras exigencias relevantes de la
Directiva 1999/5/EC.
–Par la présente, Onkyo Corporation déclare que
l’appareil TX-NR929 est conforme aux exigences
essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes
de la directive 1999/5/CE.
–Con la presente Onkyo Corporation dichiara che
questo TX-NR929 è conforme ai requisiti essenziali
ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla
direttiva 1999/5/CE.
–Ar šo Onkyo Corporation deklarē, ka TX-NR929
atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām prasībām
un citiem ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem.
–Šiuo Onkyo Corporation deklaruoja, kad šis
TX-NR929 atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas
1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas.
–A Onkyo Corporation ezzennel kijelenti, hogy a
TX-NR929 típusú beren-dezés teljesíti az alapvető
követelményeket és más 1999/5/EK irányelvben
meghatározott vonatkozó rendelkezéseket.
essentiële eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
Complies with
IDA Standards
DA106032
–Niniejszym Onkyo Corporation deklaruje że
TX-NR929 jest zgodny z zasadniczymi
wymaganiami i innymi właściwymi
postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
–Onkyo Corporation týmto vyhlasuje, že TX-NR929
a spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné
ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES.
–Onkyo Corporation izjavlja, da je ta TX-NR929 v
skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in drugimi
relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES.
TA-20120424004
TRA
REGISTERED
No
DEALER
No
ER0086260/12
–Eu, Onkyo Corporation, declaro que o TX-NR929
cumpre os requisitos essenciais e outras provisões
relevantes da Directiva 1999/5/EC.
–Prin prezenta, Onkyo Corporation, declară că
aparatul TX-NR929 este în conformitate cu
cerinţele esenţiale şi cu alte prevederi pertinente
ale Directivei 1999/5/CE.
23764/SDPPI/2012
2371
527090
Thank you for purchasing an Onkyo AV
Receiver. Please read this manual thoroughly
before making connections and plugging in the
unit.
Following the instructions in this manual will
enable you to obtain optimum performance and
listening enjoyment from your new AV Receiver.
Please retain this manual for future reference.
–Onkyo Corporation vakuuttaa täten että TX-NR929
tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten
vaatimusten ja sitä koskevien direktiivin muiden
ehtojen mukainen.
Supplied Accessories
–Härmed förklarar Onkyo Corporation att denna
TX-NR929 följer de väsentliga kraven och andra
relevanta stadgar i Direktiv 1999/5/EC.
AM loop antenna (➔ page 23)
–Hér með lýsir Onkyo Corporation því yfir að varan
TX-NR929 er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar
kröfur sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC.
–Onkyo Corporation erklærer herved at denne
TX-NR929 er i overensstemmelse med vesentlige
krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i direktiv
1999/5/EC.
–Hierbij verklaart Onkyo Corporation dat het toestel
l TX-NR929 in overeenstemming is met de
En-5
Make sure you have the following accessories:
Indoor FM antenna (➔ page 23)
Power cord (➔ page 25)
Speaker cable labels (➔ page 15)
Speaker setup microphone (➔ page 29)
Remote controller (RC-840M) and two batteries (AA/R6)
(➔ page 13)
Quick Start Guide
*
In catalogs and on packaging, the letter at the end of the
product name indicates the color. Specifications and
operations are the same regardless of color.
Safety Information and Introduction
Table of Contents
Safety Information and Introduction
Important Safety Instructions ......................................2
Precautions ...................................................................3
Supplied Accessories...................................................5
Table of Contents..........................................................6
Features .........................................................................7
Front & Rear Panels......................................................8
Front Panel..................................................................8
Display ......................................................................10
Rear Panel ................................................................11
Remote Controller.......................................................12
Controlling the AV Receiver ......................................12
Connections
Connecting the AV Receiver......................................14
Connecting Your Speakers .......................................14
Connecting the TV/AV components ..........................19
About RIHD ...............................................................20
Connection Tips ........................................................21
Connecting the Antennas..........................................23
Connecting Onkyo RI Components...........................24
Using Headphones....................................................24
Using the Remote Controller in
Zone and Multiroom Control Kits ........................... 86
Playback
Playback ...................................................................... 33
Controlling Contents of USB or Network Devices..... 34
Understanding Icons on the Display ......................... 35
Playing an Audio from Bluetooth-enabled Device .... 35
Playing a USB Device............................................... 36
Listening to TuneIn ................................................... 36
Registering Other Internet Radio .............................. 38
Changing the Icon Layout
on the Network Service Screen.............................. 38
Playing Music Files on a Server (DLNA) .................. 38
Playing Music Files on a Shared Folder ................... 40
Remote Playback...................................................... 41
Listening to AM/FM Radio ........................................ 42
Playing Audio and Video from Separate Sources..... 44
Using the Listening Modes ....................................... 45
Displaying Source Information.................................. 53
Using the Sleep Timer .............................................. 53
Setting the Display Brightness.................................. 53
Changing the Input Display....................................... 54
Muting the AV Receiver ............................................ 54
Selecting Speaker Layout......................................... 54
Using the Whole House Mode .................................. 54
Using Easy Macros................................................... 55
Using the Home Menu .............................................. 56
Controlling Other Components
Controlling Other Components................................. 87
Preprogrammed Remote Control Codes .................. 87
Looking up for Remote Control Codes ..................... 87
Entering Remote Control Codes............................... 87
Remapping Colored Buttons .................................... 88
Remote Control Codes
for Onkyo Components Connected via RI ............. 88
Resetting the REMOTE MODE Buttons ................... 88
Resetting the Remote Controller .............................. 89
Controlling Other Components ................................. 89
Using the Onkyo Dock.............................................. 92
Controlling Your iPod/iPhone ................................... 93
Learning Commands ................................................ 94
Using Normal Macros ............................................... 95
Appendix
Troubleshooting ......................................................... 96
Firmware Update ...................................................... 104
About HDMI............................................................... 107
Network/USB Features............................................. 108
License and Trademark Information ...................... 110
Specifications ........................................................... 112
Advanced Operations
Turning On & Basic Operations
Turning On/Off the AV Receiver ................................25
Connecting the Power Cord ......................................25
Turning On ................................................................25
Turning Off ................................................................25
Firmware Update Notification....................................26
About the HYBRID STANDBY indicator....................26
Initial Setup..................................................................26
Selecting the Language
for the On-screen Setup Menus .............................26
Audyssey MultEQ XT32: Auto Setup ........................26
Source Connection....................................................27
Remote Mode Setup .................................................27
Network Connection..................................................27
Terminating the Initial Setup .....................................27
Using the Automatic Speaker Setup .........................28
Performing Wireless LAN Setup ...............................31
On-screen Setup......................................................... 57
Using the Quick Setup .............................................. 57
Using the Audio Settings of Quick Setup.................. 58
Using the Setup Menu (HOME) ................................ 61
Setup Menu Items..................................................... 61
1. Input/Output Assign .............................................. 62
2. Speaker Setup ...................................................... 64
3. Audio Adjust.......................................................... 69
4. Source Setup ........................................................ 71
5. Listening Mode Preset .......................................... 76
6. Miscellaneous ....................................................... 77
7. Hardware Setup.................................................... 78
8. Remote Controller Setup ...................................... 82
9. Lock Setup............................................................ 82
Multi Zone.................................................................... 83
Making Multi Zone Connections ............................... 83
Controlling Multi Zone Components ......................... 84
En-6
To reset the AV receiver, see page 96.
Safety Information and Introduction
Features
Amplifier
• 135 Watts/Channel @ 8 ohms (FTC)
• 185 Watts/Channel @ 6 ohms (IEC)
• 230 Watts/Channel @ 6 ohms (JEITA)
• WRAT–Wide Range Amplifier Technology
(5 Hz to 100 kHz bandwidth)
• Optimum Gain Volume Circuitry
• H.C.P.S. (High Current Power Supply) Massive
High Power Transformer
• 3 Stage Inverted Darlington Amplifier Design
Processing
• THX Select2 Plus Certified
• Incorporates Qdeo™ technology for HDMI Video
Upscaling (to 4K Compatible)
• HDMI (Audio Return Channel, 3D, DeepColor,
x.v.Color, Lip Sync, 4K (up-scaling and
Passthrough), DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High
Resolution Audio, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,
DSD and Multi-CH PCM)
• Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master Audio
• Dolby Pro Logic IIz and Audyssey DSX®
• DTS Neo:X
• Non-Scaling Configuration
• A-Form Listening Mode Memory
• Direct Mode
• Pure Audio Mode
• Music Optimizer for Compressed Digital Music files
• Phase Matching Bass System
• 192 kHz/24-bit D/A Converters
• Powerful and Highly Accurate 32-bit Processing
DSP
• Jitter Cleaning Circuit Technology
• Digital Processing Crossover Network
Connections
• 9 HDMI Inputs (1 on front panel) and 2 Outputs
• 4K (up-scaling and Passthrough)-compatible HDMI
Inputs
• Zone 2 HDMI Output
• Onkyo p for System Control
• 6 Digital Inputs (3 Optical/3 Coaxial)
• Component Video Switching (2 Inputs/1 Output)
• Banana Plug-Compatible Speaker Posts
*
In Europe, using banana plugs to connect speakers to an
audio amplifier is prohibited.
• Powered Zone 2/3
• Bi-Amping Capability for FL/FR with FHL/FHR
• Analog RGB Video Input (D-sub 15) for PC
• Internet Radio Connectivity
• Network Capability for Streaming Audio Files
• Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Connectivity
• Wireless Music Playback via Bluetooth
• Front-Panel USB Input for Memory Devices
• MHL-Enabled AUX Front Input
Miscellaneous
• 40 FM/AM Presets
• Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 to correct room acoustic
problems
• Audyssey Dynamic EQ® for loudness correction
• Audyssey Dynamic Volume® to maintain optimal
listening level and dynamic range
• Crossover Adjustment
(40/50/60/70/80/90/100/120/150/200 Hz)
• A/V Sync Control Function (up to 800 ms)
• Auto Standby Function
• On-Screen Display via HDMI
• Preprogrammed (with onscreen display setup)
RI-Compatible Learning Remote with 4 Activities
and Mode-Key LEDs
• ISF (Imaging Science Foundation) Video Calibration
En-7
Safety Information and Introduction
Front & Rear Panels
Front Panel
a
bc
d
h
e
i
f g
j
(North American models)
k
l m
(European and Australian models)
n
op q rst
x y z
A
u
v
B
En-8
w
C
Safety Information and Introduction
For detailed information, see the pages in
parentheses.
k PHONES jack (24)
a 8ON/STANDBY button (25)
m ZONE 2 and ZONE 3 buttons (84)
b Remote control sensor (13)
n TONE and Tone Level buttons (58, 59)
l BLUETOOTH button (35, 81)
c BLUETOOTH indicator (35, 81)
o MONITOR OUT button (62)
d Wi-Fi indicator (31)
p DISPLAY button (53)
e Display (10)
q TUNING q/w (42), PRESET e/r (42), cursor
and enter (middle) buttons
f MASTER VOLUME control and indicator (33,
53)
r DIMMER button (North American models) (53)
g HYBRID STANDBY indicator (26)
s MEMORY button (42)
h PURE AUDIO button and indicator (45)
t TUNING MODE button (42)
i Input selector buttons (33)
u LISTENING MODE buttons (45)
j Front flap
Gently push on the lower end of the front panel to
open the flap.
v WHOLE HOUSE MODE button (54)
w SETUP MIC jack (29)
x QUICK SETUP button (57)
y HOME button (56)
z RETURN button
A USB port (36)
B AUX INPUT jacks (20)
C RT/PTY/TP button (European and Australian
models) (43)
En-9
Safety Information and Introduction
Display
s
a
b cd e f
j
k l
For detailed information, see the pages in
parentheses.
m
b Z2 (Zone 2) indicator (84)
i Input indicators (22)
HDMI indicator (78)
DIGITAL indicator
ANALOG indicator
c Z3 (Zone 3) indicator (84)
j Bi AMP indicator
d Listening mode and format indicators (45, 76)
a Speaker/channel indicators
f 1, 3 and cursor indicators (36)
k Audyssey indicator (28, 71)
Dynamic EQ indicator (72)
Dynamic Vol indicator (72)
g NET indicator (36 to 40, 81)
l Headphone indicator (24)
h Tuning indicators
RDS indicator (excluding North American
models) (43)
AUTO indicator (42)
TUNED indicator (42)
FM STEREO indicator (42)
m Message area
e M.Opt (Music Optimizer) indicator (60)
n MUTING indicator (54)
o Volume level
p USB indicator (36)
q SLEEP indicator (53)
En-10
g
h
i
n
o
p q
Safety Information and Introduction
Rear Panel
ab
cd
e
f
g h i d j
k l
m
e Composite video and analog audio jacks
(BD/DVD IN, CBL/SAT IN, STB/DVR IN, GAME 1
IN, PC IN, TV/CD IN, PHONO IN)
f HDMI IN and HDMI output (HDMI OUT MAIN and
HDMI OUT SUB/ZONE 2) jacks
g COMPONENT VIDEO IN and MONITOR OUT
jacks
h IR IN and OUT jacks
i ZONE 2 and ZONE 3 12V TRIGGER OUT jacks
j ZONE 2 and ZONE 3 LINE OUT jacks
k FM ANTENNA jack and AM ANTENNA terminal
l PC IN jack
m AC INLET
n DIGITAL IN COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks
o GND screw
p MONITOR OUT V jack
no
p
See “Connecting the AV Receiver” for connection
(➔ pages 14 to 24).
a u REMOTE CONTROL jack
b ETHERNET port
c RS232 port
Terminal for control.
q
q PRE OUT jacks
(FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURR L/R, SURR BACK
L/R, FRONT HIGH L/R, FRONT WIDE L/R,
SUBWOOFER)
r
d Wireless antenna
When the AV receiver is connected to the network
by wireless, adjust the position of the antenna
(➔ pages 31, 35).
90°
180°
90°
180°
En-11
r Speaker terminals
(FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURR L/R, SURR BACK
L/R, FRONT HIGH/ZONE 3 L/R and FRONT
WIDE/ZONE 2 L/R)
Safety Information and Introduction
Remote Controller
For detailed information, see the pages in
parentheses.
a 8RECEIVER button (25)
Controlling the AV Receiver
b ACTIVITIES buttons (55, 95)
To control the AV receiver, press RECEIVER to
select Receiver mode.
a
b
c
*2
i
c
*2
RECEIVER
d
e
a
f
d SP (speaker layout) button (54)
b D.TUN button (42)
e q/w/e/r and ENTER buttons
c DISPLAY button
f Q SETUP button (57)
d CH +/– button (43)
g Listening Mode buttons (45)
e Number buttons (42)
j
*1
*2
k
d
i DISPLAY button (53)
j MUTING button (54)
k VOL q/w button (33)
*2
l RETURN button
m HOME button (56)
n SLEEP button (53)
l
m
Tip
• You can also use the remote controller to control Onkyo
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, CD player, and other
components.
See “Entering Remote Control Codes” for more details
(➔ page 87).
g
e
h
b
a q/w buttons (42)
h DIMMER button (53)
*2
*1
c REMOTE MODE/INPUT SELECTOR buttons
(33)
■ Controlling the tuner
To control the AV receiver’s tuner, press TUNER (or
RECEIVER).
You can select AM or FM by pressing TUNER
repeatedly.
n
En-12
When you want to change the remote controller mode
(target component) without changing the current input
source, press MODE and within about 8 seconds, press
REMOTE MODE. Then, using the same AV receiver’s
remote controller, you can control the component
corresponding to the button you pressed.
These buttons can also be used when a REMOTE
MODE other than Receiver mode is selected.
Safety Information and Introduction
■ Aiming the remote controller
To use the remote controller, point it at the AV
receiver’s remote control sensor, as shown below.
Remote control sensor
AV receiver
Approx. 16 ft. (5 m)
■ Installing the batteries
Batteries (AA/R6)
Note
• If the remote controller doesn’t work reliably, try replacing
the batteries.
• Don’t mix new and old batteries or different types of
batteries.
• If you intend not to use the remote controller for a long time,
remove the batteries to prevent damage from leakage or
corrosion.
• Remove expired batteries as soon as possible to prevent
damage from leakage or corrosion.
En-13
Connections
Speaker Configuration
Connections
Connecting the AV
Receiver
Connecting Your Speakers
ab
c IJ
KL f
*1
The following table indicates the channels you should
use depending on the number of speakers that you
have.
No matter how many speakers you use, a powered
subwoofer is recommended for a really powerful and
solid bass.
To get the best from your surround sound system,
you need to set the speaker settings automatically
(➔ page 28) or manually (➔ page 65).
Number of
speakers
2 3 4 5 6 7 7 7 8 8 9 9 9 10 11
Front
speakers
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Center
speaker
Surround
speakers
Surround
back speaker
Surround
back
speakers
Front high
speakers
✔
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
✔
✔ ✔
✔
✔ ✔
✔
de GH
Front speakers
Center speaker
Surround speakers
Subwoofer(s)
Surround back speakers
Front high speakers
Front wide speakers
✔
✔
Front wide
speakers
ab
c
de
f
GH
IJ
KL
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔ ✔ ✔
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Speaker Configuration
5.1-channel: a b c d e f
7.1-channel: a b c d e f + G H
7.1-channel: a b c d e f + I J
7.1-channel: a b c d e f + K L
9.1-channel: a b c d e f + G H + I J
9.1-channel: a b c d e f + G H + K L
9.1-channel: a b c d e f + I J + K L
11.1-channel*1: a b c d e f + G H + I J + K L
En-14
By using a combination of the built-in power amplifier for
9-channel and an external power amplifier for 2-channel,
you can enjoy up to 11.1-channel playback.
Using Powered Subwoofers
Corner
position
1/3 of wall
position
To find the best position for your subwoofer, while
playing a movie or some music with good bass,
experiment by placing your subwoofer at various
positions within the room, and choose the one that
provides the most satisfying results.
You can connect the powered subwoofer with two
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jacks respectively.
The same signal is output from each jack.
Tip
• If your subwoofer is unpowered and you’re using an
external amplifier, connect the subwoofer pre out jack to an
input on the amplifier.
Connections
Attaching the Speaker Cable Labels
The speaker terminals are color-coded for
identification purpose.
Speaker
Color
Front left, Front high left, Front wide
left, Zone 2 left, Zone 3 left
White
Front right, Front high right, Front wide Red
right, Zone 2 right, Zone 3 right
Center
Green
Surround left
Blue
Surround right
Gray
Surround back left
Brown
Surround back right
Tan
The supplied speaker cable labels are also colorcoded and you should attach them to the positive (+)
side of each speaker cable in accordance with the
table above. Then all you need to do is to match the
color of each label to the corresponding speaker
terminal.
En-15
Connections
Connecting the Speaker Cables/Powered Subwoofers
Please connect a , b , c , d , e and f for 5.1-channel surround.
■ 9.1-channel playback
In addition to 5.1-channel playback connection, if surround back, front high, and front wide speakers are
connected, selecting the speakers for 9.1-channel playback (surround back and front high, surround back and
front wide, or front high and front wide) is possible. You can set which speakers you want to use by priority. See
“Selecting Speaker Layout” (➔ page 54).
If you’re using only one
surround back speaker,
connect it to the SURR
BACK L terminals.
J
Front high
speaker R
L
Front wide
speaker R
b
Front
speaker R
a
Front
speaker L
K
Front wide
speaker L
I
Front high
speaker L
Red
Red
Before connecting the power cord, connect all of
your speakers and AV components. A setup wizard
is launched upon first-time use to let you perform
the settings (➔ page 26).
• Read the instructions supplied with your speakers.
• By default, speakers for 7.1-channel surround are
configured to use: front right/front left/center/
surround right/surround left/surround back right/
surround back left/subwoofer.
c
Center speaker
Red
• Pay close attention to speaker wiring polarity. In
other words, connect positive (+) terminals only to
positive (+) terminals, and negative (–) terminals
only to negative (–) terminals. If you get them the
wrong way around, the sound will be out of phase
and will sound unnatural.
Green
White
White
White
■ Screw-type speaker terminals
Strip 1/2" to 5/8" (12 to 15 mm) of insulation from the
ends of the speaker cables, and twist the bare wires
tightly, as shown.
1/2" to 5/8" (12 to 15 mm)
Gray
Powered
subwoofer
f
Powered
subwoofer
f
Surround
speaker R
e
Tan
Surround back
speaker R
H
Brown
Surround back
speaker L
G
En-16
Blue
Surround
speaker L
d
■ Banana Plugs (North American models)
• If you are using banana plugs, tighten the speaker
terminal before inserting the banana plug.
• Do not insert the speaker code directly into the
center hole of the speaker terminal.
Connections
■ 11.1-channel playback
By using a combination of the built-in power amplifier
for 9-channel and an external power amplifier for
2-channel, you can enjoy up to 11.1-channel
playback. Connect the external power amplifier’s
analog audio input jacks to FRONT WIDE PRE OUT
of the AV receiver with audio cables. To perform the
11.1-channel playback, set the “11ch Playback”
setting to “Yes” (➔ page 65).
■ Speaker Connection Precautions
• You can connect speakers with an impedance of
between 4 and 16 ohms. If the impedance of any of
the connected speakers is 4 ohms or more, but less
than 6 ohms, be sure to set the minimum speaker
impedance to “4ohms” (➔ page 65). If you use
speakers with a lower impedance, and use the
amplifier at high volume levels for a long period of
time, the built-in protection circuit may be activated.
• Unnecessarily long, or very thin speaker cables may
affect the sound quality and should be avoided.
• Be careful not to short the positive and negative
wires. Doing so may damage the AV receiver.
• Make sure the metal core of the wire does not have
contact with the AV receiver’s rear panel. Doing so
may damage the AV receiver.
Bi-amping the Front Speakers
Important:
• When making the bi-amping connections, be sure to
remove the jumper bars that link the speakers’ tweeter
(high) and woofer (low) terminals.
• Bi-amping can be used only with speakers that support
bi-amping. Refer to your speaker manual.
Bi-amping provides improved bass and treble
performance.
When bi-amping is used, the AV receiver is able to
drive up to a 7.1 speaker system in the main room.
Perform bi-amping connections by using FRONT
terminals and FRONT HIGH terminals as shown
below.
Once you’ve completed the bi-amping connections
and turned on the AV receiver, you must set the
speaker setting to enable bi-amping (➔ page 65).
Power amplifier
Front wide
speaker R
Front wide
speaker L
• Don’t connect more than one cable to each speaker
terminal. Doing so may damage the AV receiver.
• Don’t connect one speaker to several terminals.
Tweeter (high)
Woofer (low)
Note
• If the “11ch Playback” setting is set to “Yes”, no sound is
output from the FRONT WIDE terminals.
Front right
En-17
Front left
Connections
Using Speakers Without Crossover Network
Using Dipole Speakers
Important:
• Speakers without crossover network are speakers with no built-in crossover network.
• With speakers without crossover network, be careful NOT to connect tweeters and
woofers the wrong way around, as this may damage your speakers.
• With speakers without crossover network, be careful NOT to set “Speakers Type(Front)”
to “Bi-Amp” as this may damage your speakers. Make sure that this setting is set to
“Digital Crossover”.
• Confirm that your speakers are without crossover network by referring to your speaker
manual.
Connecting speakers without crossover network provide a fine, three-dimensional
sound field that extends bass and treble performance to the fullest extent. When
speakers without crossover network are used, the AV receiver is able to drive up
to a 7.1 speaker system in the main room.
Connect the FRONT (LOW FREQUENCY) terminals and the speaker’s Woofer
(low) terminals, and FRONT HIGH (HIGH FREQUENCY) terminals and the
speaker’s Tweeter (high) terminals as shown below.
You must enable “Digital Crossover” in “Speakers Type(Front)” (➔ page 65)
and make the settings of “Digital Processing Crossover Network” (➔ page 68).
You can use dipole speakers for the surround and
surround back speakers. Dipole speakers output the
same sound in two directions.
Dipole speakers typically have an arrow printed on
them to indicate how they should be positioned. The
surround dipole speakers (a) should be positioned so
that their arrows point toward the TV/screen, while
the surround back dipole speakers (b) should be
positioned so that their arrows point toward each
other, as shown.
TV/screen
a
a
b
Connecting a Power Amplifier
You can use the AV receiver as a preamp. Connect all speaker outputs to the
power amplifier. See the manuals supplied with your amplifier for details.
Note
• You need to make the setting before connecting the speakers.
Power amplifier
Tweeter (high)
Woofer (low)
Front right
Note
Front left
b
• Specify “None” for any channel that you don’t want to output (➔ page 65).
• To perform the 11.1-channel playback, set the “11ch Playback” setting to “Yes”
(➔ page 65).
En-18
Connections
Connecting the TV/AV components
E Use this jack to connect to the game consoles,
etc.
Before connecting the power cord, connect all of your speakers and AV components. To display the setup
menu on the TV screen, connecting the TV to HDMI OUT MAIN is required.
G Use this port to connect to a LAN port on a router
so the AV receiver can be connected to your
home network.
F
G
I
J
E
D
C
B
AH
H Use jack and terminal here to connect the
supplied FM antenna and AM loop antenna.
I Use this jack to make connections using an
analog audio cable.
With this connection, you can also enjoy analog
audio from external components while you are in
Zone 2/3.
J Use this jack to make connections using a
component video cable.
K Use this jack to connect to the camcorder/MHLenabled mobile device, etc.
If you select the input selector button, the signal from
the component connected to the assigned jack is
played.
B C D E
K
Input selector
buttons
• Before making any AV connections, read the
manuals supplied with your AV components.
• Push plugs in all the way to make good connections
(loose connections can cause noise or
malfunctions).
• To prevent interference, keep audio and video
cables away from power cords and speaker cables.
Tip
Connections
A Use this jack to connect to the HDMI input of the
TV. If your TV doesn’t support Audio Return
Channel (ARC)*1, you need to connect an optical
digital cable together with the HDMI cable to jack
F.
Another TV can be connected to the HDMI OUT
SUB jack.
*1
ARC is the function that carries the audio signal
from the TV to jack A. With ARC, a single HDMI
cable can connect the TV and the AV receiver.
B Use this jack to connect to your Blu-ray Disc/DVD
player, etc.
C Use this jack to connect to the Satellite/cable settop box, etc.
D Use this jack to connect to the set top box/digital
video recorder, etc.
En-19
• To listen to the audio of a component connected via HDMI
through your TV’s speakers, enable “HDMI Through”
(➔ page 78) and set the AV receiver to standby mode.
• In the case of Blu-ray Disc/DVD players, if no sound is
output despite following the above-mentioned procedure,
set your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player’s HDMI audio settings to
PCM.
• Connect a turntable (MM) that has a built-in phono preamp
to TV/CD IN, or connect it to PHONO IN with the phono
preamp turned off. If your turntable (MM) doesn’t have a
phono preamp, connect it to PHONO IN. If your turntable
has a moving coil (MC) type cartridge, you’ll need a
commercially available MC head amp or MC transformer to
connect to PHONO IN. See your turntable’s manual for
details. If your turntable has a ground wire, connect it to the
AV receiver’s GND screw. With some turntables,
connecting the ground wire may produce an audible hum. If
this happens, disconnect it.
• If you connect your personal computer to PC IN (Analog
RGB), you must assign “- - - - -” to the “PC” input selector
(➔ pages 63, 64).
Connections
■ MHL (Mobile High-Definition Link)
With its support for MHL (Mobile High-Definition Link),
the AUX (Front) input allows you to deliver highdefinition video from a connected mobile device.
Network connection by wireless LAN is possible. See
“Performing Wireless LAN Setup” for connections
(➔ page 31).
Internet radio
K
WAN
Modem
MHL
OUT
Router
LAN
MHL-enabled mobile device, etc.
Connecting to the Network (Optional)
Computer or media server
The following diagram shows how you can connect
the AV receiver to your home network. In this
example, it’s connected to a LAN port on a router,
which has a 4-port 100Base-TX switch built-in.
Do not connect the AV receiver’s USB port to a USB
port on your computer. Music on your computer
cannot be played through the AV receiver in this way.
The default of the assignment for the input selector buttons and jacks are as shown below. These settings can
be changed. (The assignment for the composite video jacks, analog audio jacks, DIGITAL AUX INPUT jack and
HDMI AUX INPUT jack cannot be changed.)
Input selector buttons HDMI jacks
COMPONENT VIDEO
jacks
DIGITAL IN COAXIAL
and OPTICAL jacks
Composite video and
analog audio jacks
BD/DVD
HDMI IN 1
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 1
DIGITAL IN
COAXIAL 1
VIDEO/AUDIO IN
BD/DVD
CBL/SAT
HDMI IN 2
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 2
DIGITAL IN
COAXIAL 2
VIDEO/AUDIO IN
CBL/SAT
STB/DVR
HDMI IN 3
DIGITAL IN
COAXIAL 3
VIDEO/AUDIO IN
STB/DVR
GAME 1
HDMI IN 4
DIGITAL IN
OPTICAL 1
VIDEO/AUDIO IN
GAME 1
GAME 2
HDMI IN 5
PC
HDMI IN 6
AUX
HDMI AUX INPUT
TV/CD
AUDIO IN PC
DIGITAL AUX INPUT
VIDEO/AUDIO AUX
INPUT
DIGITAL IN
OPTICAL 2
AUDIO IN TV/CD
PHONO
AUDIO IN PHONO
En-20
About RIHD
The AV receiver allows interoperability of the CEC
(Consumer Electronics Control) specified in the HDMI
standard, which is known as RIHD. Various linked
operations can be performed by connecting the AV
receiver to an RIHD-compatible TV, player, or
recorder.
Default setting is set to off, so it is required to change
the setting to on.
Perform this setting after the initial setup.
About p-compatible components
The following components are p-compatible
(As of January 2013).
■ TV
• Sharp TV
■ Players/Recorders
• Onkyo and Integra p-compatible players
• Toshiba players and recorders
• Sharp players and recorders (only when used
together with Sharp TV)
*
Models other than those mentioned above may have some
interoperability if compatible with CEC, which is part of the
HDMI Standard, but operation cannot be guaranteed.
Note
• For proper linked operations, do not connect more
p-compatible components than the quantities
specified below, to the HDMI input terminal.
– Blu-ray Disc/DVD players: up to three.
– Blu-ray Disc/DVD recorders/Digital Video Recorders: up
to three.
– Cable/Satellite Set-top boxes: up to four.
• Do not connect the AV receiver to another AV receiver/AV
amplifier via HDMI.
• Proper linked operations are not guaranteed when more
p-compatible components than the abovementioned quantities are connected.
Connections
Operations that can be performed with
p connection
■ For p-compatible TV
The following linked operations are enabled by
connecting the AV receiver to an p-compatible
TV.
• The AV receiver will enter standby mode when the
TV is set to standby.
• You can set on the menu screen of the TV to either
output the audio from the speakers connected to the
AV receiver, or from the speakers of the TV.
• It is possible to output the audio coming from the
tuner or auxiliary input of your TV to the speakers of
the AV receiver. (A connection such as an optical
digital cable or similar is required in addition to the
HDMI cable.)
• Input to the AV receiver can be selected with the
remote controller of the TV.
• Operations such as volume adjustment or similar for
the AV receiver can be performed from the remote
controller of the TV.
■ For p-compatible players/recorders
The following linked operations are enabled by
connecting the AV receiver to an p-compatible
player/recorder.
• When playback is started on the player/recorder, AV
receiver will switch to the HDMI input of the
player/recorder that is playing back.
• Operation of the player/recorder is possible using
the remote controller supplied with the AV receiver.
*
Depending on the model used, not all operations may be
available.
Note
• Do not assign an HDMI IN to the TV/CD selector at this
time, otherwise appropriate CEC (Consumer Electronics
Control) operation will not be guaranteed.
Confirm the settings
1. Turn on the power for all connected components.
2. Turn off the power of the TV, and confirm that the
power of the connected components is turned off
automatically with the link operation.
3. Turn on the power of the Blu-ray Disc/DVD
player/recorder.
4. Start playback on the Blu-ray Disc/DVD
player/recorder, and verify the following:
• The AV receiver automatically turns on, and
selects the input to which the Blu-ray Disc/DVD
player/recorder is connected.
• The TV automatically turns on, and selects the
input to which the AV receiver is connected.
5. Following the operating instructions of the TV,
select “Use the TV speakers” from the menu
screen of the TV, and confirm that the audio is
output from the speakers of the TV, and not from
the speakers connected to the AV receiver.
6. Select “Use the speakers connected from the AV
receiver” from the menu screen of the TV, and
confirm that the audio is output from the speakers
connected to the AV receiver, and not from the TV
speakers.
• On the TV, when you select anything other than the HDMI
jack to which the AV receiver is connected, the input on the
AV receiver will be switched to “TV/CD”.
• The AV receiver will automatically power on in conjunction
when it determines it to be necessary. Even if the AV
receiver is connected to an p compatible TV or
player/recorder, it will not power on if it is not necessary. It
may not power on in conjunction when the TV is set to
output audio from the TV.
• Linked functions with the AV receiver may not work
depending on the component model connected. In such
cases, operate the AV receiver directly.
Connection Tips
The video and audio signal flow
Connect the AV receiver between the AV
components and the TV. The signal from the AV
components is carried through the AV receiver. You
can enjoy the audio of the TV through the AV
receiver.
Blu-ray Disc/
DVD player, etc.
AV receiver
Note
• Audio from DVD-Audio or Super Audio CD may not output
from the TV speakers. You will be able to output the audio
from the TV speakers by setting the audio output of the
DVD player to 2ch PCM. (It may not be possible depending
on the player models.)
• Even if you set to output audio on the TV speakers, audio
will be output from the speakers connected to the AV
receiver when you adjust the volume or switch the input on
the AV receiver. To output audio from the TV speakers, redo the corresponding operations on the TV.
• In case of an p connection with u and u audio
control compatible components, do not connect the u
cable at the same time.
En-21
Audio
Video, audio
TV, projector, etc.
Video components can be connected by using any
one of the following video connection formats:
composite video, PC IN (Analog RGB), component
video, or HDMI, the latter offering the best picture
quality.
Connections
Video input signals flow through the AV receiver as
shown, with composite video, PC IN (Analog RGB),
and component video sources all being upconverted
for the HDMI output(s).
*2
Signal Selection Example
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc.
Composite
Component
HDMI
IN
Video Signal Flow Chart
AV receiver
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc.
MONITOR OUT
Composite
PC IN
Component
(Analog RGB)
Composite
HDMI
IN
HDMI
Component
MONITOR OUT
Component
Tip
• When a signal is input via HDMI and the corresponding
input selector is selected, the HDMI indicator lights. In the
case of an optical or coaxial connection, the DIGITAL
indicator lights. If the analog audio is output, or if neither
HDMI nor digital signal inputs are assigned, ANALOG
indicator lights.
TV, projector, etc.
AV receiver
Composite
This is possible when “Audio Return Channel” is set to
“Auto” (➔ page 79), the TV/CD input selector is
selected, and your TV is ARC capable.
HDMI
TV, projector, etc.
The composite video and component video outputs
pass through their respective input signals as they are.
■ Signal Selection
If signals are present at more than one input, the
inputs will be selected automatically in the following
order of priority: HDMI, component video, composite
video.
However, for component video only, regardless of
whether a component video signal is actually present,
if a component video input is assigned to the input
selector, that component video input will be selected.
And if no component video input is assigned to the
input selector, this will be interpreted as no
component video signal being present.
In the Signal Selection Example shown below, video
signals are present at both the HDMI and composite
video inputs. However, the HDMI signal is
automatically selected as the source and the video is
output by the HDMI outputs.
• For optimal video performance, THX recommends
that video signals pass through the system without
upconversion (e.g., component video input passing
through to component video output).
• To by-pass the upconversion, set the “Picture
Mode” setting to “Bypass” (➔ page 74).
Audio components can be connected by using any of
the following audio connection formats: analog,
optical, coaxial, or HDMI.
When choosing a connection format, bear in mind
that the AV receiver does not convert digital input
signals for analog line outputs and vice versa.
AV Cables and Jacks
■ HDMI
HDMI connections can carry digital video and audio.
■ Component video
Component video separates the luminance (Y) and
color difference signals (PB, PR), providing the best
picture quality (some TV manufacturers label their
component video sockets slightly differently).
Y
If signals are present at more than one input, the
inputs will be selected automatically in the following
order of priority: HDMI, digital, analog.
Audio Signal Flow Chart
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc.
Analog
Coaxial
Optical
HDMI
IN
AV receiver
*1
*1
*1
OUT
HDMI
*1
*2
TV, projector, etc.
*1
Depends on the “Audio TV Out (Main)” or “Audio TV
Out (Sub)” setting (➔ page 79).
En-22
Green
CB/PB
Blue
CR/PR
Red
■ Analog RGB
This is a conventional analog interface to connect a
PC and a display device (also called D-Sub or
D-subminiature).
Connections
■ Composite video
Composite video is commonly used on TVs, DVDs,
and other video equipment.
Yellow
Connecting the Antennas
This section explains how to connect the supplied indoor FM antenna and AM loop antenna.
The AV receiver won’t pick up any radio signals without any antenna connected, so you must connect the
antenna to use the tuner.
■ Optical digital audio
Optical digital connections allow you to enjoy digital
sound such as PCM*1, Dolby Digital or DTS. The
audio quality is the same as coaxial.
Push.
■ Coaxial digital audio
Coaxial digital connections allow you to enjoy digital
sound such as PCM*1, Dolby Digital or DTS. The
audio quality is the same as optical.
Insert wire.
Release.
Assembling the AM loop antenna
(North American
models)
(European and
Australian models)
Insert the plug fully
into the jack.
Insert the plug fully
into the jack.
Caution
• Be careful not to injure
yourself when using
thumbtacks.
Orange
■ Analog audio (RCA)
Analog audio connections (RCA) carry analog audio.
Thumbtacks, etc.
White
Red
AM loop antenna (supplied)
*1
For PCM signals, the supported sampling rates are
32/44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz. With HDMI connections, 176.4
and 192 kHz are also supported.
Note
• The AV receiver does not support SCART plugs.
• The AV receiver’s optical digital jacks have shutter-type
covers that open when an optical plug is inserted and close
when it’s removed. Push plugs in all the way.
Caution
• To prevent shutter damage, hold the optical plug
straight when inserting and removing.
Indoor FM antenna (supplied)
Note
• Once your AV receiver is ready for use, you’ll need to tune into a radio station and position the antenna to achieve the best
possible reception.
• Keep the AM loop antenna as far away as possible from your AV receiver, TV, speaker cables, and power cords.
Tip
• If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied indoor FM antenna, try a commercially available outdoor FM antenna
instead.
• If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied indoor AM loop antenna, try using it with a commercially available
outdoor AM antenna.
En-23
Connections
Connecting Onkyo RI Components
1
Make sure that each Onkyo component is
connected with an analog audio cable
(connection I in the hookup examples)
(➔ page 19).
2
3
Make the u connection (see the illustration).
Using Headphones
1
While the headphones plug is inserted in the
PHONES jack, = indicator, speaker/channel
indicator FL and FR lights.
If you’re using an RI Dock, or cassette tape
deck, change the Input Display (➔ page 54).
Note
With u (Remote Interactive), you can use the
following special functions:
e.g., cassette tape deck
■ System On/Auto Power On
When you start playback on a component connected
via u, while the AV receiver is on standby, the AV
receiver will automatically turn on and select that
component as the input source.
■ Direct Change
When playback is started on a component connected
via u, the AV receiver automatically selects that
component as the input source.
■ Remote Control
You can use the AV receiver’s remote controller to
control your other u-capable Onkyo components,
pointing the remote controller at the AV receiver’s
remote control sensor instead of the component. You
must enter the appropriate remote control code first
(➔ page 88).
Connect a pair of stereo headphones with a
standard plug (1/4 inch or ø 6.3 mm) to the
PHONES jack.
R
L
ANALOG
AUDIO OUT
R
L
ANALOG
AUDIO OUT
RI Dock
Note
• Use only u cables for u connections. u cables are
supplied with Onkyo components.
• Some components have two u jacks. You can connect
either one to the AV receiver. The other jack is for
connecting additional u-capable components.
• Connect only Onkyo components to u jacks. Connecting
other manufacturer’s components may cause a
malfunction.
• Some components may not support all u functions. Refer
to the manuals supplied with your Onkyo components.
• While Zone 2/3 is on, the System On/Auto Power On and
Direct Change u functions do not work.
En-24
• Always turn down the volume before connecting your
headphones.
• While the headphones plug is inserted in the PHONES
jack, the speakers are turned off. (The Zone 2/3
speakers are not turned off.)
• When you connect a pair of headphones, the listening
mode is set to Stereo, unless it’s already set to Stereo,
Mono, Direct, or Pure Audio.
Turning On & Basic Operations
Turning On & Basic
Operations
the same circuit. If this is a problem, plug the AV receiver
into a different branch circuit.
• Do not use a power cord other than the one supplied with
the AV receiver. The supplied power cord is designed
exclusively for use with the AV receiver and should not be
used with any other equipment.
• Never disconnect the power cord from the AV receiver
while the other end is still plugged into a wall outlet. Doing
so may cause an electric shock. Always disconnect the
power cord from the wall outlet first, and then the AV
receiver.
Turning Off
1
Press 8ON/STANDBY on the front panel.
or
Press RECEIVER followed by 8RECEIVER on
the remote controller.
The AV receiver will enter standby mode. To
prevent any loud surprises when you turn on the
AV receiver, always turn down the volume before
you turn it off.
Turning On
Turning On/Off the AV
Receiver
Connecting the Power Cord
1
Connect the supplied power cord to the AV
receiver’s AC INLET.
Tip
1
Press 8ON/STANDBY on the front panel.
or
Press RECEIVER followed by 8RECEIVER on
the remote controller.
The AV receiver comes on and its display lights.
■ Smooth Operation in a Few Easy Steps
(Initial Setup)
To ensure smooth operation, here’s a few easy steps
to help you configure the AV receiver before you use
it for the very first time. These settings only need to
be made once. See “Initial Setup” for details
(➔ page 26).
To AC wall outlet
2
Plug the power cord into an AC wall outlet.
Note
• Before connecting the power cord, connect all of your
speakers and AV components.
• Turning on the AV receiver may cause a momentary power
surge that might interfere with other electrical equipment on
En-25
• The HYBRID STANDBY indicator may light depending on
the status of settings (➔ page 26).
• For details on power management settings, see “Auto
Standby” (➔ page 80).
• If the HDMI Through setting is not set in standby mode, an
MHL-enabled mobile device cannot be charged even if it is
connected.
Turning On & Basic Operations
Firmware Update Notification
When a new version of the firmware is available, the
notification window “AV receiver : Firmware Update
Available” pops up. This notification only appears
when the AV receiver is connected to the Internet
(➔ pages 20, 31). To perform the firmware update,
follow the instructions on screen.
Use q/w and ENTER on the AV receiver or remote
controller to select one of the options.
` Update Now:
Starts the firmware update.
Refer to “Firmware Update” (➔ page 104).
` Remind me Later:
The update notification will pop up again the
next time you turn the AV receiver on.
` Never Remind me:
Disables the automatic update notification.
Tip
• The update notification window can be enabled or disabled
in “Update Notice” (➔ page 81).
About the HYBRID STANDBY indicator
By way of optimized circuitry, this function reduces
power consumption when the AV receiver is in
standby mode. The HYBRID STANDBY indicator will
light in either of the following conditions:
–“HDMI Through” is enabled (the HDMI indicator is
off).
–“Network Standby” is enabled (the NET indicator
is off).
Initial Setup
1
This section explains the settings that we recommend
you to make before using the AV receiver for the very
first time. A setup wizard is launched upon first-time
use to let you perform those settings.
Tip
• The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is
connected to HDMI OUT MAIN.
Selecting the Language for the Onscreen Setup Menus
This step determines the language used for the onscreen setup menus. See “Language” in “OSD
Setup” (➔ page 77).
Use q/w on the AV receiver or remote
controller to select one of the following
options, and then press ENTER.
` Yes:
Continues to “Audyssey MultEQ XT32:
Auto Setup”.
` No:
Skips the settings and terminates the initial
setup. The setup wizard goes to
“Terminating the Initial Setup” (➔ page 27).
You can always restart the initial setup by
selecting “Initial Setup” in the “Hardware
Setup” menu (➔ page 81).
Audyssey MultEQ XT32: Auto Setup
Tip
• Pressing HOME will close the setup wizard. To restart the
initial setup, select “Initial Setup” in the “Hardware Setup”
menu (➔ page 81).
After selecting the language for on-screen setup
menus, a welcome screen is displayed.
Initial Setup
Welcome to initial setup. Have you connected all the speakers and devices?
Before starting, please connect speakers and sources.
Now, would you like to start initial setup?
1st Step : Audyssey MultEQ XT32: Auto Setup
2nd Step : Source Connection
3rd Step : Remote Mode Setup
4th Step : Network Connection
Yes
No
HOME Exit
Note
• If Zones are turned on or, if a mobile device connected to
the Front Input (MHL) is charging, the HYBRID STANDBY
indicator won’t light.
En-26
This step performs the automatic speaker setup.
1
Use q/w to select one of the following options,
and then press ENTER.
` Do it Now:
The automatic speaker setup is performed
following instructions on screen. Refer to
step 2 of “Using the Automatic Speaker
Setup” (➔ page 28). When this setting is
complete, the setup wizard continues to
“Source Connection”.
` Do it Later:
Skips this setting.
Press ENTER and continue to “Source
Connection”.
Turning On & Basic Operations
Source Connection
Remote Mode Setup
This step checks the connection of source
components.
With this step, you can enter remote control codes for
the components you want to operate.
1
1
2
3
4
Use q/w to select one of the following options,
and then press ENTER.
`Yes, Continue:
Performs the checkings.
`No, Skip:
Skips this step and continues to “Remote
Mode Setup”.
Select the input selector for which you want to
check the connection and press ENTER.
The picture and sound of the corresponding
source should appear on screen with a
verification prompt.
When prompted, use q/w to select one of the
following options and then press ENTER.
`Yes:
Confirms that the source is properly
displayed.
`No:
Displays an error report. Follow the
troubleshooting instructions and recheck the
source.
Use q/w to select one of the following options,
and then press ENTER.
`Yes:
Returns to step 2.
`No, Done Checking:
The setup wizard continues to “Remote
Mode Setup”.
2
Use q/w to select one of the following options,
and then press ENTER.
` Yes:
Performs the remote control code input.
Refer to step 5 of “Looking up for Remote
Control Codes” (➔ page 87).
` No, Skip:
Skips this step and continues to “Network
Connection”.
2
Follow the instructions on screen to perform
the network checking.
The checking is complete when the message
“Successfully connected.” appears at the
middle of the screen. Press ENTER to terminate
the initial setup.
Tip
• If you have selected “Wireless”, you need to perform
the wireless LAN setup. See “Performing Wireless
LAN Setup” (➔ page 31). This completes the initial
setup.
3
When you’re finished, select one of the
following options and press ENTER.
` Yes, Done:
The setup wizard continues to “Network
Connection”.
` No, not yet:
You can enter other remote control codes.
If an error message appears, select one of the
following options and press ENTER.
` Retry:
Performs the checking again.
` No, Do it Later:
Skips this step and terminates the initial
setup. The setup wizard goes to
“Terminating the Initial Setup”.
Terminating the Initial Setup
Network Connection
This step checks your network connection.
1
Use q/w to select one of the following options,
and then press ENTER.
` Yes:
Performs the checkings.
` No, Skip:
Skips this step and terminates the initial
setup.
En-27
This step ends the initial setup process.
1
Press ENTER.
To restart the initial setup, select “Initial Setup”
in the “Hardware Setup” menu (➔ page 81).
Turning On & Basic Operations
Using the Automatic Speaker Setup
With the supplied calibrated microphone,
Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 automatically determines
the number of speakers connected, their size for
purposes of bass management, optimum crossover
frequencies to the subwoofer (if present), and
distances from the primary listening position.
Audyssey MultEQ XT32 then removes the distortion
caused by room acoustics by capturing room
acoustical problems over the listening area in both
the frequency and time domain. The result is clear,
well-balanced sound for everyone.
Audyssey MultEQ XT32 can be used with
Audyssey Dynamic EQ® and
Audyssey Dynamic Volume® (➔ page 72).
Before using this function, connect and position all of
your speakers.
Audyssey MultEQ XT32 offers two ways of
measuring: the “Audyssey Quick Start” and
“Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Full Calibration”.
• “Audyssey Quick Start” uses the measurement
from one position to perform the speaker setting
only.
• “Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Full Calibration” uses
the measurement from eight positions to correct
room response in addition to the speaker setting.
The more positions are used in measuring, the better
the listening environment will become. We
recommend using a measurement from eight
positions to create the best listening environment.
The Quick Start takes 2 minutes and Full Calibration
takes about 20 minutes.
Total measurement time varies depending on the
number of speakers.
Measurement procedure
To create a listening environment in your home
theater that all listeners will enjoy,
Audyssey MultEQ XT32 takes measurements at up to
eight positions within the listening area. Position the
microphone at ear height of a seated listener with the
microphone tip pointed directly at the ceiling using a
tripod. Do not hold the microphone in your hand
during measurements as this will produce inaccurate
results.
■ First measurement position
Also referred to as the Main Listening Position, this
refers to the most central position where one would
normally sit within the listening environment.
Audyssey MultEQ XT32 uses the measurements
from this position to calculate speaker distance, level,
and the optimum crossover value for the subwoofer.
■ Second-eighth measurement positions
These are the other listening positions (i.e., the
places where the other listeners will sit). You can
measure up to eight positions.
TV
def
cab
gh
: Listening area
a to h: Listening position
En-28
Note
• Make the room as quiet as possible. Background noise and
Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) can disrupt the room
measurements. Close windows, televisions, radios, air
conditioners, fluorescent lights, home appliances, light
dimmers, or other devices. Turn off the cell phone (even if
it is not in use) or place it away from all audio electronics.
• The microphone picks up test tones played through each
speaker as Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and
Speaker Setup runs.
• Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker
Setup cannot be performed while a pair of headphones is
connected.
Turning On & Basic Operations
1
Turn on the AV receiver and the connected TV.
On the TV, select the input to which the AV
receiver is connected.
2
Set the speaker setup microphone at the Main
Listening Position a, and connect it to the
SETUP MIC jack.
If “Speakers Type(Front)” is set to “Digital
Crossover”, a confirmation screen appears.
Select “Next” to display the screen for Digital
Processing Crossover Network (➔ page 68).
Continue with the settings.
4
SETUP MIC jack
Adjust the subwoofer volume level to 75 dB,
and then press ENTER.
Test tones are played through the subwoofer.
Use the volume control on the subwoofer.
7
Place the speaker setup microphone at the
next position, and then press ENTER.
Audyssey MultEQ XT32 performs more
measurements. This takes a few minutes.
8
9
When prompted, repeat step 7.
Use q/w to select an option, and then press
ENTER.
MultEQ XT32: Auto Setup
AUDYSSEY
Note
• If your subwoofer does not have a volume control,
disregard the displayed level and press ENTER to
proceed to the next step.
• If you set the subwoofer’s volume control to its
maximum and the level displayed is lower than 75 dB,
leave the subwoofer’s volume control at its maximum
and press ENTER to proceed to the next step.
Speaker setup microphone
The speaker setting menu appears.
Note
• The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is
connected to HDMI OUT MAIN. If your TV is
connected to other video outputs, use the AV
receiver’s display when changing settings.
3
When you’ve finished making the settings,
press ENTER.
MultEQ XT32: Auto Setup
AUDYSSEY
Speakers Type(Front)
Powered Zone 2
Powered Zone 3
11ch Playback
Subwoofer
Normal
No
No
No
Yes
Perform the “2. Speaker Setup” according to your
speaker configuration:
– Speakers Type(Front) (➔ page 65)
– Powered Zone 2 (➔ page 65)
– Powered Zone 3 (➔ page 65)
– 11ch Playback (➔ page 65)
– Subwoofer (➔ page 65)
-- Review Speaker Configuration --
5
Use q/w to select “Audyssey Quick Start” or
“Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Full Calibration”,
and then press ENTER.
6
Press ENTER.
Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 Room Correction and
Speaker Setup starts.
Test tones are played through each speaker as
Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and
Speaker Setup runs. This process takes a few
minutes. Please refrain from talking during
measurements and do not stand between
speakers and the microphone.
Do not disconnect the speaker setup microphone
during Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction
and Speaker Setup, unless you want to cancel
the setup.
If you select “Audyssey Quick Start”, you will go
to step 9.
If you use a powered subwoofer(s), go to step 4.
If not, go to step 5.
En-29
Subwoofer
Front
Center
Surround
Front Wide
Front High
Surround Back
Surround Back Ch
Save
Cancel
Yes
100Hz
40Hz
100Hz
None
100Hz
120Hz
2ch
The options are:
` Save:
Save the calculated settings and exit
Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction
and Speaker Setup.
` Cancel:
Cancel Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room
Correction and Speaker Setup.
Tip
• You can view the calculated settings for the speaker
configuration, speaker distances, and speaker levels
by using e/r.
Turning On & Basic Operations
10
Use q/w to select a target, and use e/r to
change the setting.
After the results of Audyssey MultEQ® XT32
have been saved, the menu will display the
“Audyssey” (➔ page 71), “Dynamic EQ”
(➔ page 72), “Dynamic Volume” (➔ page 72)
settings.
Error Messages
While Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and
Speaker Setup is in progress, one of the error
messages below may appear.
MultEQ XT32: Auto Setup
AUDYSSEY
Ambient noise is too high.
Note
• When “Audyssey Quick Start” has been used for
measurement, “Audyssey” cannot be selected.
• These settings are applied to all input selectors.
11
12
Retry
Cancel
Press ENTER.
Error message
Disconnect the speaker setup microphone.
Note
• You can cancel Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction
and Speaker Setup at any point in this procedure simply by
disconnecting the setup microphone.
• Do not connect or disconnect any speakers during
Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker
Setup.
• If the AV receiver is muted, it will be unmuted automatically
when Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and
Speaker Setup starts.
• Changes to the room after Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room
Correction and Speaker Setup requires you run
Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker
Setup again, as room EQ characteristics may have
changed.
The options are:
` Retry:
Try again.
` Cancel:
Cancel Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room
Correction and Speaker Setup.
• Ambient noise is too high.
The background noise is too loud. Remove the
source of the noise and try again.
• Speaker Matching Error!
The number of speakers detected was different
from that of the first measurement. Check the
speaker connection.
• Writing Error!
This message appears if saving fails. Try saving
again. If this message appears after 2 or 3
attempts, contact your Onkyo dealer.
• Speaker Detect Error
This message appears if a speaker is not detected.
“No” means that no speaker was detected.
Tip
• See “Speaker Configuration” for appropriate settings
(➔ page 14).
En-30
The setup of the speaker can be done manually
(➔ page 65).
The setup of the volume level of each speaker also
can be done manually (➔ pages 66, 67).
Note
• Please note that THX recommends any THX main
speakers be set to “80Hz(THX)”. If you set up your
speakers using Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction
and Speaker Setup, please make sure manually that any
THX speakers are set to “80Hz(THX)” crossover
(➔ page 65).
• Sometimes due to the electrical complexities of subwoofers
and the interaction with the room, THX recommends setting
the level and the distance of the subwoofer manually.
• Sometimes due to interaction with the room, you may
notice irregular results when setting the level and/or
distance of the main speakers. If this happens, THX
recommends setting them manually.
Using a Powered Subwoofer
If you’re using a powered subwoofer and it outputs
very low-frequency sound at a low volume level, it
may not be detected by Audyssey MultEQ XT32
Room Correction and Speaker Setup.
If the “Subwoofer” appears on the “Review Speaker
Configuration” screen as “No”, increase the
subwoofer’s volume to the half-way point, set it to its
highest crossover frequency, and then try running
Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and
Speaker Setup again. Note that if the volume is set
too high and the sound distorts, detection issues may
occur, so use an appropriate volume level. If the
subwoofer has a low-pass filter switch, set it to Off or
Direct. Refer to your subwoofer’s instruction manual
for details.
Turning On & Basic Operations
Performing Wireless LAN Setup
5
A wireless LAN (WLAN) is a local area network that
relies on wireless communication.
To achieve a wireless network connection, you will
need the following component:
■ Access point
Also known as the base station, it links your AV
receiver (wireless client) with a PC or network.
Access points fall into two categories: the bridge
type that only performs data relay in a local area
network, or the router type that has a built-in router
functionality.
To achieve a wireless network connection, it is
necessary to perform the wireless LAN setup. The
setup can be done either automatically or manually.
You use your AV receiver as a wireless client
(wireless terminal) and connect it to a PC or to the
Internet.
Automatic wireless LAN setup
1
2
Press RECEIVER followed by HOME.
3
Use q/w to select “Hardware Setup”, and then
press ENTER.
4
Use e/r or q/w to select “Setup”, and then
press ENTER.
Use q/w to select “Network”, and then press
ENTER.
■ PIN code method
1. Use q/w to select “PIN Code” and then press
ENTER.
An 8-digit PIN code is displayed. The PIN
code is displayed scrolling on the AV
receiver’s display.
2. Input the provided code in your Access Point.
For information on the registration process,
please refer to the instruction manual
provided with your Access Point device.
Use q/w to select “Network Connection”, and
e/r to select “Wireless”, and then press
ENTER (➔ page 80).
The “Wireless Setup” menu is displayed on
screen.
Tip
• The same setting is available even if “Wireless” is
selected in “Network Connection” in initial setup
(➔ page 27).
6
Press q/w to select (North American models)
“Push Button Configuration (Other
Routers)”*1/(excluding North American
models) “Push Button Configuration (Select
from Router)”, and press ENTER.
The method to make settings by “Push Button
Configuration” is displayed, providing the
following two options:
Tip
*1
(North American models) To connect to Linksys
E/EA Router, select “Push Button Configuration
(Linksys E/EA Router)” and make settings
following the instructions on the screen.
■ Push Button method
1. Use q/w to select “Push Button” and then
press ENTER.
2. Press the WPS button on your Access Point
device.
Tip
• How long the WPS button should be pressed differs
depending on the type of Access Point device. Refer
to the instruction manual provided with your Access
Point device for operations.
En-31
7
Press ENTER to confirm.
Connection to your Access Point starts and Wi-Fi
indicator flashes. After the connection to your
Access Point is completed, Wi-Fi indicator lights
and the connection status is displayed on the
screen.
This completes the wireless LAN setup.
You can review your setup with the “Status”
option on the “Wireless Setup” menu.
Note
• If Wi-Fi indicator doesn’t light, the connection to your
Access Point is not done successfully. Configure this
setting again (➔ page 99).
Turning On & Basic Operations
Manual wireless LAN setup
1
2
Press RECEIVER followed by HOME.
3
Use q/w to select “Hardware Setup”, and then
press ENTER.
4
Use q/w to select “Network”, and then press
ENTER.
5
Use e/r or q/w to select “Setup”, and then
press ENTER.
Use q/w to select “Network Connection”, and
e/r to select “Wireless”, and then press
ENTER (➔ page 80).
The “Wireless Setup” menu is displayed on
screen.
Tip
• The same setting is available even if “Wireless” is
selected in “Network Connection” in initial setup
(➔ page 27).
6
Use q/w to select “Search Wireless Network”
and then press ENTER.
A list of available Access Points is displayed.
Tip
• If Access Point you wish to connect to is not displayed
in the list of available Access Points, the setting also
can be made by entering “SSID”, “Security”, and
“Password” manually after selecting “Direct Input”.
7
Use q/w to select the Access Point you wish to
connect to, and then press ENTER.
Depending on your encryption settings, the
security of your Access Point will provide one of
the following patterns:
■ WEP method
1. Use q/w to select “Default Key ID” and then
press ENTER.
2. Use q/w to choose an ID between 1 and 4,
and then press ENTER.
3. Use q/w to select “Password” and then press
ENTER.
4. Use the keyboard on screen to enter the
password and confirm with “OK”.
■ WPA/WPA2 method
1. Use q/w to select “Password” and then press
ENTER.
2. Use the keyboard on screen to enter the
password and confirm with “OK”.
■ No encryption
If your Access Point device is not secured by
encryption, there is no need to input any secret
key.
Tip
• When you select the Access Point you wish to connect to
from the list of available Access Points, “SSID” and
“Security” are automatically displayed. These settings can
be changed manually.
En-32
8
Select “OK” and press ENTER.
Connection to your Access Point starts and Wi-Fi
indicator flashes. After the connection to your
Access Point is completed, Wi-Fi indicator lights
and the connection status is displayed on the
screen.
This completes the wireless LAN setup.
You can review your setup with the “Status”
option on the “Wireless Setup” menu.
Note
• If Wi-Fi indicator doesn’t light, the connection to your
Access Point is not done successfully. Configure this
setting again (➔ page 99).
Playback
Playback
• “Playing Music Files on a Shared Folder”
(➔ page 40)
• “Remote Playback” (➔ page 41)
• “Listening to AM/FM Radio” (➔ page 42)
• “Playing Audio and Video from Separate Sources”
(➔ page 44)
• “Controlling Other Components” (➔ page 87)
• “Using the Onkyo Dock” (➔ page 92)
1
* When you operate the AV receiver with the remote
controller, press the RECEIVER button first.
2
1
2
Playback
This section describes the basic operation such as
playback, listening mode, and other useful functions.
Reading this manual from the beginning to this
section helps you to understand the basic
connection/setup/operation.
3
Tip
• The time until the screen saver activates itself can be
changed in the “Screen Saver” setting (➔ page 77).
• The screen will return to its previous state if the AV receiver
is operated.
See also:
• “Playing an Audio from Bluetooth-enabled Device”
(➔ page 35)
• “Playing a USB Device” (➔ page 36)
• “Listening to TuneIn” (➔ page 36)
• “Registering Other Internet Radio” (➔ page 38)
• “Playing Music Files on a Server (DLNA)”
(➔ page 38)
Select the input on the AV receiver to play the
AV components.
Press the input selector button to which the AV
components to be played is connected.
Press the TV/CD button to play the audio of the
TV. Switching the input on the TV is also
required. Select the input to which the AV
receiver is connected by using the TV remote
controller.
* For the CEC compatible TV and the AV components
connected with HDMI connections, switching the input
is automatically performed. Switch the input manually
for other AV components.
4
■ Screen Saver
If there is no video signal on the current input source
and no operation for a specific time (three minutes by
default), a screen saver automatically comes on.
Turn on the AV receiver, the TV and the AV
components.
3
Select the desired listening mode.
You can enjoy various types of listening mode.
The listening mode is switched by pressing
Listening mode button on the AV receiver or the
remote controller.
4
Adjust the volume.
You can enjoy the surround sound.
Tip
• When listening to an HDMI component through the AV
receiver, set the HDMI component so that its video can be
seen on the TV screen (on the TV, select the input of the
HDMI component connected to the AV receiver). If the TV
power is off or the TV is set to another input source, this
may result in no sound from the AV receiver or the sound
may be cut off.
1
2
3
En-33
4
Playback
Controlling Contents of USB or
Network Devices
(➔ page 35)
Press USB or NET first.
a TOP MENU
This button displays the top menu for each media or
service.
b q/w and ENTER
These buttons navigate through the menus.
e/r
This button cycles through pages.
h
c 1
This button starts playback.
d 7
This button selects the beginning of the current song.
Pressing this button twice selects the previous song.
e 5
This button fast-reverses the current song.
f 3
This button pauses playback.
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
i
g SEARCH
You can toggle between the playback screen and the
list screen during playback.
j
h DISPLAY
This button switches between song information during
playback.
Press this button while the list screen is displayed to
return to the playback screen.
k
l
m
n
o
i MENU
This button displays the menu of Internet radio
services.
j RETURN
This button returns to the previous menu.
k 6
This button selects the next song.
l 4
This button fast-forwards the current song.
m 2
This button stops playback.
n RANDOM
This button performs random playback.
En-34
o REPEAT
Press this button repeatedly to cycle through the repeat
modes.
Tip
• See “Controlling Other Components” about the operation of
other components (➔ page 87).
• The AV receiver supports Album art display, and displaying
image file format of JPEG, PNG, and BMP is possible. The
image file format cannot be displayed in either of the
following cases:
– Total number of horizontal and vertical pixels is more than
2048 x 2048.
– Image data size (JPEG/PNG) is more than 4 MB.
Note
• The buttons you can use will differ depending on the
devices and media used for playback.
• When you select the NET input selector on the AV receiver
for the first time, “DISCLAIMER” screen is displayed on TV.
Please read the contents thoroughly before using network
service. Select “Agree” if you agree with the content. If you
disagree, network service is not available on the AV
receiver (➔ page 103).
Playback
Understanding Icons on the Display
This section describes icons that appear on the AV
receiver’s display during media playback.
Icon
Description
Folder
Track
Playback
Pause
Fast Forward
Fast Reverse
Artist
Playing an Audio from Bluetoothenabled Device
About the Bluetooth Wireless Technology
Bluetooth wireless technology is a short-range
wireless technology that enables wireless data
communication between digital devices. Bluetooth
wireless technology operates within a range of about
15 meters (49 feet). You do not need to use a cable
for connection, nor is it necessary for the devices to
face one another, such is the case with infrared
technology.
Tip
• The on-screen information appears only on a TV that is
connected to HDMI outputs.
• If your Bluetooth-enabled device supports A2DP protocol,
its audio file will play through the AV receiver.
• Connection is not guaranteed for all Bluetooth-enabled
devices.
Album
Operating on the Remote Controller
Repeat One Track
Repeat Folder (USB Device)
The Bluetooth-enabled device can be operated by the
supplied remote controller.
Tip
Repeat
Shuffle
• To operate your Bluetooth-enabled device by the remote
controller, the Bluetooth-enabled device must support
profile: AVRCP.
• Operation by the remote controller is not guaranteed for all
Bluetooth-enabled devices.
Pairing the AV receiver with a Bluetoothenabled device
Pairing is an operation where Bluetooth-enabled
devices register with each other beforehand. Use the
procedure below to pair the AV receiver with your
Bluetooth-enabled device. Once a pairing operation is
performed, it does not need to be performed again.
1
Place the Bluetooth-enabled device within
1 meter (3.3 feet) from the AV receiver.
2
Select “BLUETOOTH” in “Input” in Quick
Setup, and press ENTER (➔ page 57).
BLUETOOTH indicator flashes and the AV
receiver is put to pairing mode.
“Now Pairing” appears on the AV receiver’s
display.
Tip
• The same operation can be done by pressing
BLUETOOTH button on the AV receiver.
• When connecting a Bluetooth-enabled device paired
with the AV receiver to the AV receiver,
“BLUETOOTH” input selector is automatically
selected.
• If you connect the AV receiver to another Bluetoothenabled device, hold down BLUETOOTH button until
BLUETOOTH indicator flashes or make settings in
“Status” of “Bluetooth” for pairing (➔ page 81).
• Some Bluetooth-enabled device may need to reestablish pairing for each connection.
Note
• “BLUETOOTH” cannot be selected, if you’ve selected
NET or USB as input selector in Multi Zone.
En-35
Playback
3
During this period (about 2 minutes), you can
operate the Bluetooth-enabled device to pair
with the AV receiver.
Note
• When establishing a connection with the AV receiver,
select the profile (A2DP, AVRCP) at the Bluetoothenabled device. If the Bluetooth-enabled device does
not support the AVRCP profile, you cannot perform
playback or other operations with the AV receiver.
Tip
• For details on the Bluetooth connection, refer to the
instruction manual of the Bluetooth-enabled device.
4
Once the AV receiver is detected and the
model name of the AV receiver appears on the
display of your Bluetooth-enabled device,
select the model name.
When a Bluetooth connection is established
successfully, BLUETOOTH indicator will light.
•
•
•
•
enabled device closer to the AV receiver and retry the
operation.
When disconnecting on your Bluetooth-enabled device,
BLUETOOTH indicator on the AV receiver will go off.
If there is no sound output even after the pairing is done
successfully, consult the instruction manual of the
Bluetooth-enabled device, and then select the model name
of the AV receiver as the audio output device.
While connected to a Bluetooth-enabled device, the AV
receiver cannot be detected and a connection cannot be
established from another Bluetooth-enabled device.
If you cannot connect with a paired Bluetooth-enabled
device, perform the pairing operation between the AV
receiver and the Bluetooth-enabled device again.
Note
5
If passkey* is required on the display of the
Bluetooth-enabled device, enter “0000”.
The AV receiver only supports numerical
passkey up to 4 digits.
* Passkey may be called “Passcode”, “PIN code”, “PIN
number” or “Password”.
Playing a USB Device
6
Play back the desired music on the Bluetoothenabled device.
The audio is output from the AV receiver.
Tip
• The AV receiver may not work as normal depending on the
circumstance even though the AV receiver is placed within
the 15 meters range. In such cases, get the Bluetooth-
Tip
• The on-screen information appears only on a TV that is
connected to HDMI outputs.
This section explains how to play music files from a
USB device (e.g., USB flash drives and MP3 players).
See also:
• “Network/USB Features” (➔ page 108).
1
2
3
Use q/w to select a music file, and press
ENTER or 1 to start playback.
Note
• While the message “Connecting...” appears on the AV
receiver’s display, do not disconnect the USB cable
supplied with the USB device from the USB port.
Listening to TuneIn
You need to connect the AV receiver to your home
network (➔ pages 20, 31).
Tip
• Due to the characteristic of Bluetooth wireless technology,
the sound played on the AV receiver may slightly delay from
the sound played on the Bluetooth-enabled device.
Tip
• The model name appeared on the display of your
Bluetooth-enabled device is “Onkyo TX-NR929”.
The model name displayed on your Bluetooth-enabled
device can be changed in Web Setup (➔ page 38).
4
• The on-screen information appears only on a TV that is
connected to HDMI outputs.
TuneIn is a new radio service which offers the music,
sports and news all over the world.
Over 70,000 radio stations and 2 million on-demand
programs are registered, and you can easily enjoy
them by selecting stations or programs of your
choice. TuneIn is preprogrammed on the AV receiver.
1
Press USB to select the “USB” input.
Plug your USB device into the AV receiver’s
USB port.
The USB indicator lights. It will flash if the AV
receiver cannot read the USB device.
Press ENTER.
A list of the device’s contents appears. To open a
folder, use q/w to select it, and then press
ENTER.
En-36
Press NET.
The network service screen appears, and the
NET indicator lights. If it flashes, the AV receiver
is not connected to the network correctly. If wired
LAN connection is selected, verify that the
Ethernet cable is firmly connected to the AV
receiver. If wireless LAN connection is selected,
verify that the Wi-Fi indicator lights.
Tip
• The same operation can be done by selecting
“Network Service” in the Home menu.
2
Use q/w/e/r to select “TuneIn” and then
press ENTER.
Playback
3
Use q/w to select a station or a program, and
then press ENTER.
Playback starts.
tunein
My Music
0 : 11
Great Artist
My Favorite
Go to Menu
Setting an TuneIn account
To create a user account for TuneIn, open a browser
window such as Internet Explorer®, and connect to
tunein.com website. With a TuneIn account, you can
quickly search and browse for stations and programs
at tunein.com website and save as your favorites
which will automatically appear in your AV receiver
My Presets account. If you have a TuneIn account,
select “Login” and then “I have a TuneIn account”
on the top list. Enter your user name and password to
login.
Tip
Either of the following menus can be selected by
pressing the MENU button on the remote controller or
pressing ENTER button to select “Go to Menu”.
` Add to My Presets
In this menu, stations or programs can be stored
in “My Presets”.
` Remove from My Presets
In this menu, stations or programs stored in “My
Presets” can be deleted.
` Report a problem
This menu is used to report problems on TuneIn
service or resolve the problems in a wizard style.
` View Schedule
In this menu, program listings of stations or
programs can be displayed.
` Clear recents
In this menu, all the stations and programs
stored in “Recents” can be deleted.
` Add to My Favorites
In this menu, stations or programs can be stored
in “My Favorites”.
• Select “Login with a registration code”, and associate a
device from my page on TuneIn website by using a
registration code displayed on the screen. This allows you
to login without entering a user name and a password.
Adding TuneIn radio stations or programs to
My Favorites/My Presets
There are two ways you can register specific Internet
radio stations (programs) from the TuneIn.
• Adding to My Favorites
The selected program will be added to “My
Favorites” on the network service screen, which
appears when pressing NET.
1. Select radio stations or programs, and press
MENU button on the remote controller.
2. Use q/w to select “Add to My Favorites”, and
press ENTER.
3. Use q/w/e/r to select “OK”, and press ENTER.
Tip
• You can rename the stations saved in “My Favorites”
(➔ page 38).
En-37
• Adding TuneIn radio stations or programs to My
Presets
Select “TuneIn”, and press ENTER button to display
a folder of “My Presets” on the screen that displays
Category/Area, etc. Store your favorite stations or
programs in this folder.
1. Select radio stations or programs, and press
MENU button on the remote controller.
2. Use q/w to select “Add to My Presets”, and
press ENTER.
Tip
• If no radio stations or programs are stored in “My Presets”,
“My Presets” folder will not be displayed.
Playback
Registering Other Internet Radio
You need to connect the AV receiver to your home
network (➔ pages 20, 31).
Tip
• The on-screen information appears only on a TV that is
connected to HDMI outputs.
Internet radio URLs in the following formats are
supported: PLS, M3U, and podcast (RSS). However,
depending on the type of data or audio format used
by the Internet radio station, you may not be able to
listen to some stations.
To listen to other Internet radio stations, you must
register your station in “My Favorites” of the network
service screen, as described below.
Note
• Services available may vary depending on the region. See
the separate instructions for more information.
• Certain network service or contents available through this
device may not be accessible in case the service provider
terminates its service.
1
Select “Network” on the Setup menu to verify
your IP address (➔ page 81).
Take a note of the IP address.
2
3
On your computer, start your web browser.
4
5
Click “Save” to save the Internet radio station.
The Internet radio station is then added to “My
Favorites”. To play the registered station, press
NET, and then select “My Favorites” on the
network service screen. A list of registered
Internet radio stations appears. Select the one
that you saved and press ENTER.
Changing the Icon Layout on the
Network Service Screen
Tip
• You need to connect your TV to the HDMI output (HDMI
OUT MAIN) to make the following on-screen setting.
The layout of icons can be customized by switching
their positions on the network service screen.
Tip
• If you want to add a new station directly from “My
Favorites”, select an empty slot in the list and press MENU.
Then, select “Create New Station” and press ENTER.
Pressing ENTER again will display the keyboard screen.
Use that keyboard to enter the station’s name and URL
respectively, and then press ENTER.
• If you want to delete a station saved in “My Favorites”,
press MENU with the station selected or while the station is
playing. Then, use q/w to select “Delete from My
Favorites” and press ENTER. You can also delete stations
from the Web Setup.
• If you want to rename a station, select the desired station
and press MENU. Then, use q/w to select “Rename this
station” and press ENTER.
• You can save up to 40 Internet radio stations.
1
Press NET.
The network service screen appears.
Tip
• The same operation can be done by selecting
“Network Service” in the Home menu.
2
3
Press MODE/D (blue) on the remote controller.
4
Use q/w/e/r to select another icon as the
destination, and then press ENTER.
The icons switch positions and the message
“Completed!” appears.
Use q/w/e/r to select an icon to move, and
then press ENTER.
Playing Music Files on a Server (DLNA)
You need to connect the AV receiver to your home
network (➔ pages 20, 31).
Enter the AV receiver’s IP address in the
browser’s Internet address (URL) field.
If you are using Internet Explorer®, you can also
enter the URL by selecting “Open...” on the “File”
menu.
Information on the AV receiver is then shown on
your Internet browser (Web Setup).
Tip
• The on-screen information appears only on a TV that is
connected to HDMI outputs.
This section explains how to play music files on a
computer or media server through the AV receiver
(Server Playback).
Click on the “My Favorites” tab, and enter the
Internet radio station’s name and URL.
En-38
Playback
Windows Media Player Setup
2
■ Windows Media Player 11 Setup
This section explains how to configure Windows
Media Player 11 so that the AV receiver can play the
music files stored on your computer.
1
2
Start Windows Media Player 11.
3
On the “Stream” menu, select “Turn on media
streaming”.
A dialog box appears.
Tip
Select the “Share my media” check box, and
then click “OK”.
A list of the supported devices appears.
Move your cursor and click on “Turn on media
streaming”.
A list of media server appears. Wording may vary
slightly depending on the network location.
4
4
Select the AV receiver in the list, and then
click “Allow”.
The corresponding icon will be checked.
On the “Media streaming options”, select the
AV receiver and confirm that it is set to
“Allowed”.
5
5
Click “OK” to close the dialog box.
This completes the Windows Media Player 11
configuration.
You can now play the music files in your
Windows Media Player 11 library through the AV
receiver.
Click “OK” to close the dialog box.
This completes the Windows Media Player 12
configuration.
You can now play the music files in your
Windows Media Player 12 library.
Tip
• Windows Media Player 11 can be downloaded for free
from the Microsoft web site.
■ Windows Media Player 12 Setup
This section explains how to configure Windows
Media Player 12 so that the AV receiver can play the
music files stored on your personal computer.
1
Start Windows Media Player 12.
Use q/w/e/r to select “DLNA”, and press
ENTER.
4
Use q/w to select a server, and then press
ENTER.
The menu is displayed according to the server
functions.
• If the media streaming is already activated, clicking on
“More streaming options...” in the “Stream” menu will
display a list of the playback devices connected to the
network. You can skip step 3.
3
On the “Library” menu, select “Media
Sharing”.
The “Media Sharing” dialog box appears.
3
Note
• The search function does not work with media servers
which do not support this function.
• Photos and movies stored on a media server cannot
be accessed from the AV receiver.
• Depending on the sharing settings in the media server,
the AV receiver may not able to access the content.
See the instruction manual of the media server.
5
Use q/w to select an item, and then press
ENTER or 1 to start playback.
dlna
My favorite song 1
0 :11 / 3:00
Artist name
My favorite album
Playing music files on a server (DLNA)
1
2
Start your computer or media server.
Note
Press NET.
The network service screen appears, and the
NET indicator lights. If it flashes, the AV receiver
is not connected to the network correctly. If wired
LAN connection is selected, verify that the
Ethernet cable is firmly connected to the AV
receiver. If wireless LAN connection is selected,
verify that the Wi-Fi indicator lights.
Tip
• The same operation can be done by selecting
“Network Service” in the Home menu.
En-39
• Depending on the media server, 5/4/3 may not
work.
• If the message “No Item.” appears, this means that no
information can be retrieved from the server. In this
case, check your server, network, and AV receiver
connections.
Playback
■ Creating a shared folder
Playing music files on a shared folder
Right-click the folder that you want to share.
In order to enjoy Home Media, you must first create a
shared folder on your computer.
Windows 8/Windows 7 Setup
1
2
3
■ Setting the sharing options
4
Check the check box of “Share this folder”
and then click “OK”.
1
5
Under “Network File and Folder Sharing”,
select “Share”.
6
Select “Everyone” from the pull-down menu,
click “Add”, and then click “Share”.
Playing Music Files on a Shared Folder
This section explains how to play music files on a
computer or NAS (Network Attached Storage)
through the AV receiver.
Select “Choose homegroup and sharing
options” on the Control Panel.
Tip
• If this option is not available, verify that “View by:” is set
to “Category”.
2
3
4
Select “Change advanced sharing settings”.
Under “Home or Work”, verify that the
following items are checked:
“Turn on network discovery”, “Turn on file and
printer sharing”, “Turn on sharing so anyone with
network access can read and write files in the
Public folders”, and “Turn off password protected
sharing”.
Select “Properties”.
On the “Sharing” tab, select “Advanced
Sharing”.
1
Tip
• The same operation can be done by selecting
“Network Service” in the Home menu.
Tip
• With this setting, everyone is allowed to access the
folder. If you want to assign a user name and
password to the folder, make the corresponding
settings for “Permissions” in “Advanced Sharing” of the
“Sharing” tab.
• Verify that “Workgroup” is properly set.
2
Use q/w/e/r to select “Home Media”, and
press ENTER.
3
Use q/w to select a server, and then press
ENTER.
Tip
Note
• When using NAS (Network Attached Storage), refer to
the instruction manual provided with your NAS unit.
Select “Save changes” and click “OK” on the
confirmation screen.
Press NET.
The network service screen appears, and the
NET indicator lights. If it flashes, the AV receiver
is not connected to the network correctly. If wired
LAN connection is selected, verify that the
Ethernet cable is firmly connected to the AV
receiver. If wireless LAN connection is selected,
verify that the Wi-Fi indicator lights.
• The server name of your computer can be viewed on
the computer properties screen.
4
Use q/w to select the desired shared folder
and then press ENTER.
5
When asked for a user name and password,
enter the necessary login information.
Tip
• The login information will be remembered for the next
time you log in.
• The login information is that of the user account set
when creating a shared folder.
6
En-40
Use q/w to select a music file and then press
ENTER or 1.
The playback of the selected file starts.
Playback
Remote Playback
5
You need to connect the AV receiver to your home
network (➔ pages 20, 31).
Tip
• The on-screen information appears only on a TV that is
connected to HDMI outputs.
Remote playback is supported by Windows Media
Player 12.
Remote Playback means you can play the music files
stored on a media server or personal computer with
the AV receiver by operating the controller device in
the home network.
Windows Media Player 12 Setup
This section explains how to configure Windows
Media Player 12 so that the AV receiver can play the
music files stored on your personal computer.
1
2
4
Using Remote Playback
1
2
3
Move your cursor and click on “Turn on media
streaming”.
A list of media server appears. Wording may vary
slightly depending on the network location.
On the “Media streaming options”, select the
AV receiver and confirm that it is set to
“Allowed”.
Turn on the AV receiver.
Start Windows Media Player 12.
To enable remote playback, you must first
configure Windows Media Player 12.
On Windows Media Player 12, right-click on a
music file.
The right-click menu appears.
Tip
• For selecting another media server, select the desired
media server from the “Other Libraries” menu on
Windows Media Player 12.
On the “Stream” menu, select “Turn on media
streaming”.
A dialog box appears.
• If the media streaming is already activated, clicking on
“More streaming options...” in the “Stream” menu will
display a list of the playback devices connected to the
network. You can skip step 3.
3
Tip
• On the “Stream” menu, confirm that “Allow remote
control of my Player...” is checked.
Start Windows Media Player 12.
Tip
Click “OK” to close the dialog box.
This completes the Windows Media Player 12
configuration.
You can now play the music files in your
Windows Media Player 12 library.
4
Select the AV receiver in “Remote playback”.
The “Play to” window appears and playback on
the AV receiver starts. Operations during remote
playback can be made from the “Play to” window
of Windows 8/Windows 7 on your personal
computer.
A playback screen will be displayed on the
connected TV.
Tip
• If the operating system of your personal computer is
Windows 8, click “Play to” and select the AV receiver.
En-41
5
Adjusting the Volume.
You can adjust the volume by adjusting the
volume bar in the “Remote playback” window.
The default maximum volume level is 82 (0dB). If
you wish to change this, enter the value from the
Web Setup in your browser. Refer to step 3 of
“Registering Other Internet Radio” for details
(➔ page 38).
The volume value of the remote window and the
volume value of the AV receiver may not always
match.
Adjustments you make to the volume in the AV
receiver will not be reflected in the “Remote
playback” window.
Note
• Remote playback cannot be used in any of the following
cases:
– Network services are being used.
– Contents are being played from a USB device.
– “Agree” is not selected on the “DISCLAIMER” screen
displayed on the TV when you select the NET input
selector on the AV receiver for the first time.
Playback
Listening to AM/FM Radio
2
This section describes the procedure of using the
buttons on the front panel, unless otherwise specified.
Press TUNING q/w.
Searching stops when a station is found.
When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator
lights. When tuned into a stereo FM station, the
FM STEREO indicator lights as shown.
Using the Tuner
With the built-in tuner you can enjoy AM and FM radio
stations. You can store your favorite stations as
presets for quick selection.
You can also change the frequency steps
(➔ page 78).
1
■ Auto tuning mode
1
Press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO
indicator lights on the AV receiver’s display.
2
Tip
• Tuning into weak FM stereo stations
If the signal from a stereo FM station is weak, it may
be impossible to get good reception. In this case,
switch to manual tuning mode and listen to the station
in mono.
Frequency
Tuning into Radio Stations
On the remote controller, press TUNER
repeatedly to select “AM” or “FM”, followed by
D.TUN.
(Actual display depends on the country.)
Press TUNER to select either “AM” or “FM”.
In this example, FM has been selected.
Each time you press TUNER, the radio band
changes between AM and FM.
(Actual display depends on the country.)
1
TUNED
AUTO
FM STEREO
Band
■ Tuning into stations by frequency
You can tune into AM and FM stations directly by
entering the appropriate frequency.
■ Manual tuning mode
In manual tuning mode, FM stations will be in mono.
1
2
Press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO
indicator goes off on the AV receiver’s
display.
Press and hold TUNING q/w.
The frequency stops changing when you release
the button.
Press the buttons repeatedly to change the
frequency one step at a time.
Presetting AM/FM Stations
You can store a combination of up to 40 of your
favorite AM/FM radio stations as presets.
1
Tune into the AM/FM station that you want to
store as a preset.
See the previous section.
2
Press MEMORY.
The preset number flashes.
(Actual display depends on the country.)
3
En-42
Within 8 seconds, use the number buttons to
enter the frequency of the radio station.
For example, to tune to 87.5 (FM), press 8, 7, 5
or 8, 7, 5, 0.
If you have entered the wrong number, you can
retry after 8 seconds.
While the preset number is flashing (about 8
seconds), use PRESET e/r to select a preset
from 1 through 40.
Playback
4
Press MEMORY again to store the station or
channel.
The station or channel is stored and the preset
number stops flashing.
Repeat this procedure for all of your favorite
AM/FM radio stations.
■ Selecting Presets
1
To select a preset, use PRESET e/r on the AV
receiver, or the remote controller’s CH +/–.
Tip
• You can also use the remote controller’s number
buttons to select a preset directly.
■ Deleting Presets
1
Select the preset that you want to delete.
See the previous section.
2
While holding down MEMORY, press TUNING
MODE.
The preset is deleted and its number disappears
from the AV receiver’s display.
Using RDS (excluding North American
models)
When tuned into an RDS station, the RDS indicator
lights.
When the station is broadcasting text information, the
text can be displayed.
■ What is RDS?
RDS stands for Radio Data System and is a method
of transmitting data in FM radio signals. It was
developed by the European Broadcasting Union
(EBU) and is available in most European countries.
Many FM stations use it these days. In addition to
displaying text information, RDS can also help you
find radio stations by type (e.g., news, sport, rock,
etc.).
The AV receiver supports four types of RDS
information:
PS (Program Service)
When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting PS
information, the station’s name will be displayed.
Pressing DISPLAY will display the frequency for 3
seconds.
RT (Radio Text)
When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting
text information, the text will be shown on the AV
receiver’s display.
PTY (Program Type)
This allows you to search for RDS radio stations by
type.
TP (Traffic Program)
This allows you to search for RDS radio stations that
broadcast traffic information (➔ page 44).
Note
• RDS works only in areas where RDS broadcasts are
available.
• In some cases, the text characters displayed on the AV
receiver may not be identical to those broadcast by the
radio station. Also, unexpected characters may be
displayed when unsupported characters are received. This
is not a malfunction.
• If the signal from an RDS station is weak, RDS data may be
displayed intermittently or not at all.
En-43
■ Displaying Radio Text (RT)
1
Press RT/PTY/TP once.
The RT information scrolls across the AV
receiver’s display.
Note
• The message “Waiting” may appear while the AV
receiver waits for the RT information.
• If the message “No Text Data” appears, no RT
information is available.
■ Finding Stations by Type (PTY)
You can search for radio stations by type.
1
Press RT/PTY/TP twice.
The current program type appears on the AV
receiver’s display.
2
Use PRESET e/r to select the type of
program you want.
See the table shown later in this chapter.
3
To start the search, press the enter button.
The AV receiver searches until it finds a station of
the type you specified, at which point it stops
briefly before continuing with the search.
4
When a station you want to listen to is found,
press the enter button.
If no stations are found, the message “Not
Found” appears.
Playback
■ Listening to Traffic News (TP)
RDS program types (PTY)
You can search for stations that broadcast traffic
news.
Type
1
2
Display
None
None
News reports
News
Press RT/PTY/TP three times.
If the current radio station is broadcasting TP
(Traffic Program), “[TP]” will appear on the AV
receiver’s display. If “TP” without square brackets
appears, this means that the station is not
broadcasting TP.
Current affairs
Affairs
Information
Info
Sport
Sport
Culture
Culture
To locate a station that is broadcasting TP,
press the enter button.
The AV receiver searches until it finds a station
that’s broadcasting TP.
If no stations are found, the message “Not
Found” appears.
Science and technology
Science
Varied
Varied
Pop music
Pop M
Rock music
Rock M
Education
Educate
Drama
Drama
Middle of the road music
Easy M
Light classics
Light M
Serious classics
Classics
Other music
Other M
Weather
Weather
Finance
Finance
Children’s programmes
Children
Social affairs
Social
Religion
Religion
Phone in
Phone In
Travel
Travel
Leisure
Leisure
Jazz music
Jazz
Country music
Country
National music
Nation M
Oldies music
Oldies
Folk music
Folk M
Documentary
Document
Alarm test
TEST
Alarm
Alarm!
En-44
Playing Audio and Video from Separate
Sources
You can listen to the audio of one input source while
watching the video of another. This function takes
advantage of the fact that when an audio-only input
source (PHONO, TV/CD, TUNER) is selected, the
video input source remains unchanged. The following
procedure shows how to listen to a CD player’s audio
source connected to TV/CD IN while watching a
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player’s video source connected to
BD/DVD.
Tip
• To use an input selector as audio-exclusive, you must
assign all video inputs to “- - - - -” (➔ pages 63, 64).
1
2
Press BD/DVD.
3
Start playback on your Blu-ray Disc/DVD and
CD players.
You can now enjoy watching your Blu-ray
Disc/DVD with the sound of your CD player.
Press TV/CD.
The audio output changes to the CD source, but
the video of previously-selected BD/DVD is
retained.
Playback
Using the Listening Modes
Note
About Listening Modes
The AV receiver’s listening modes can transform your
listening room into a movie theater or concert hall,
with high fidelity and stunning surround sound.
Selecting Listening Modes
PURE AUDIO
■ Listening Mode Buttons
MOVIE/TV button
This button selects the listening modes intended for
use with movies and TV.
MUSIC button
This button selects the listening modes intended for
use with music.
GAME button
This button selects the listening modes intended for
use with video games.
THX button
This button selects the THX listening modes.
PURE AUDIO button and indicator
This button selects the Pure Audio listening mode.
When this mode is selected, the AV receiver’s display
and analog video circuitry are turned off. Only video
signals input through HDMI input can be output from
the HDMI output. The indicator lights when this mode
is selected. Pressing this button again will select the
previous listening mode.
Press RECEIVER first.
SP (speaker layout)
MUSIC
MOVIE/TV
MOVIE/TV, MUSIC, GAME, THX
GAME
THX
En-45
• The Dolby Digital and DTS listening modes can only be
selected if your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player is connected to the
AV receiver with a digital audio connection (coaxial, optical,
or HDMI).
• The listening modes you can select depends on the format
of the input signal. To check the format, see “Displaying
Source Information” (➔ page 53).
• While a pair of headphones is connected, you can select
the following listening modes: Pure Audio, Mono, Direct,
and Stereo.
Playback
Input Source
The following audio formats are supported by the listening modes.
A
This is mono (monophonic) sound.
S
This is stereo (stereophonic) sound. Two independent audio signal channels
are reproduced through two speakers.
D
This is 5.1-channel surround sound. This surround system has five main
channels of sound and a sixth subwoofer channel (called the point-one
channel).
F
This is 7.1-channel surround sound. This is a further sound enhancement to
5.1-channel sound with two additional speakers that provide greater sound
envelopment and more accurate positioning of sounds.
*1
*2
■ Onkyo-Original DSP Listening Modes
G
This is DTS-ES surround sound. This surround system can produce a discrete
or a matrix-encoded sixth channel from existing DTS 5.1 encoded material.
H
This is Dolby Digital EX surround sound. This provides a center back surround
channel from 5.1-channel sources.
Speaker Layout
The illustration shows which speakers are activated in each channel. See
“Speaker Configuration” for the speaker setup (➔ page 65).
Z
X
After enabling the corresponding speakers, press RECEIVER followed by SP (speaker
layout) repeatedly to select the speakers you want to use: surround back and front high,
surround back and front wide, or front high and front wide (➔ page 54).
This layout is only available when the external power amplifier is connected to FRONT
WIDE PRE OUT of the AV receiver and the “11ch Playback” setting is set to “Yes”
(➔ pages 17, 65).
Listening Mode
Description
Orchestra
Suitable for classical or operatic music,
this mode emphasizes the surround
channels in order to widen the stereo
image, and simulates the natural
reverberation of a large hall.
Or ches t r a
Unplugged
Un p l u g g e d
Studio-Mix
S t u d i o –M i x
C
TV Logic
TV
B
b
V
Log i c
Game-RPG
G ame – RPG
N
Game-Action
G ame – A c t i o n
Game-Rock
J
K
L
<*2
G ame – R o c k
Game-Sports
M*1
G ame – S p o r t s
En-46
Input
Source
Speaker
Layout
A CNM
S <
D
F
G
Suitable for acoustic instruments, vocals H
and jazz, this mode emphasizes the
front stereo image, giving the impression
of being right in front of the stage.
Suitable for rock or pop music, listening
to music in this mode creates a lively
sound field with a powerful acoustic
image, like being at a club or rock
concert.
This mode adds realistic acoustics to TV
shows produced in a TV studio,
surround effects to the entire sound, and
clarity to voices.
In this mode, the sound has a dramatic
feel with a similar atmosphere to
Orchestra mode.
In this mode, sound localization is
distinct with emphasis on bass.
In this mode, sound pressure is
emphasized to heighten live feel.
Suitable for audio source with much
reverberation.
Playback
Listening Mode
Description
All Ch Stereo
Ideal for background music, this mode
fills the entire listening area with stereo
sound from the front, surround, and
surround back speakers.
A l l
Ch
S t e r eo
Full Mono
Fu l l
Mo n o
T-D (TheaterDimensional)
T–D
Input
Source
Speaker
Layout
A XCN
S M<
D
F
In this mode, all speakers output the
G
same sound in mono, so the sound you H
hear is the same regardless of where
you are within the listening room.
With this mode you can enjoy a virtual
surround sound even with only two or
three speakers. This works by
controlling how sounds reach the
listener’s left and right ears. Good
results may not be possible if there’s too
much reverb, so we recommend that
you use this mode in an environment
with little or no natural reverb.
Sound is output from the front left and
right speakers and subwoofer.
S t e r eo
Mono
Mo n o
DSD*3
DSD
Dolby Digital
Do l b y
Input
Source
Pure Audio*1
In this mode, the display and video
circuitry are turned off, minimizing
possible noise sources for the ultimate in
high-fidelity audio reproduction. (As the
analog video circuitry is turned off, only
video signals input through HDMI IN can
be output from the HDMI output.)
A ZXC
S N*2M
D <
F
G
H
In this mode, audio from the input source
is output without surround-sound
processing. The speaker configuration
(presence of speakers) and speaker
distance settings are enabled, but much
of the processing set via the audio setup
is disabled. See “On-screen Setup” for
more details (➔ page 57).
Speaker
Layout
D
Dolby Digital Plus*4
Do l b y
D
+
Dolby TrueHD
Do l b y
Input
Source
Speaker
Layout
A ZXC
S NM<
D
Use this mode when watching an old
F
movie with a mono soundtrack, or use it
G
with the foreign language soundtracks
recorded in the left and right channels of H
some movies. It can also be used with
DVDs or other sources containing
multiplexed audio, such as karaoke
DVDs.
Mu l t i c h
Description
D i r ec t
Stereo
Multichannel
Listening Mode
Direct
Description
ZXC
NM<
■ Listening Modes
Pu r eAAu d i o
Listening Mode
T r u e HD
This mode is for use with PCM
multichannel sources.
D XCN
F M<
In this mode, audio from the input source D XCN
is output without surround-sound
M<
processing. The speaker configuration
(presence of speakers), crossover
frequency, speaker distance, A/V Sync
and much of the processing set via the
D XCN
audio setup are enabled. See “Onscreen Setup” for more details
M<
(➔ page 57).
F XCN*2
M<
D XCN
M<
F XCN*2
M<
DTS
DTS
D XCN
M<
DTS-HD High
Resolution Audio
D XCN
M<
D T S – HD
F XCN*2
M<
En-47
HR
Playback
Listening Mode
Description
DTS-HD Master
Audio
In this mode, audio from the input source D XCN
is output without surround-sound
M<
processing. The speaker configuration
F
XCN*2
(presence of speakers), crossover
M<
frequency, speaker distance, A/V Sync
and much of the processing set via the D XCN
audio setup are enabled. See “OnM<
screen Setup” for more details
(➔ page 57).
D T S – HD MS T R
DTS Express
DTS
Exp r ess
DTS 96/24*5
DTS
96 / 24
DTS-ES Discrete*6
ES
D i sc r e t e
DTS-ES Matrix*6
ES Ma t r i x
Input
Source
Speaker
Layout
This mode is for use with DTS 96/24
sources. This is high-resolution DTS
with a 96 kHz sampling rate and 24-bit
resolution, providing superior fidelity.
Use it with DVDs that bear the DTS
96/24 logo.
D XCN
M<
This mode is for use with DTS-ES
Discrete soundtracks, which use a
discrete surround back channel for true
6.1/7.1-channel playback. The seven
totally separate audio channels provide
better spatial imaging and 360-degree
sound localization, perfect for sounds
that pan across the surround channels.
Use it with DVDs that bear the DTS-ES
logo, especially those with a DTS-ES
Discrete soundtrack.
G V
J
K
<
This mode is for use with DTS-ES Matrix
soundtracks, which use a matrixencoded back-channel for 6.1/7.1channel playback. Use it with DVDs that
bear the DTS-ES logo, especially those
with a DTS-ES Matrix soundtrack.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx*7 Dolby Pro Logic IIx expands any 2channel source for 7.1-channel
Dolby Pro Logic II
playback. It provides a very natural and
seamless surround-sound experience
that fully envelops the listener. As well
as music and movies, video games can
also benefit from the dramatic spatial
effects and vivid imaging.
Listening Mode
PL
Mo v i e
PL
Mu s i c
PL
Game
PL
x
Mo v i e
PL
x
Mu s i c
PL
x
Game
Description
Input
Source
Speaker
Layout
If you’re not using any surround back
S XCN
speakers, Dolby Pro Logic II will be
M<
used instead of Dolby Pro Logic IIx.
• Dolby PLIIx Movie
Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby
Surround (Pro Logic) movie (e.g., TV,
DVD, VHS).
• Dolby PLIIx Music
Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby
Surround (Pro Logic) music source
(e.g., CD, radio, cassette, TV, VHS,
DVD).
• Dolby PLIIx Game
Use this mode with video games,
especially those that bear the Dolby
Pro Logic II logo.
• Dolby PLIIx Movie
D V
• Dolby PLIIx Music
H J
These modes use the Dolby Pro Logic
K
IIx modes to expand 5.1-channel
<
sources for 7.1-channel playback.
Dolby Pro Logic IIz
Height
PL
z
He i g h t
Dolby EX
Do l b y
EX
Do l b y
D
En-48
EX
Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height is designed
to more effectively use existing program
material when height channel speaker
outputs are present. Dolby Pro Logic
IIz Height can be used to upmix a
variety of sources from movies and
music, but are particularly well-suited to
upmix game content.
S
D
F
G
H
These modes expand 5.1-channel
sources for 6.1/7.1-channel playback.
They’re especially suited to Dolby EX
soundtracks that include a matrixencoded surround back channel. The
additional channel adds an extra
dimension and provides an enveloping
surround sound experience, perfect for
rotating and fly-by sound effects.
D V
H J
K
<
B
J
L
<
Playback
Listening Mode
Description
DTS Neo:X*8
This mode expands various sources and
various inputs up to 11.1 channel.
DTS Neo:X provides semi-spherical
sound field adding height/wide speakers
to create a natural, immersive and
spacious surround soundscape.
Ne o : X
6
C i n ema
Ne o : X
Mu s i c
Ne o : X
Game
Audyssey DSX*9
Audy s s e y
DSX
Input
Source
Speaker
Layout
• DTS Neo:X Cinema
This mode is suitable for movie
viewing.
• DTS Neo:X Music
This mode is suitable for any music
source.
• DTS Neo:X Game
This mode is suitable for video games.
S XCN
D M<
F
G
H
• Audyssey DSX
Audyssey DSX® is a scalable system
that adds new speakers to improve
surround impression. Starting with a
5.1 system Audyssey DSX first adds
Wide channels for the biggest impact
on envelopment. Research in human
hearing has proven that information
from the Wide channels is much more
critical in the presentation of a realistic
soundstage than the Back Surround
channels found in traditional 7.1
systems. Audyssey DSX then creates
a pair of Height channels to reproduce
the next most important acoustical and
perceptual cues. In addition to these
new Wide and Height channels,
Audyssey DSX applies Surround
Envelopment Processing to enhance
the blend between the front and
surround channels.
D B
F bM
G <
H
Listening Mode
Description
PL
Mo v i e
DSX
PL
Mu s i c
DSX
PL
Game
DSX
Input
Source
Speaker
Layout
• Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx*7 Movie +
S B
Audyssey DSX
bM
• Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx Music +
<
Audyssey DSX
• Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx Game +
Audyssey DSX
The combination of Dolby Pro Logic
II/IIx and Audyssey DSX modes can be
used.
• Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie +
D J
Audyssey DSX
H K
• Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music +
<
P L x Mu s i c DSX
Audyssey DSX
The combination of Dolby Pro Logic IIx
and Audyssey DSX modes can be
used.
PL
x
Do l b y
THX
En-49
Mo v i e
EX
DSX
DSX
• Dolby EX + Audyssey DSX
The combination of Dolby EX and
Audyssey DSX modes can be used.
Founded by George Lucas, THX
develops stringent standards that
ensure movies are reproduced in movie
theaters and home theaters just as the
director intended. THX Modes carefully
optimize the tonal and spatial
characteristics of the soundtrack for
reproduction in the home-theater
environment. They can be used with
2-channel matrixed and multichannel
sources. Surround back speaker output
depends on the source material and the
selected listening mode.
D J
H K
<
Playback
Listening Mode
THX
C i n ema
N
TH
eX
o :M
6us i c
THX
Game s
Description
Input
Source
Speaker
Layout
• THX Cinema
THX Cinema mode corrects theatrical
soundtracks for playback in a home
theater environment. In this mode, THX
Loudness Plus is configured for cinema
levels and Re-EQ, Timbre Matching,
and Adaptive Decorrelation are active.
• THX Music
THX Music mode is tailored for listening
to music, which is typically mastered at
significantly higher levels than movies.
In this mode, THX Loudness Plus is
configured for music playback and only
Timbre Matching is active.
• THX Games
THX Games mode is meant for
spatially accurate playback of game
audio, which is often mixed similarly to
movies but in a smaller environment.
THX Loudness Plus is configured for
game audio levels, with Timbre
Matching active.
D CNM
F <
G
H
• Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx*7 Movie + THX S CNM
Cinema
<
• Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx Music + THX
Music
• Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx Game + THX
Games
The combination of Dolby Pro Logic
II/IIx and THX Cinema/Music/Games
modes can be used.
The PLII/PLIIx and THX indicators light
on the AV receiver’s display.
Listening Mode
Description
Input
Source
Speaker
Layout
• Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height + THX
Cinema
• Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height + THX
Music
• Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height + THX
Games
The combination of Dolby Pro Logic IIz
Height and THX Cinema/Music/Games
modes can be used.
The PLIIz and THX indicators light on
the AV receiver’s display.
S
D
F
G
H
B
J
L
<
• DTS Neo:X Cinema + THX Cinema
• DTS Neo:X Music + THX Music
• DTS Neo:X Game + THX Games
The combination of DTS Neo:X
Cinema/Music/Game and THX
Cinema/Music/Games modes can be
used. The Neo:X indicator lights on the
AV receiver’s display.
TH
N
eX
o : S
62
C i n ema
THX
S2
Mu s i c
THX
S2
Game s
• Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie + THX
D V
Cinema
H J
• Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music + THX
K
Music
<
The combination of Dolby Pro Logic IIx
and THX Cinema/Music modes can be
used.
The PLIIx and THX indicators light on
the AV receiver’s display.
En-50
C*10N
M<
• THX Select2 Cinema
D V
THX Select2 Cinema mode plays 5.1 H J
movie using 8 speakers giving you the
K
best possible movie watching
<
experience. In this mode, THX ASA
processing blends the side surround
speakers and back surround speakers
providing the optimal mix of ambient
and directional surround sounds.
• THX Select2 Music
For the replay of multichannel music,
the THX Select2 Music should be
selected. In this mode, THX ASA
processing is applied to the surround
channels of all 5.1 encoded music
sources such as DTS, Dolby Digital,
DVD-Audio, etc. to provide a wide and
stable rear soundstage.
Playback
Listening Mode
Description
Input
Source
Speaker
Layout
• THX Select2 Games
D V
For the replay of stereo and
H J
multichannel game audio, the THX
K
Select2 Games mode should be
<
selected. In this mode, THX ASA
processing is applied to the surround
channels of all 5.1 and 2.0 encoded
game sources such as analog, PCM,
DTS, and Dolby Digital. This accurately
places all game audio surround
information creating a full 360 degree
playback environment. THX Select2
Games is unique as it gives you a
smooth transition of audio in all points
of the surround field.
• Dolby Pro Logic II Game + THX
S V
Select2 Games
J
The combination of Dolby Pro Logic II
K
Game and THX Select2 Games modes
<
can be used. The PLII and THX
indicators light on the AV receiver’s
display.
• Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height + THX
S J
Select2 Games
D <
The combination of Dolby Pro Logic IIz H
Height and THX Select2 Games modes
can be used.
Listening Mode
THX
Su r r
EX
Description
Input
Source
Speaker
Layout
• THX Surround EX
D V
This mode expands 5.1-channel
H J
sources for 6.1/7.1- channel playback.
K
It’s especially suited to Dolby Digital EX
<
sources. THX Surround EX, also
known as Dolby Digital Surround EX, is
a joint development between Dolby
Laboratories and THX Ltd.
Note
*1
Pure Audio cannot be selected when Zone 2/3 is active.
Besides, if you activate Zone 2/3 while Pure Audio is selected, the listening mode will
automatically switch to Direct.
*2 Based on the audio channel signal contained in the source, the corresponding speakers
will output the sound.
*3 The AV receiver can input the DSD signal from HDMI IN. Depending on the player,
setting the output on the player side to PCM might bring better sound.
*4 For the Blu-ray Discs, Dolby Digital is used in a 3.1/5.1-channel speaker system.
*5 DTS is used depending on the configuration of the AV receiver.
*6 If there are no surround back speakers, DTS is used.
*7 If there are no surround back speakers, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
*8 DTS Neo:X cannot be selected in the case of 192 kHz input signals.
*9 This listening mode can be selected only when all the following conditions are satisfied:
– Center speaker is connected.
– Either the front high or front wide speakers are connected.
*10 This type of speaker layout is available only when the input source is stereo sound.
• Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height + THX
D J
Select2 Cinema
H <
• Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height + THX
Select2 Music
The combination of Dolby Pro Logic IIz
Height and THX Select2 Cinema/Music
modes can be used.
En-51
Playback
Dialogue Normalization
Dialogue Normalization (DialogNorm) is a feature of
Dolby Digital, which is used to keep the programs at
the same average listening level so the user does not
have to change the volume control between Dolby
Digital, Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD
programs. When playing back software which has
been encoded in Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus and
Dolby TrueHD, sometimes you may see a brief
message in the front panel display which will read
“DialogNorm: X dB” (X being a numeric value). The
display is showing how the program level relates with
THX calibration level. If you want to play the program
at calibrated theatrical levels, you may wish to adjust
the volume. For example, if you see the following
message: “DialogNorm: + 4 dB” in the front panel
display, to keep the overall output level at THX
calibrated loudness, just turn down the volume control
by 4 dB. However, unlike a movie theater where the
playback loudness is preset, you can choose your
preferred volume setting for best enjoyment.
THX Cinema Processing
THX is an exclusive set of standards and
technologies established by the world-renowned film
production company Lucasfilm Ltd. THX grew from
George Lucas’ personal desire to make your
experience of the film soundtrack in both movie
theaters and in your home theater as faithful as
possible to what the director intended.
Movie soundtracks are mixed in special environments
called dubbing stages and are designed to be played
back in movie theaters with similar equipment and
conditions. Most of those soundtracks are remixed
using flat response loudspeakers similar to those
used in the small home theater environment before
being transferred onto Blu-ray Discs, DVD, etc.
THX engineers developed patented technologies to
accurately translate the sound from the movie theater
environment into the home, correcting the tonal and
spatial errors that occur. On this product, when the
THX indicator is on, THX features are automatically
added in Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema, THX
Surround EX).
Timbre Matching
The human ear changes our perception of a sound
depending on the direction from which the sound is
coming. In a movie theater, there is an array of
surround speakers so that the surround information is
all around you. In a home theater, you may only have
two speakers located to the side of your head. In this
case, the Timbre Matching feature filters the
information going to the surround speakers so that
they more closely match the tonal characteristics of
the sound coming from the front speakers. This
ensures seamless panning between the front and
surround speakers.
Adaptive Decorrelation
In a movie theater, a large number of surround
speakers help create an enveloping surround sound
experience. If a home theater only has two sidewall
surround speakers, the surround speakers may
sound similar to headphones lacking spaciousness
and envelopment. Surround sounds will also collapse
toward the closet speaker as you move away from the
middle seating position. Adaptive Decorrelation
slightly changes one surround channel’s time and
phase relationship with respect to the other surround
experience as in a movie theater using only two
speakers.
ASA (Advanced Speaker Array)
ASA is a proprietary THX technology which
processes the audio on the two side and two back
surround speakers for the optional surround sound
experience. When you set up your home theater
system using eight speaker outputs (Left, Center,
Right, Surround Right, Surround Back Right,
Surround Back Left, Surround Left, and Subwoofer),
En-52
be sure to go to the THX Audio Setup screen and
choose the setting that closely corresponds to the
back speaker spacing (➔ page 67). This will reoptimize the surround sound field.
ASA is used in seven modes: THX Select2 Cinema,
THX Select2 Music, THX Select2 Games, Dolby Pro
Logic II Game + THX Select2 Games, Dolby Pro
Logic IIz Height + THX Select2 Games, Dolby Pro
Logic IIz Height + THX Select2 Cinema and Dolby
Pro Logic IIz Height + THX Select2 Music.
The listening mode may not be selected depending
on the input signal. The signal input from the
external AV components can be displayed by the
function on the next page.
Playback
Displaying Source Information
Using the Sleep Timer
You can display various information about the current
input source as follows.
With the sleep timer, you can set the AV receiver to
turn off automatically after a specified period.
1
1
Press RECEIVER once followed by DISPLAY
repeatedly to cycle through the available
information.
Tip
• Alternatively, you can use DISPLAY on the AV
receiver.
The following information can be typically displayed.
Input source
Listening mode
Signal format*1
Sampling
frequency
Press RECEIVER once followed by SLEEP
repeatedly to select the required sleep time.
The sleep time can be set from 90 to 10 minutes
in 10 minute steps.
The SLEEP indicator lights on the AV receiver’s
display when the sleep timer has been set. The
specified sleep time appears for about 5
seconds, then the previous display reappears.
Tip
You can adjust the brightness of the AV receiver’s
display, and switch the MASTER VOLUME indicator
off and on in conjunction.
1
Press RECEIVER once followed by DIMMER
repeatedly to cycle through the following
patterns:
• Normal brightness + indicator off.
• Dim brightness + indicator off.
• Dimmer brightness + indicator off.
• Normal brightness + indicator on (default).
Tip
• If you need to cancel the sleep timer, press SLEEP
repeatedly until the SLEEP indicator goes off.
• To check the time remaining until the AV receiver
sleeps, press SLEEP. Note that if you press again on
SLEEP as the time being displayed is 10 minutes or
less, the sleep timer will go off.
Input signal
resolution
Output resolution
*1
Setting the Display Brightness
If the input signal is digital, the signal format is displayed.
En-53
• (North American models) Alternatively, you can use
DIMMER on the AV receiver.
Playback
Changing the Input Display
When you connect an u-capable Onkyo
component, you must configure the input display so
that u can work properly.
This setting can be done only from the front panel.
1
Press RECEIVER followed by SP (speaker
layout) repeatedly to select:
■ 9.1 ch playback
Important:
• The following layouts are only available when the
“11ch Playback” is set to “No” (➔ page 65) and all
corresponding speakers are enabled.
Press and hold down the same button (about
3 seconds) to change the input display.
Repeat this step to select the desired input
display.
■ TV/CD:
TV/CD → DOCK
TAPE
■ GAME1:
GAME1 ↔ DOCK
→
2
Press TV/CD or GAME1.
“TV/CD” or “GAME1” appears on the AV
receiver’s display.
You can set which speakers you want to use by
priority.
` Speaker Layout:SB/FH:
The sounds from surround back and front
high speakers are output by priority.
` Speaker Layout:SB/FW:
The sounds from surround back and front
wide speakers are output by priority.
` Speaker Layout:FH/FW:
The sounds from front high and front wide
speakers are output by priority.
→
1
Selecting Speaker Layout
“
Note
• “DOCK” can be selected for the “TV/CD” or “GAME1”
input selector, but not at the same time.
• Enter the appropriate remote control code before using
the remote controller for the first time (➔ page 88).
Muting the AV Receiver
You can temporarily mute the output of the AV
receiver.
1
Press RECEIVER followed by MUTING.
The output is muted and the MUTING indicator
flashes on the AV receiver’s display.
Note
• This setting is not available in either of the following cases:
– The “Speakers Type(Front)” setting is set to “Bi-Amp” or
“Digital Crossover” (➔ page 65).
– The “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Yes”
(➔ page 65).
• Playback conditions may be limited depending on the
settings in “Speaker Settings” (➔ page 64) and
“Speaker Configuration” (➔ page 65).
• When a listening mode which doesn’t support front high,
front wide or surround back speakers is used, this setting
cannot be selected.
Tip
• To unmute, press MUTING again or adjust the volume.
• Muting is automatically cancelled when the AV
receiver is set to standby.
En-54
Using the Whole House Mode
The Whole House Mode is useful when you want to
add extra background music to your home party; this
allows you to enjoy the same stereo music as the
main room in separate rooms (Zone 2/3).
The Whole House Mode selects the same input
source for Multi Zone as the main room’s.
See also:
• “2. Speaker Setup” (➔ page 64)
• “Multi Zone” (➔ page 83)
1
Press WHOLE HOUSE MODE on the front
panel.
To cancel the Whole House Mode, change the
input source for the main room or select a
listening mode (➔ page 45).
Note
• The Whole House Mode only supports analog audio
and audio from NET or USB input selector.
• To adjust the volume of Multi Zone, switch the AV
receiver to Multi Zone control. See “Adjusting the
Volume for Zones” (➔ page 85) for the volume
adjustment of Multi Zone.
• The Whole House Mode is not available in either of the
following cases:
– The “Audio TV Out (Main)” setting is set to “On”
(➔ page 79) or “Audio TV Out (Sub)” setting is set
to “On” (➔ page 79) and you’re listening through
your TV speakers.
– “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” is set to “On” (➔ page 78) and
you’re listening through your TV speakers.
– a pair of headphones is connected.
– The “Speakers Type(Front)” setting is set to
“Digital Crossover” (➔ page 65).
Playback
Using Easy Macros
By using ACTIVITIES in Easy macro mode, you can
sequentially operate Onkyo components via simple
commands from a single-button press.
These commands are user-definable. See “Using
Normal Macros” (➔ page 95).
1
Press ACTIVITIES (MY MOVIE, MY TV, or
MY MUSIC) to start the Easy macro command.
The default sequences of actions are described
below.
To change the related source component, see
“Changing the Source Components” shown later
in this chapter.
■ MY MOVIE
First, the TV, the Onkyo Blu-ray Disc player, and the
AV receiver are turned on. The input selector is set to
“BD/DVD”. Finally the player starts playback.*1
*1
Depending on the start-up time of your Blu-ray Disc/DVD
player, the AV receiver may not activate this playback
command. In this case, press 1 on the remote
controller.
■ MY TV
First, the TV, the cable set-top box, and the AV
receiver are turned on. Then the input selector is set
to “CBL/SAT”.
■ MY MUSIC
The Onkyo CD player and the AV receiver are turned
on. The input selector is set to “TV/CD”. Finally, the
player starts playback.
Turning Off the Components
Restoring Default
This button turns off all components activated by the
Easy Macro mode.
You can restore ACTIVITIES to the default settings.
1
Press ALL OFF.
First, the related components stop and turn off.
Second, the AV receiver turns off. Finally, the TV
turns off (or enters standby mode).*1*2
*1
*2
This step doesn’t apply to MY MUSIC, with the default
settings.
With some televisions, the power may not be turned off
(or enter standby mode).
Changing the Source Components
You can change the source components activated by
the Easy Macro mode.
1
While holding down REMOTE MODE for the
playback component you wish to assign,
press and hold down the ACTIVITIES to be
changed (MY MOVIE, MY TV, or MY MUSIC)
(about 3 seconds).
ACTIVITIES flashes twice, indicating that the
change is complete.
Examples:
If you wished to use MY MUSIC to start the Onkyo
CD player, you would press and hold down
MY MUSIC (about 3 seconds) while holding down
TV/CD until it flashes twice.
Note
• While the Easy Macro command is being processed, you
cannot use other ACTIVITIES. If you want to operate other
components, first press ALL OFF and use the desired
ACTIVITIES.
En-55
1
While holding down HOME, press and hold
down ALL OFF until ALL OFF lights (about 3
seconds).
2
Release HOME and ALL OFF, and press ALL
OFF again.
ALL OFF flashes twice.
Playback
Using the Home Menu
The Home menu provides quick access to frequently
used menus.
Tip
• The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is
connected to HDMI OUT MAIN.
1
Press RECEIVER followed by HOME.
The Home menu will be superimposed on the TV
screen.
Tip
• Alternatively, you can use HOME on the AV receiver.
you can easily switch between inputs as their
previews are displayed on a single screen.
Press ENTER to display the main preview
(currently selected HDMI input) and the
additional previews (HDMI IN 1/2/3/4/AUX
INPUT*1). Using q/w or e/r to select a preview
thumbnail and pressing ENTER will switch the
AV receiver to that input source.
Tip
• If no video signals are present, the thumbnails will be
filled in black.
• You can specify the number of preview thumbnails as
well as their positioning on screen (➔ page 80).
Note
2
Use e/r or q/w and ENTER to make the
desired selection.
Press HOME to close the menu.
■ Setup
` With this selection, you can access the common
settings of the on-screen Setup menu.
Press ENTER to display the Setup menu
(➔ page 61).
Tip
• You can also access frequently used settings from Quick
Setup (➔ page 57).
■ InstaPrevue
` With this selection, you can preview audio/video
streams coming from HDMI inputs. Even with
multiple components connected through HDMI,
• This function cannot be selected when the “Zone 2
Monitor Out” setting is set to “Use” (➔ page 62).
• Depending on video signals, the picture may not be
properly rendered on the preview thumbnails of
InstaPrevue.
*1 When HDMI IN 1/2/3/AUX INPUT is displayed on the
main preview, HDMI IN 4 is also displayed on the
preview thumbnails.
■ Firmware Update
` With this selection, you can update the firmware
of the AV receiver. Note that this selection will be
grayed out for a short while after the AV receiver
is turned on. Please wait until it becomes
operable.
Press ENTER to start the procedure
(➔ page 104).
■ Network Service
You need to connect the AV receiver to your home
network (➔ pages 20, 31).
` With this selection, you can use various Internet
radio services or play the contents stored in media
connected to your home network (➔ pages 36 to
40). Note that this selection will be grayed out for
En-56
a short while after the AV receiver is turned on.
Please wait until it becomes operable.
Press ENTER to display the network service
screen. If you want to use the Internet radio
services, use q/w/e/r to select the desired
service. Pressing ENTER again switches to that
selection. If you want to play music files on a
computer or media server, use q/w/e/r to
select “DLNA” and then press ENTER. If you
want to play music files on a computer or NAS
(Network Attached Storage), use q/w/e/r to
select “Home Media” and then press ENTER.
■ USB
`With this selection, you can play contents of
portable players and USB storage devices
connected to the AV receiver’s USB port
(➔ page 36). Note that this selection will be
grayed out for a short while after the AV receiver
is turned on. Please wait until it becomes
operable.
Press ENTER to select a drive or browse the
contents of the media connected, followed by
q/w to select the desired folder or track.
Pressing ENTER as a track is selected will start
playback.
Advanced Operations
Using the Quick Setup
Advanced Operations
RECEIVER
ENTER,
q/w/e/r
On-screen Setup
RETURN
Q SETUP
This section describes the procedure for using the
remote controller unless otherwise specified.
With the AV receiver connected to a TV, there are two
ways of changing the settings on-screen: using the
Quick Setup or the Setup Menu (HOME).
1
Press RECEIVER followed by Q SETUP.
The Quick Setup will be superimposed on the TV
screen.
Tip
■ Quick Setup
The Quick Setup provides quick access to frequently
used settings. You can change settings and view the
current information.
• Alternatively, you can use QUICK SETUP on the AV
receiver.
■ Setup menu (HOME)
The Setup menu (HOME) provides a convenient way
to change the AV receiver’s various settings. Settings
are organized into 9 categories.
BD/DVD
Input
Audio
Video
Information
Listening Mode
2
■ Audio (➔ page 58)
`You can change the following settings: “Sound
Program”, “Bass”, “Treble”, “Phase Matching
Bass”, “Subwoofer Level”, “Center Level”,
“Audyssey”, “Dynamic EQ*4”,
“Dynamic Volume*4”, “Late Night”, “Music
Optimizer”, “Re-EQ” , “Re-EQ(THX)” and
“Screen Centered Dialog”.
■ Video*5
`You can change the following settings: “Wide
Mode” and “Picture Mode*6”.
See also:
• “Picture Adjust” (➔ page 74)
■ Information*7
`You can view the information of the following
items: “Audio”, “Video” and “Tuner”.
Tip
• The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is
connected to HDMI OUT MAIN.
■ Input*1
`You can select input sources and view the
following information: the name of input selectors,
input assignments, the name of the device paired
with the AV receiver via Bluetooth, radio
information, and ARC function setting.
In addition, previews of the video streams coming
from HDMI inputs (HDMI IN 1/2/3/4/AUX
INPUT*2) are displayed.*3
Use q/w to select an input source and view the
related information. Pressing ENTER switches to
the selected input source.
Use q/w and ENTER to make the desired
selection.
Press Q SETUP to close the menu.
Press RETURN to return to the previous menu.
En-57
■ Listening Mode*8
`You can select the listening modes that are
grouped in the following categories: “MOVIE/TV”,
“MUSIC”, “GAME”, and “THX”.
Use q/w to select the category and e/r to
select the listening mode. Press ENTER to
switch to the selected listening mode.
Advanced Operations
Note
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
“BLUETOOTH” cannot be selected, if you’ve selected
NET or USB as input selector in Multi Zone.
When HDMI IN 1/2/3/AUX INPUT is displayed on the
main preview, HDMI IN 4 is also displayed on the
preview thumbnails.
• The video preview is not displayed when the “Zone 2
Monitor Out” setting is set to “Use” (➔ page 62).
• The video of the currently-selected input is displayed on
the main screen, not on a preview thumbnail.
“Dynamic EQ” and “Dynamic Volume” cannot be
selected when any of the THX listening modes is
selected, with “Loudness Plus” set to “On” or “Preserve
THX Settings” set to “Yes” (➔ pages 67, 68).
• When the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Sub”, “Video”
cannot be selected (➔ page 62).
• This setting cannot be used with the “NET”, “USB” and
“BLUETOOTH” input selectors.
Only when you have selected “Custom” in the “Picture
Mode” (➔ page 74), pressing ENTER allows you to
adjust the following items via the Quick Setup:
“Brightness”, “Contrast”, “Hue” and “Saturation”. Press
RETURN to return to the “Picture Mode” setting.
Depending on the input source and listening mode, not
all channels shown here output the sound.
• This setting is not available in either of the following
cases:
– The “Audio TV Out (Main)” setting is set to “On”
(➔ page 79) or “Audio TV Out (Sub)” setting is set to
“On” (➔ page 79) and you’re listening through your TV
speakers.
– “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” is set to “On” (➔ page 78) and
you’re listening through your TV speakers.
Using the Audio Settings of Quick
Setup
You can change various audio settings from the
Quick Setup (➔ page 57).
Note
Tone Control
■ Bass
`–10dB to 0dB to +10dB in 2 dB steps.
You can boost or cut low-frequency sounds
output from the front speakers.
• These settings are not available in either of the following
cases:
– The “Audio TV Out (Main)” setting is set to “On”
(➔ page 79) or “Audio TV Out (Sub)” setting is set to
“On” (➔ page 79) and you’re listening through your TV
speakers.
– “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” is set to “On” (➔ page 78) and
you’re listening through your TV speakers.
■ Treble
`–10dB to 0dB to +10dB in 2 dB steps.
You can boost or cut high-frequency sounds
output from the front speakers.
You can adjust the bass and treble for the front
speakers, except when the Direct, Pure Audio or THX
listening mode is selected.
Sound Program
Operating on the AV receiver
■ Sound Program
` Stereo Source 1, Stereo Source 2, Stereo
Source 3, Multich Source 1, Multich Source 2,
Multich Source 3
` Off
With this setting, you can select the combination of
settings that you registered in “Sound Program Edit”
(➔ page 71).
1
Press TONE repeatedly to select either “Bass”
or “Treble”.
2
Use – and + to adjust.
Note
• If the input selector is changed, the “Sound Program”
setting is switched back to “Off”.
Explanatory Notes
a
b
■ Phase Matching Bass
`Off
`On
a Setting target
b Setting options (default setting underlined)
En-58
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 57)
Advanced Operations
Phase Matching Bass
Speaker Levels
■ Phase Matching Bass
` Off
` On
From the warm low notes produced by a cello to the
deep frequencies of electronic music, a good audio
system should be able to deliver plenty of bass
resonance.
While traditional enhancement systems effectively
boost low-frequency sound, they are often prone to
the effects of phase shifting, which can overwhelm
mid-range frequencies and muddy the sound. Our
Phase-Matching Bass Boost technology effectively
preserves mid-range clarity-allowing vocals and
strings to shine-while maintaining a smooth, powerful
bass response at all volume levels.
■ Subwoofer Level
` –15.0dB to 0.0dB to +12.0dB in 0.5 dB steps.
Note
• The Phase Matching Bass is disabled when the Direct,
Pure Audio, or THX listening mode is selected.
• If the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No”, this setting is fixed
to “Off”.
• When “Sound Program” is enabled, this setting cannot be
used if the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No” in “Sound
Program Edit” (➔ page 71).
Operating on the AV receiver
■ Center Level
` –12.0dB to 0.0dB to +12.0dB in 0.5 dB steps.
You can adjust the volume of each speaker while
listening to an input source.
These temporary adjustments are cancelled when the
AV receiver is set to standby. To save the setting you
made here, go to “Level Calibration” (➔ page 66)
before setting the AV receiver to standby.
Note
• You cannot use these function while the AV receiver is
muted.
• These settings cannot be used while a pair of headphones
is connected.
• Speakers that are set to “No” or “None” in
“Speaker Configuration” (➔ page 65) cannot be adjusted.
• When “Sound Program” is enabled, “Subwoofer Level”
cannot be used if the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No” in
“Sound Program Edit” (➔ page 71).
Audyssey®
■ Audyssey
See “Audyssey” in “4. Source Setup” (➔ page 71).
1
Press TONE repeatedly to select “Phase
Matching Bass”.
■ Dynamic EQ
See “Dynamic EQ” in “4. Source Setup” (➔ page 72).
2
Use – and + to change the setting.
■ Dynamic Volume
See “Dynamic Volume” in “4. Source Setup”
(➔ page 72).
Note
• These technologies can be used when all the following
conditions are met:
– Room Correction and Speaker Setup is completed. Note
that “Audyssey” requires the “Audyssey MultEQ XT32
Full Calibration” method.
En-59
– Any listening mode other than Direct or Pure Audio is
selected.
– A pair of headphones is not connected.
• The setting is stored individually for each input selector.
• “Dynamic EQ” and “Dynamic Volume” cannot be selected
when any of the THX listening modes is selected, with
“Loudness Plus” set to “On” or “Preserve THX Settings”
set to “Yes” (➔ pages 67, 68).
• When “Sound Program” is enabled, the setting must be
made with “Sound Program Edit” (➔ page 71).
Late Night
■ Late Night
For Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Plus sources,
the options are:
`Off
`Low:
Small reduction in dynamic range.
`High:
Large reduction in dynamic range.
For Dolby TrueHD sources, the options are:
`Auto:
The Late Night function is set to “On” or “Off”
automatically.
`Off
`On
Turn this setting on to reduce the dynamic range of
Dolby Digital material so that you can still hear quiet
parts even when listening at low volume levels—ideal
for watching movies late at night when you don’t want
to disturb anyone.
Note
• The effect of the Late Night function depends on the
material that you are playing and the intention of the original
sound designer, and with some material there will be little
or no effect when you select the different options.
• The Late Night function can be used only when the input
source is Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, or Dolby
TrueHD.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 57)
Advanced Operations
• The Late Night function is set to “Off” when the AV receiver
is set to standby. For Dolby TrueHD sources, it will be set
to “Auto”.
• With Dolby TrueHD sources, the Late Night function cannot
be used when “TrueHD Loudness Management” is set to
“Off”.
Music Optimizer
■ Music Optimizer
` Off
` On
The Music Optimizer function enhances the sound
quality of compressed music files. When set to “On”,
the M.Opt indicator lights on the AV receiver’s
display.
Note
• The Music Optimizer function only works with PCM digital
audio input signals with a sampling rate below 48 kHz and
analog audio input signals.
When NET or USB input selector is selected, this function
even works with digital audio input signals with a sampling
rate below 48 kHz (except DSD signals and Dolby TrueHD
signals) regardless of the PCM digital audio input signals
with a sampling rate below 48 kHz.
• The Music Optimizer is disabled when the Direct or Pure
Audio listening mode is selected.
• The setting is stored individually for each input selector.
• When “Sound Program” is enabled, the setting must be
made with “Sound Program Edit” (➔ page 71).
Re-EQ (Re-Equalization)
Screen Centered Dialog
Movie soundtracks were designed for playback in
large movie theaters using professional equipment. If
the movies were not remixed for the home theater,
the tonal balance of the soundtracks can be
excessively bright and harsh when played back over
home audio equipment. In those instances, ReEqualization restores the correct tonal balance for
listening to a movie soundtrack in a smaller home
environment.
By using the front high speaker, this function moves
the center image of dialogs etc. upwards, so that the
image of dialogs is fixed to the display height.
■ Re-EQ
` Off
` On
This function can be used with the following listening
modes: Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby
TrueHD, Multichannel, DTS, DTS-HD High
Resolution Audio, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS
Express, DSD, Dolby EX, Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height,
Dolby PLIIx Movie, DTS Neo:X Cinema.
■ Screen Centered Dialog
As the value increases, the center image moves
upwards.
`0
`1 to 5:
Screen Centered Dialog on.
Note
• The “Screen Centered Dialog” can be used when a
compatible listening mode is selected.
• This setting cannot be used while a pair of headphones is
connected.
■ Re-EQ(THX)
` Off
` On
This function can be used with the following listening
modes: THX Cinema, THX Surround EX, and
THX Select2 Cinema.
Note
• These settings cannot be used while a pair of headphones
is connected.
En-60
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 57)
Advanced Operations
Using the Setup Menu (HOME)
Setup Menu Items
Main menu item
Main menu item
Sub menu item
5. Listening Mode Preset BD/DVD
(➔ page 76)
CBL/SAT
1. Input/Output Assign
(➔ page 62)
Monitor Out
STB/DVR
HDMI Input
GAME1
Component Video Input
GAME2
Digital Audio Input
PC
Speaker Settings
AUX
Speaker Configuration
TUNER
Speaker Distance
TV/CD
Level Calibration
PHONO
Equalizer Settings
NET
THX Audio Setup
USB
RECEIVER
2. Speaker Setup
(➔ page 64)
ENTER,
q/w/e/r
RETURN
HOME
1
2
3
4
5
Press RECEIVER followed by HOME.
Digital Processing
Crossover Network
3. Audio Adjust
(➔ page 69)
Multiplex/Mono
Dolby
Sub menu item
BLUETOOTH
6. Miscellaneous
(➔ page 77)
Volume Setup
7. Hardware Setup
(➔ page 78)
Tuner
OSD Setup
Use e/r or q/w to select “Setup”, and then
press ENTER.
DTS
Audyssey DSX
Auto Standby
Use q/w to select a main menu item, and then
press ENTER.
Theater-Dimensional
Network
Use q/w to select a sub menu item, and then
press ENTER.
Use q/w to select a setting target, and use e/r
to change the setting.
Press HOME to close the menu.
Press RETURN to return to the previous menu.
LFE Level
Sound Program Edit
4. Source Setup
(➔ page 71)
Audyssey
IntelliVolume
A/V Sync
Name Edit
Picture Adjust
Audio Selector
Note
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver
by using HOME, the cursor and enter (middle) buttons.
• During Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 Room Correction and
Speaker Setup, messages, etc., that are displayed on the
TV screen will appear on the AV receiver’s display.
En-61
HDMI
Initial Setup
8. Remote Controller
Setup
(➔ page 82)
Remote ID
9. Lock Setup
(➔ page 82)
Setup
Remote Mode Setup
Advanced Operations
Explanatory Notes
a
1. Input/Output Assign
2. Speaker Setup
Note
• The “HDMI Through” setting is only available for the HDMI
OUT MAIN jack (➔ page 78).
Monitor Out
b
Speaker Configuration
c
d
■ Subwoofer
`Yes
`No
a Main Menu
b Sub Menu
c Setting target
d Setting options (default setting underlined)
On the “Monitor Out” settings, you can select
whether or not to have the video sources’ images
output through the HDMI output.
If you connect your TV to HDMI output, “Monitor Out”
setting is automatically set and composite video and
component video sources are upconverted* and
output.
Composite video,
component video
HDMI
IN
OUT
Composite video,
component video
HDMI
Note
Sub Menu
Main Menu
• See “The video and audio signal flow” (➔ page 21) for
charts showing how the “Monitor Out” and “Resolution”
settings affect the video signal flow through the AV
receiver.
■ Monitor Out
` Main:
Select this if your TV is connected to HDMI OUT
MAIN.
` Sub:
Select this if your TV is connected to HDMI OUT
SUB.
` Both:
Select this if your TVs are connected to HDMI
OUT MAIN and HDMI OUT SUB. Video signals
are output from both HDMI outputs at the
resolution supported by both TVs.
En-62
Operating on the AV receiver
1
Press MONITOR OUT on the front panel.
The current setting is displayed.
2
Press MONITOR OUT on the AV receiver
repeatedly to select:
` Main, Sub or Both.
■ Zone 2 Monitor Out
`Not Use
`Use
When this setting is enabled, the TV connected to
HDMI OUT ZONE 2 can be used as the TV of Zone 2.
Tip
• On the connected component, select the mode in which the
delay between the video and audio does not occur much if
the video signal delay occurs during the playback on the
video component connected to the AV receiver.
Note
• This setting cannot be selected if the “Monitor Out” setting
is set to “Sub” or “Both”.
• When this setting is set to “Use”, the “11ch Playback”
setting is fixed to “No” (➔ page 65).
• When this setting is set to “Use” and “GAME2” is selected
as the input source for Zone 2, if this setting is changed to
“Not Use”, the input source for Zone 2 will be changed to
“Zone 2 Selector: Source” (➔ page 84).
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
Advanced Operations
■ Resolution
` Through:
Select this to pass video through the AV receiver
at the same resolution and with no conversion.
` Auto:
Select this to have the AV receiver automatically
convert video at resolutions supported by your
TV.
` 480p (480p/576p), 720p, 1080i, 1080p*1:
Select the desired output resolution.
` 4K:
Select this for an output resolution four times
that of 1080p. Depending on the resolution
supported by your TV, it will result in either 3840
× 2160 or 4096 × 2160 pixels.
` Source:
Select this for an output following the resolution
level set in “Picture Adjust” (➔ page 74).
You can specify the output resolution for HDMI OUT
MAIN and have the AV receiver upconvert the picture
resolution as necessary to match the resolution
supported by your TV.
Tip
• You can see the picture by pressing ENTER to check the
“Resolution” setting for HDMI OUT MAIN (excluding
“NET”, “USB” and “BLUETOOTH” input source).
Note
• With some TVs, video signals are processed in the same
way as “Through” when this setting is set to “4K”.
• If the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Sub”, this setting is
fixed to “Through”.
• If the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Both”, this setting is
fixed to “Auto”.
• For optimum video performance, THX recommends using
the HDMI output and setting the video resolution to
“Through”.
*1 When signal is 1080p input at 24 frames per second, it
will be 1080p output at 24 frames per second.
HDMI Input
If you connect a video component to an HDMI input,
you must assign that input to an input selector. For
example, if you connect your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player
to HDMI IN 2, you must assign “HDMI2” to the
“BD/DVD” input selector.
If you’ve connected your TV to the AV receiver with
an HDMI cable, composite video and component
video sources can be upconverted* and output by the
HDMI output. You can set this for each input selector
by selecting the “- - - - -” option. See “The video and
audio signal flow” for more information on video
signal flow and upconversion (➔ page 21).
Composite video,
component video
HDMI
IN
■ BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, STB/DVR, GAME1, GAME2,
PC, TV/CD, PHONO
`HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3, HDMI4, HDMI5, HDMI6,
HDMI7, HDMI8:
Select the input to which the component has
been connected.
`- - - - -:
Output composite video and component video
sources from the HDMI output. The video output
signal from the HDMI output is the one
configured in “Component Video Input”.
Each HDMI input cannot be assigned to two input
selectors or more. When HDMI1 - HDMI8 have
already been assigned, you must first set any
unused input selectors to “- - - - -” or you will be
unable to assign HDMI1 - HDMI8 to other input
selectors.
Note
OUT
Composite video,
component video
HDMI
Here are the default assignments.
Input selector
Default assignment
BD/DVD
HDMI1
CBL/SAT
HDMI2
STB/DVR
HDMI3
GAME1
HDMI4
GAME2
HDMI5
PC
HDMI6*1
AUX
Front/MHL (Fixed)
TV/CD
-----
PHONO
-----
*1
If you connect your personal computer to PC IN (Analog
RGB), you must assign “- - - - -” to the “PC” input
selector.
En-63
• The assignment of input selector selected for Zone 2
cannot be changed when the “Zone 2 Monitor Out” is set
to “Use” (➔ page 62).
• If no video component is connected to the HDMI input (even
if the HDMI input is assigned), the AV receiver selects the
video source based on the setting of “Component Video
Input”.
• When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector as
explained here, the same HDMI IN will be set as a priority
in the “Digital Audio Input”. In this case, if you want to use
the coaxial or optical audio input, make the appropriate
selection in the “Audio Selector” setting (➔ page 76).
• Do not assign an HDMI IN to the TV/CD selector while
“HDMI CEC (RIHD)” is set to “On” (➔ page 78), otherwise
appropriate CEC (Consumer Electronics Control) operation
will not be guaranteed.
• If you assign “- - - - -” to an input selector that is currently
selected in “HDMI Through” (➔ page 78), the “HDMI
Through” setting will be automatically switched to “Off”.
• “AUX” is used only for input from the front panel.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
Advanced Operations
Component Video Input
Digital Audio Input
If you connect a video component to a component
video input, you must assign that input to an input
selector. For example, if you connect your Blu-ray
Disc/DVD player to COMPONENT VIDEO IN 2, you
must assign “IN2” to the “BD/DVD” input selector.
Here are the default assignments.
If you connect a component to a digital audio input,
you must assign that input to an input selector. For
example, if you connect your CD player to the
OPTICAL IN 1, you must assign “OPTICAL1” to the
“TV/CD” input selector.
Here are the default assignments.
2. Speaker Setup
Input selector
Default assignment
Input selector
Default assignment
BD/DVD
IN1
BD/DVD
COAXIAL1
CBL/SAT
IN2
CBL/SAT
COAXIAL2
STB/DVR
-----
STB/DVR
COAXIAL3
GAME1
-----
GAME1
OPTICAL1
GAME2
-----
GAME2
-----
PC
-----
PC
-----
AUX
-----
AUX
FRONT (Fixed)
TV/CD
-----
TV/CD
OPTICAL2
PHONO
-----
PHONO
-----
■ BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, STB/DVR, GAME1, GAME2,
PC, AUX, TV/CD, PHONO
` IN1, IN2:
Select the input to which the component has
been connected.
` - - - - -:
Output composite video sources from the HDMI
output.
■ BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, STB/DVR, GAME1, GAME2,
PC, TV/CD, PHONO
` COAXIAL1, COAXIAL2, COAXIAL3, OPTICAL1,
OPTICAL2:
Select the input to which the component has
been connected.
` - - - - -:
Select if the component is connected to an
analog audio input.
Note
• When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector in
“HDMI Input” (➔ page 63), the same HDMI IN will be set
as a priority in this assignment. In this case, if you want to
use the coaxial or optical audio input, make the appropriate
selection in the “Audio Selector” (➔ page 76).
• Supported sampling rates for PCM signals (stereo/mono)
from a digital input (optical and coaxial) are
32/44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz/16, 20, 24 bit.
• “AUX” is used only for input from the front panel.
En-64
Here you can check the settings made by
Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 Room Correction and
Speaker Setup function, or set them manually, which
is useful if you change one of the connected speakers
after using Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction
and Speaker Setup function (➔ page 28).
Note
• These settings are not available in either of the following
cases:
– a pair of headphones is connected.
– The “Audio TV Out (Main)” setting is set to “On”
(➔ page 79) or “Audio TV Out (Sub)” setting is set to
“On” (➔ page 79) and you’re listening through your TV
speakers.
– “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” is set to “On” (➔ page 78) and
you’re listening through your TV speakers.
Speaker Settings
If you change these settings, you must run
Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and
Speaker Setup again (➔ page 28).
If the impedance of any speaker is 4 ohms or more
but less than 6, set the minimum speaker impedance
to 4 ohms.
If you bi-amp the front speakers, you must change the
“Speakers Type(Front)” setting. For details on
speaker wire connection, see “Bi-amping the Front
Speakers” (➔ page 17). When connecting speakers
without crossover network, you need to change the
“Speakers Type(Front)” setting beforehand. For
details on connection, refer to “Using Speakers
Without Crossover Network” (➔ page 18).
Note
• When bi-amping is used, the AV receiver is able to drive up
to 7.1 speakers in the main room.
• Before you change these settings, turn down the volume.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
Advanced Operations
■ Speaker Impedance
` 4ohms:
Select if the impedance of any speaker is
4 ohms or more but less than 6.
` 6ohms:
Select if the impedances of all speakers are
between 6 and 16 ohms.
■ Speakers Type(Front)
` Normal:
Select this if you’ve connected your front
speakers normally.
` Bi-Amp:
Select this if you’ve bi-amped your front
speakers.
` Digital Crossover:
Select this if you’re using speakers without
crossover network.
Tip
• If “Speakers Type(Front)” is set to “Digital Crossover”, a
confirmation screen appears. Select “Next (2-7. Digital
Processing Crossover Network)” to display the screen
for Digital Processing Crossover Network (➔ page 68).
Continue with the settings.
■ Powered Zone 2, Powered Zone 3
` No
` Yes:
Zone 2/3 speakers can be used (Powered
Zone 2/3 enabled).
■ 11ch Playback
` No
` Yes
For 11.1-channel playback, set this setting to “Yes”. If
you select front wide speakers setting in Speaker
Configuration is set to “None”, it will be automatically
switched to “80Hz (THX)”.
Note
• Powered Zone 3 is not available in the following cases:
– The “Speakers Type(Front)” setting is set to “Bi-Amp” or
“Digital Crossover”.
– The “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “No”.
• When the “Powered Zone 3” setting is set to “Yes” while
Powered Zone 2 is enabled (➔ page 84), the surround
back speakers cannot be used.
• When the “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Yes”, the
front wide speakers cannot be used.
• When the “Powered Zone 3” setting is set to “Yes”, the
front high speakers cannot be used.
• “11ch Playback” is not available in the following cases:
– The “Speakers Type(Front)” setting is set to “Bi-Amp” or
“Digital Crossover”.
– The “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Yes”.
– The “Zone 2 Monitor Out” setting is set to “Use”.
• If the “11ch Playback” setting is set to “Yes”, the audio of
front wide channel is output from FRONT WIDE PRE OUT
only.
Speaker Configuration
This setting is set automatically by
Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 Room Correction and
Speaker Setup function (➔ page 28).
With these settings, you can specify which speakers
are connected and a crossover frequency for each
speaker. Specify “Full Band” for speakers that can
output low frequency bass sounds adequately, for
example, speakers with a good sized woofer. For
smaller speakers, specify a crossover frequency.
Sounds below the crossover frequency will be output
by the subwoofer instead of the speaker. Refer to
your speaker’s manuals to determine the optimum
crossover frequencies. If you set up your speakers
using Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and
Speaker Setup, please make sure manually that any
THX speakers are set to “80Hz(THX)” crossover.
En-65
■ Subwoofer
`Yes
`No
■ Front
`Full Band
`40Hz to 80Hz(THX) to 100Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz,
200Hz
Note
• If the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No”, the “Front” setting
is fixed at “Full Band”.
■ Center*1, Surround*1
`Full Band
`40Hz to 80Hz(THX) to 100Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz,
200Hz
`None
■ Front Wide*1*2*4*6*7, Front High*1*2*5*6
`Full Band
`40Hz to 80Hz(THX) to 100Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz,
200Hz
`None
■ Surround Back*2*3*8*9
`Full Band
`40Hz to 80Hz(THX) to 100Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz,
200Hz
`None
Note
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
“Full Band” can be selected only when “Full Band” is
selected in the “Front” setting.
If the “Surround” setting is set to “None”, this setting
cannot be selected.
If the “Surround” setting is set to anything other than
“Full Band”, “Full Band” cannot be selected here.
When the “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Yes”, this
setting cannot be selected.
When the “Powered Zone 3” setting is set to “Yes”, this
setting cannot be selected.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
Advanced Operations
*6
*7
*8
*9
This setting cannot be selected if the “Speakers Type
(Front)” setting is set to “Bi-Amp” or “Digital
Crossover”.
If the “11ch Playback” setting is enabled, “None” cannot
be selected.
When the “Powered Zone 3” setting is set to “Yes”
(➔ page 65) while Powered Zone 2 is enabled
(➔ page 84), this setting cannot be selected.
When the “Speakers Type(Front)” setting is set to
“Bi-Amp” or “Digital Crossover” while Powered Zone 2
is enabled (➔ page 84), this setting cannot be selected.
■ Surround Back Ch
` 1ch:
Select if only one surround back speaker L is
connected.
` 2ch:
Select if two (left and right) surround back
speakers are connected.
Note
• If the “Surround Back” setting is set to “None”, this setting
cannot be selected.
■ LPF of LFE
(Low-Pass Filter for the LFE Channel)
` 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 120Hz
` Off:
Low-Pass Filter is not applied.
With this setting, you can specify the cutoff
frequency of the LFE channel’s low-pass filter
(LPF), which can be used to filter out unwanted
hum. The LPF only applies to sources that use the
LFE channel.
Note
• If you’re using THX-certified speakers, select “80Hz”.
■ Subwoofer Phase
` 0º
` 180º:
Moves the subwoofer phase.
Note
• If the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No”, this setting cannot
be selected.
■ Double Bass
This setting is NOT set automatically by
Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 Room Correction and
Speaker Setup function (➔ page 28).
` On
` Off(THX)
Turn this setting on to boost bass output by feeding
bass sounds from the front left, right, and center
channels to the subwoofer. Default setting: “- - - - -”
Note
• When the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No” or the “Front”
setting to anything other than “Full Band”, this setting is
fixed to “- - - - -”.
• This setting is set to “On” automatically when the
“Subwoofer” and “Front” settings are set for the first time
to “Yes” and “Full Band” respectively.
• If you’re using THX-certified speakers, select “Off(THX)”.
Speaker Distance
`meters:
Distances can be set in meters. Range: 0.15m
to 9.00m in 0.15 meter steps.
(The default setting varies from country to country.)
■ Left, Front Wide Left, Front High Left, Center,
Front High Right, Front Wide Right, Right,
Surround Right, Surround Back Right, Surround
Back Left, Surround Left, Subwoofer
`Specify the distance from each speaker to your
listening position.
Note
• Speakers that you set to “No” or “None” in
“Speaker Configuration” cannot be selected (➔ page 65).
• When the “Powered Zone 3” setting is set to “Yes”
(➔ page 65) while Powered Zone 2 is enabled
(➔ page 84), the surround back speakers cannot be used.
• When the “Speakers Type(Front)” setting is set to
“Bi-Amp” or “Digital Crossover” while Powered Zone 2 is
enabled (➔ page 84), the surround back speakers cannot
be used.
Level Calibration
This setting is set automatically by
Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and
Speaker Setup function (➔ page 28).
This setting is set automatically by
Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and
Speaker Setup function (➔ page 28).
Here you can specify the distance from each speaker
to the listening position so that the sound from each
speaker arrives at the listener’s ears as the sound
designer intended.
■ Unit
` feet:
Distances can be set in feet. Range: 0.5ft to
30.0ft in 0.5 foot steps.
En-66
Here you can adjust the level of each speaker with
the built-in test tone so that the volume of each
speaker is the same at the listening position.
■ Left, Front Wide Left, Front High Left, Center*1,
Front High Right, Front Wide Right, Right,
Surround Right, Surround Back Right, Surround
Back Left, Surround Left
`–12.0dB to 0.0dB to +12.0dB in 0.5 dB steps.
■ Subwoofer*1
`–15.0dB to 0.0dB to +12.0dB in 0.5 dB steps.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
Advanced Operations
Note
• These settings cannot be calibrated when the AV receiver
is muted.
• Speakers that you set to “No” or “None” in
“Speaker Configuration” cannot be selected (➔ page 65).
• When the “Powered Zone 3” setting is set to “Yes”
(➔ page 65) while Powered Zone 2 is enabled
(➔ page 84), the surround back speakers cannot be used.
• When the “Speakers Type(Front)” setting is set to
“Bi-Amp” or “Digital Crossover” while Powered Zone 2 is
enabled (➔ page 84), the surround back speakers cannot
be used.
• The test tone is output at the standard level for THX, which
is 0 dB (absolute volume setting 82). If you normally listen
at volume settings below this, be careful because the test
tone will be much louder.
*1 For the center speaker and subwoofer, the level settings
made by using the Quick Setup are saved in this menu
(➔ page 59).
Tip
• If you’re using a handheld sound level meter, adjust the level
of each speaker so that it reads 75 dB SPL at the listening
position, measured with C-weighting and slow reading.
Equalizer Settings
With the Equalizer settings, you can adjust the tone of
speakers individually with a 7-band equalizer. The
volume of each speaker can be set.
■ Manual Equalizer
` On:
You can adjust the equalizer for each speaker
manually. Continue with the following procedure:
1
Press w to select “Channel”, and then use
e/r to select a speaker.
2
Use q/w to select a frequency, and then use
the e/r to adjust the level at that frequency.
The volume at each frequency can be adjusted
from –6dB to 0dB to +6dB in 1 dB steps.
Tip
• You can select: “63Hz”, “160Hz”, “400Hz”, “1kHz”,
“2.5kHz”, “6.3kHz”, or “16kHz”. And for the subwoofer,
“25Hz”, “40Hz”, “63Hz”, “100Hz”, or “160Hz”.
• Low frequencies (e.g., 63 Hz) affect bass sounds; high
frequencies (e.g., 16 kHz) affect treble sounds.
3
Use q to select “Channel”, and then use e/r
to select another speaker.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each speaker.
You cannot select speakers that you set to “No”
or “None” in the “Speaker Configuration”
(➔ page 65).
` Off:
Tone off, response flat.
Note
• When the Direct or Pure Audio listening mode is selected,
the equalizer settings have no effect.
• If “Audyssey” is enabled, it prevails over this setting
(➔ page 71).
– The “Powered Zone 3” setting is set to “Yes”
(➔ page 65) while Powered Zone 2 is enabled
(➔ page 84).
– The “Speakers Type(Front)” setting is set to “Bi-Amp” or
“Digital Crossover” while Powered Zone 2 is enabled
(➔ page 84).
■ THX Ultra2/Select2 Subwoofer
`No
`Yes
If you’re using a THX-certified subwoofer, set this
setting to “Yes”.
Note
• If the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No”, this setting cannot
be selected (➔ page 65).
■ BGC
`Off
`On
If your listening room layout (for practical or aesthetic
reasons) locates most of the listeners close to the
rear wall, the resulting bass level can be sufficiently
reinforced by the boundary that the overall sound
becomes “boomy”. THX Select2 Plus receivers
contain a Boundary Gain Compensation (BGC)
feature to improve bass balance.
Note
THX Audio Setup
■ Surr Back Speaker Spacing
` <1ft (<0.3m)
` 1ft-4ft (0.3m-1.2m)
` >4ft (>1.2m)
You can specify the distance between your surround
back speakers.
Note
• Cannot be set if:
– “Surround Back” is set to “None” (➔ page 65).
– “Surround Back Ch” is set to “1ch” (➔ page 66).
En-67
• This setting is only available if “THX Ultra2/Select2
Subwoofer” is set to “Yes”.
• If the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No”, this setting cannot
be selected (➔ page 65).
■ Loudness Plus
`Off
`On
When the “Loudness Plus” setting is set to “On”, it is
possible to enjoy even subtle nuances of audio
expression at low volume. This is only available when
the THX listening mode is selected.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
Advanced Operations
■ Preserve THX Settings
` Yes
` No
If this setting is set to “Yes”, Dynamic EQ and
Dynamic Volume have no effect in THX listening
mode.
Note
• This setting is fixed at “Yes” if “Loudness Plus” is set to
“On”.
THX Loudness Plus
THX Loudness Plus is a new volume control
technology featured in THX Ultra2 Plus™ and THX
Select2 Plus™ Certified receivers. With THX
Loudness Plus, home theater audiences can now
experience the rich details in a surround mix at any
volume level. A consequence of turning the volume
below Reference Level is that certain sound elements
can be lost or perceived differently by the listener.
THX Loudness Plus compensates for the tonal and
spatial shifts that occur when the volume is reduced
by intelligently adjusting ambient surround channel
levels and frequency response. This enables users
experience the true impact of soundtracks regardless
of the volume setting. THX Loudness Plus is
automatically applied when listening in any THX
listening mode. The new THX Cinema, THX Music,
and THX Games modes are tailored to apply the
proper THX Loudness Plus settings for each type of
content.
Digital Processing Crossover Network
Digital Crossover provides a separate routing system
by splitting the audio signal into separate frequency
bands optimized for each speaker driver. It provides a
fine, three-dimensional sound field that extend each
driver’s performance to the uppermost. With its builtin time alignment function, this system also adjusts
the sound shifting that occurs when there is a
physical offset between sound drivers. At a digital
processing level, it corrects this offset by delaying the
related audio signal.
Although this function is meant for speakers without
crossover network, it can also be used with bi-amped
speakers.
Tip
• This setting can be done while listening to an audio source.
• Press MODE/D (Blue) to switch from the current audio
source to test noises. Pressing MODE/D (Blue) again or the
cursor buttons will stop the test noises and switch back to
the original audio source.
Note
■ Overlap
`No
`Yes
With this setting, a frequency band near the specified
crossover frequency is output by both tweeters and
woofers. Based on the frequency selected for
“Crossover”, the cutoff frequency of the low-pass
filter (LPF) will be set to 1/3 octave up and that of the
high-pass filter (HPF) to 1/3 octave down. Example:
With a “Crossover” of “3200Hz”, the cutoff frequency
of the woofers’ LPF will be “4000Hz”, and the
tweeters’ HPF will be “2500Hz”.
Tip
• This setting can only be made when “Speakers Type
(Front)” is set to “Digital Crossover” (➔ page 65).
■ Crossover
` “250Hz”, “320Hz”, “400Hz”, “500Hz, “630Hz”,
“800Hz”, “1000Hz”, “1250Hz”, “1600Hz”,
“2000Hz”, “2500Hz”, “3200Hz”, “4000Hz”,
“5000Hz”
Output Band for Test
` High + Low, High, Low:
Select the output for the audio signal.
Tip
• Pressing MODE/D (Blue) button plays band-limited test
noises which center on the specified frequency.
• We recommend choosing a crossover value that creates no
volume difference between “High” and “Low”.
Note
• Refer to your speaker manual when setting without the use
of test noises.
Cutoff frequencies of the woofers’ low-pass filter
(LPF) and the tweeters’ high-pass filter (HPF) are
set according to the frequency specified for
“Crossover”.
En-68
• Sounds processed by Digital Processing Crossover
Network are played.
• You can switch from the current audio source to test noises
by pressing MODE/D (Blue).
• In the case of usage of the bi-amped speakers, if there is a
difference between the crossover frequency in the
speakers’ built-in network and the crossover frequency to
be set on the AV receiver, the frequency dip may be
caused. Therefore, it is recommended that this function
should be set to “Yes”.
■ High Level, Low Level
`–6.0dB to 0.0dB to +6.0dB in 0.5 dB steps.
With this setting, you can set the volume of tweeters
and woofers.
Tip
• Sounds processed by Digital Processing Crossover
Network are played.
• You can switch from the current audio source to test noises
by pressing MODE/D (Blue).
■ High Phase, Low Phase
`0°
`180°:
With this setting, you can adjust the phase of tweeters
and woofers.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
Advanced Operations
Dolby
3. Audio Adjust
Tip
• Sounds processed by Digital Processing Crossover
Network are played.
• You can switch from the current audio source to test noises
by pressing MODE/D (Blue).
■ High Distance, Low Distance
` 0inch(0.0cm) to 12inch(30.0cm) in 1 inch
(2.5 cm) steps.
With this setting, you can adjust the virtual position of
tweeter and woofer units. Adjusting “High Distance”
virtually shifts woofers behind tweeters. Adjusting
“Low Distance” virtually shifts tweeters behind
woofers.
Tweeter
With the Audio Adjust functions and settings, you can
adjust the sound and listening modes as you like.
Multiplex/Mono
■ Multiplex
Input Channel
` Main
` Sub
` Main/Sub
This setting determines which channel of a stereo
multiplex source is output. Use it to select audio
channels or languages with multiplex sources,
multilingual TV broadcasts, and so on.
■ Mono
Distance
Distance
Woofer
(Low Distance)
(High Distance)
Tip
• Sounds processed by Digital Processing Crossover
Network are played.
• You can switch from the current audio source to test noises
by pressing MODE/D (Blue).
Input Channel
` Left + Right
` Left
` Right
This setting specifies the channel to be used for
playing any 2-channel digital source such as Dolby
Digital, or 2-channel analog/PCM source in the Mono
listening mode.
Output Speaker
` Center:
Mono audio is output by the center speaker.
` Left / Right:
Mono audio is output by the front left and right
speakers.
This setting determines which speakers output mono
audio when the Mono listening mode is selected.
Note
• If the “Center” setting is set to “None” (➔ page 65), this
setting cannot be selected.
En-69
■ PL IIx Music (2ch Input)
These settings apply to only 2-channel stereo
sources.
If you’re not using any surround back speakers, these
settings apply to Dolby Pro Logic II, not Dolby Pro
Logic IIx.
Panorama
`On
`Off
With this setting, you can broaden the width of the
front stereo image when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Music listening mode.
Dimension
`–3 to 0 to +3
With this setting, you can move the sound field
forward or backward when using the Dolby Pro Logic
IIx Music listening mode. Higher settings move the
sound field backward. Lower settings move it forward.
If the stereo image feels too wide, or there’s too much
surround sound, move the sound field forward to
improve the balance. Conversely, if the stereo image
feels like it’s in mono, or there’s not enough surround
sound, move it backward.
Center Width
`0 to 3 to 7
With this setting, you can adjust the width of the
sound from the center speaker when using the Dolby
Pro Logic IIx Music listening mode. Normally, if you’re
using a center speaker, the center channel sound is
output from only the center speaker. (If you’re not
using a center speaker, the center channel sound will
be distributed to the front left and right speakers to
create a phantom center.) This setting controls the
front left, right, and center mix, allowing you to adjust
the weight of the center channel sound.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
Advanced Operations
■ PL IIz Height Gain
` Low
` Mid
` High
The Height Gain Control in Dolby Pro Logic IIz
enables the listener to select how much gain is
applied to the front high speakers. There are three
settings, “Low”, “Mid” and “High”, and the front high
speakers are accentuated in that order. While “Mid” is
the default listening setting, the listener may adjust
the Height Gain Control to their personal preference.
Note
• If the “Front High” settings is set to “None” (➔ page 65),
this setting cannot be selected.
■ Dolby EX
` Auto:
If the source signal contains a Dolby EX flag, the
Dolby EX or THX Surround EX listening mode is
used.
` Manual:
You can select any available listening mode.
This setting determines how Dolby EX encoded
signals are handled. This setting is unavailable if no
surround back speakers are connected. This setting
is effective with Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus and
Dolby TrueHD only.
Note
• If the “Surround Back” setting is set to “None”
(➔ page 65), this setting cannot be selected.
• When the “Powered Zone 3” setting is set to “Yes”
(➔ page 65) while Powered Zone 2 is enabled
(➔ page 84), this setting cannot be selected.
• When the “Speakers Type(Front)” setting is set to
“Bi-Amp” or “Digital Crossover” while Powered Zone 2 is
enabled (➔ page 84), this setting cannot be selected.
• If the “Front High” or “Front Wide” setting is enabled
(➔ page 65), this setting is fixed to “Manual”.
■ TrueHD Loudness Management
` Off
` On
This setting specifies whether or not to apply the Late
Night processing on a Dolby TrueHD source.
Note
• When this setting is set to “Off”, the Late Night function for
Dolby TrueHD sources is automatically fixed to “Off”.
• When this setting is set to “Off”, the Dialogue Normalization
information is not available for Dolby TrueHD sources.
DTS
■ Neo:X Music
Center Image
` 0 to 2 to 5
The DTS Neo:X Music listening mode creates
11-channel surround sound from 2-channel stereo
sources. With this setting, you can specify by how
much the front left and right channel output is
attenuated in order to create the center channel.
Changing the value from “0” to “5” will spread the
sound of the center channel to left and right
(outwards).
Theater-Dimensional
■ Listening Angle
`Wide:
Select if the listening angle is greater than 30
degrees.
`Narrow:
Select if the listening angle is less than 30
degrees.
With this setting, you can optimize the TheaterDimensional listening mode by specifying the angle of
the front left and right speakers relative to the
listening position. Ideally, the front left and right
speakers should be equidistant from the listening
position and at an angle close to one of the two
available settings.
Front left speaker
Front right speaker
Listening angle: 30°
Note
• For best results, we recommend setting “Narrow” to 20°
and “Wide” to 40°.
Audyssey DSX®
■ Soundstage
` –3dB to Reference to +3dB
With this setting, you can adjust the sound stage when
using Audyssey DSX.
Note
• This listening mode can be selected only when all the
following conditions are satisfied:
– The center speaker is connected.
– Either the front high or front wide speakers are connected.
LFE Level
■ Dolby Digital*1, DTS*2, Multich PCM, Dolby
TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio, DSD*3
`–QdB, –20dB, –10dB, or 0dB
With these settings, you can set the level of the LFE
(Low Frequency Effects) channel individually for each
input sources.
If you find that low-frequency effects are too loud
when using one of these sources, change the setting
to –20 dB or –Q dB.
*1
En-70
Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Plus sources
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
Advanced Operations
*2
*3
DTS and DTS-HD High Resolution sources
DSD (Super Audio CD) sources
Sound Program Edit
■ Sound Program
` Stereo Source 1, Stereo Source 2, Stereo
Source 3, Multich Source 1, Multich Source 2,
Multich Source 3
When playing back different content types on the
same source, or when listening to a single content
type on different sources, you can pre-register the
settings that best suit each content in “Sound
Program”. The registered settings can then be called
up and modified in one set. Use “Sound Program
Edit” to register and modify a combination of settings.
Tip
• To select the registered settings, see “Sound Program”
(➔ page 58).
■ Listening Mode
You can assign a default listening mode that will be
selected automatically when you select the sound
program.
The “Last Valid” option means that the listening
mode selected last will be used.
The “Straight Decode” option means that straight
decoding listening mode (Dolby Digital, DTS, etc.) is
selected.
■ Equalizer*1
` Off
` Manual:
The manual setting in “Equalizer Settings”
(➔ page 67) is applied.
■ Audyssey*1
` Off, Movie, Music
See “Audyssey” (➔ page 59).
■ Dynamic EQ*1*2
` Off, On
See “Dynamic EQ” (➔ page 59).
■ Dynamic Volume*1*2
` Off, Light, Medium, Heavy
See “Dynamic Volume” (➔ page 59).
Note
• “Listening Mode” is only available when the input signal
matches the setting of “Sound Program”.
• You cannot select the “Subwoofer” setting if you set it to
“No” in “Speaker Configuration”.
• “Music Optimizer” is only available when “Stereo
Source 1”, “Stereo Source 2” or “Stereo Source 3” is
selected.
• When “Audyssey Quick Start” has been used for
measurement, the “Audyssey”setting cannot be selected.
*1 This setting cannot be used when the “Listening Mode”
setting is set to “Pure Audio” or “Direct”.
*2 To enable this setting, you must first perform the Room
Correction and Speaker Setup.
4. Source Setup
Items can be set individually for each input selector.
Press the input selector buttons to select an input
source.
Audyssey®
The tone for each speaker is set automatically by
Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 Room Correction and
Speaker Setup. To enable the following settings, you
must first perform the Room Correction and Speaker
Setup (➔ page 28).
• These technologies cannot be used when a pair of
headphones is connected.
■ Audyssey
`Off
`Movie:
Select this setting for movie material.
The Audyssey indicator will light.
`Music:
Select this setting for music material.
The Audyssey indicator will light.
Note
• When “Audyssey Quick Start” has been used for
measurement, “Audyssey” cannot be selected.
■ Subwoofer
` No, Yes
You can choose whether or not to use the subwoofer
with the sound program.
■ Music Optimizer*1
` Off, On
See “Music Optimizer” (➔ page 60).
En-71
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
Advanced Operations
■ Dynamic EQ
` Off
` On:
Audyssey Dynamic EQ® becomes active.
The Dynamic EQ indicator will light.
With Audyssey Dynamic EQ, you can enjoy great
sound even when listening at low volume levels.
Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of
deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by
taking into account human perception and room
acoustics. It does so by selecting the correct
frequency response and surround volume levels
moment-by-moment so that the content sounds the
way it was created at any volume level — not just at
reference level.
■ Reference Level
Audyssey Dynamic EQ Reference Level Offset
` 0dB:
This should be selected for movie contents.
` 5dB:
Select this setting for content that has a very
wide dynamic range, such as classical music.
` 10dB:
Select this setting for jazz or other music that
has a wider dynamic range. This setting should
also be selected for TV content as that is usually
mixed at 10 dB below film reference.
` 15dB:
Select this setting for pop/rock music or other
program material that is mixed at very high
listening levels and has a compressed dynamic
range.
Movies are mixed in rooms calibrated for film
reference. To achieve the same reference level in a
home theater system each speaker level must be
adjusted so that –30 dBFS band-limited (500 Hz to
2000 Hz) pink noise produces 75 dB sound pressure
level at the listening position. A home theater system
automatically calibrated by Audyssey MultEQ® XT32
will play at reference level when the master volume
control is set to the 0 dB position. At that level you
can hear the mix as the mixers heard it.
Audyssey Dynamic EQ is referenced to the standard
film mix level. It makes adjustments to maintain the
reference response and surround envelopment when
the volume is turned down from 0 dB. However, film
reference level is not always used in music or other
non-film content. Audyssey Dynamic EQ Reference
Level Offset provides three offsets from the film level
reference (5 dB, 10 dB, and 15 dB) that can be
selected when the mix level of the content is not
within the standard.
Note
• If “Dynamic EQ” setting is set to “Off”, this technology
cannot be used.
■ Dynamic Volume
` Off
` Light:
Activates Light Compression Mode.
` Medium:
Activates Medium Compression Mode.
` Heavy:
Activates Heavy Compression Mode. This
setting affects volume the most. It quiets the
loud parts, such as explosions, and boosts the
quiet parts so they can be heard.
Note
• If you want to use Audyssey Dynamic EQ or
Audyssey Dynamic Volume® with THX listening modes, set
the “Loudness Plus” setting to “Off” and set “Preserve
THX Settings” to “No” (➔ pages 67, 68).
• If you make Dynamic Volume active, “Dynamic EQ” is set
to “On”. The Dynamic Vol indicator will light.
• When “Dynamic EQ” is set to “Off”, “Dynamic Volume” is
automatically switched to “Off”.
En-72
About Audyssey Dynamic EQ®
Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of
deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by
taking into account human perception and room
acoustics. Dynamic EQ selects the correct frequency
response and surround levels moment-by-moment at
any user-selected volume setting. The result is bass
response, tonal balance and surround impression
that remain constant despite changes in volume.
Dynamic EQ combines information from incoming
source levels with actual output sound levels in the
room, a prerequisite for delivering a loudness
correction solution. Audyssey Dynamic EQ works in
tandem with Audyssey MultEQ XT32 to provide wellbalanced sound for every listener at any volume level.
About Audyssey Dynamic Volume®
Audyssey Dynamic Volume solves the problem of
large variations in volume level between television
programs, commercials, and between the soft and
loud passages of movies. Dynamic Volume looks at
the preferred volume setting by the user and then
monitors how the volume of program material is being
perceived by listeners in real time to decide whether
an adjustment is needed. Whenever necessary,
Dynamic Volume makes the necessary rapid or
gradual adjustments to maintain the desired playback
volume level while optimizing the dynamic range.
Audyssey Dynamic EQ is integrated into
Dynamic Volume so that as the playback volume is
adjusted automatically, the perceived bass response,
tonal balance, surround impression and dialog clarity
remain the same whether watching movies, flipping
between television channels or changing from stereo
to surround sound content.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
Advanced Operations
IntelliVolume
■ IntelliVolume
` –12dB to 0dB to +12dB in 1 dB steps
With IntelliVolume, you can set the input level for
each input selector individually. This is useful if one of
your source components is louder or quieter than the
others.
Use e/r to set the level.
If a component is noticeably louder than the others,
use e to reduce its input level. If it’s noticeably
quieter, use r to increase its input level.
Note
• IntelliVolume does not work for Zone 2/3.
A/V Sync
■ A/V Sync
` 0msec to 800msec in 5 msec steps
When using progressive scanning on your Blu-ray
Disc/DVD player, you may find that the picture and
sound are out of sync. With this setting, you can
correct this by delaying the audio signals.
Press ENTER to view the TV picture while setting the
delay when the video source is output to HDMI OUT
MAIN.
To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
– “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” is set to “On” (➔ page 78) and
you’re listening through your TV speakers.
• A/V Sync is disabled when the Pure Audio or Direct
listening mode is used with an analog input source.
• This setting cannot be used with the “NET”, “USB” and
“BLUETOOTH” input selectors.
Name input area
4 - 4. Name Edit
BD/DVD
Name
Name Edit
You can enter a custom name for each individual
input selector and radio preset for easy identification.
When entered, the custom name will appear on the
display.
The custom name is edited using the keyboard
screen.
a
n
b
o
1
,
2
.
c
p
d
q
e
r
f
s
g
t
h
u
A
N
!
<
3
4
/
;
Shift
5
:
6
@
7
[
8
9
0
–
^
]
Space
OK
Back Space
1
2
Use q/w/e/r to select a character, and then
press ENTER.
Repeat this step to enter up to 10 characters.
To store a name when you’re done, be sure to
select “OK” by using q/w/e/r, and then press
ENTER.
*1
k
x
B
O
˝
>
l
y
CLR
C
P
#
?
D
Q
$
+
E
R
%
F
S
&
`
G
T
’
{
Shift
+10
j
w
Shift
+10
■ Name
i
v
H
U
(
I
V
)
J
W
_
K
X
=
L
Y
˜
CLR
b
\
All Erase
M
Z
|
}
Space
OK
Back Space
Shift
a
m
z
cd
All Erase
*2
e
a Toggles between lower and upper case
characters.*1
b Moves the cursor left or right in the Name input
area.
c Moves the cursor backward and deletes one
character.*2
d Enters a space character.
e Confirms your entry.
Tip
• To name a radio preset, use TUNER to select AM or FM,
and then select the preset (➔ page 42).
• To restore a name to its default, erase all characters with
CLR, select “OK” and then press ENTER.
*1 This can also be performed by using +10 on the remote
controller.
*2 Press CLR on the remote controller to delete all the
characters you have input.
The range of values you can adjust will depend on
whether your TV or display supports HDMI Lip Sync
and if the “Lip Sync” setting is set to “On” or not
(➔ page 79).
Note
• This setting is not available in either of the following cases:
– The “Audio TV Out (Main)” setting is set to “On”
(➔ page 79) or “Audio TV Out (Sub)” setting is set to
“On” (➔ page 79) and you’re listening through your TV
speakers.
Note
• This setting cannot be used for the “NET”, “USB” and
“BLUETOOTH” input selectors.
En-73
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
Advanced Operations
Picture Adjust
Using Picture Adjust, you can adjust the picture
quality and reduce any noise appearing on the
screen.
Press ENTER to view the TV picture while setting
when the video source is output to HDMI OUT MAIN.
To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
■ Wide Mode*1*6
This setting determines the aspect ratio.
` 4:3:
` Full:
` Zoom:
` Wide Zoom:
` Auto:
According to the input signals and monitor
output setting, the AV receiver automatically
selects the aspect ratio. See “Monitor Out” for
details on the monitor output setting
(➔ page 62).
■ Picture Mode*1
` Custom:
All settings can be performed manually.
` ISF Day:
Select when the room is bright.
` ISF Night:
Select when the room is dark.
` Cinema:
Select when the picture source is a movie or
alike.
` Game:
Select when the video source is a game
console.
` Standard:
Does not adjust picture quality (changes
resolution).
` Bypass:
Does not adjust picture quality (does not change
resolution).
With “Picture Mode”, you can change the following
settings to be suitable for the movie or game screen
by one operation; “Game Mode”, “Film Mode”, “Edge
Enhancement”, “Noise Reduction”, “Resolution”,
“Brightness”, “Contrast”, “Hue”, “Saturation”,
“Color Temperature”, “Gamma”, “Red Brightness”,
“Red Contrast”, “Green Brightness”, “Green
Contrast”, “Blue Brightness” or “Blue Contrast”.
The receiver has been designed to incorporate setup
and calibration standards established by the Imaging
Science Foundation (ISF). The ISF has developed
carefully crafted, industry-recognized standards for
optimal video performance and has implemented a
training program for technicians and installers to use
these standards to obtain optimal picture quality from
the receiver. Accordingly, Onkyo recommends that
setup and calibration be performed by an ISF
Certified installation technician.
En-74
■ Game Mode*2*3*4
`Off
`On
If video signal delay occurs during playback on a video
component (i.e., game console), select the
corresponding input source and set the “Game Mode”
setting to “On”. The delay will decrease but in return
the picture quality will become poor.
■ Film Mode*2*4
`Video:
“Film Mode” detection is not applied and the
input signal is handled as a video source.
`Auto:
Detects whether the input signal is a video or a
movie. If it is a movie, the appropriate
conversion is applied.
The AV receiver will adjust to the picture source,
automatically converting it to the appropriate
progressive signal and reproducing the natural quality
of the original picture.
■ Edge Enhancement*2*4*5
`Off
`Low
`Mid
`High
With this setting, you can make the picture appear
sharper.
■ Noise Reduction*2*4*5
`Off
`Low
`Mid
`High
With this setting, you can reduce noise appearing on
the screen. Select the desired level.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
Advanced Operations
■ Resolution*2*4*7
` Through:
Select this to pass video through the AV receiver
at the same resolution and with no conversion.
` Auto:
Select this to have the AV receiver automatically
convert video at resolutions supported by your
TV.
` 480p (480p/576p), 720p, 1080i, 1080p*8:
Select the desired output resolution.
` 4K:
Select this for an output resolution four times
that of 1080p. Depending on the resolution
supported by your TV, it will result in either 3840
× 2160 or 4096 × 2160 pixels.
You can specify the output resolution for HDMI OUT
MAIN and have the AV receiver upconvert the picture
resolution as necessary to match the resolution
supported by your TV.
This setting is available only when “Source” has been
selected in “Resolution” of the “Monitor Out” setting
(➔ page 63).
■ Brightness*1*2*4
` –50 to 0 to +50
With this setting, you can adjust the picture
brightness. “–50” is the darkest. “+50” is the brightest.
■ Saturation*1*2*4
` –50 to 0 to +50
With this setting, you can adjust saturation. “–50” is
the weakest color. “+50” is the strongest color.
■ Blue Brightness*2*4
`–50 to 0 to +50
With this setting you can adjust the brightness of blue
color. “–50” is the darkest. “+50” is the brightest.
■ Color Temperature*2*4
` Warm
` Normal
` Cool
With this setting, you can adjust the color
temperature.
■ Blue Contrast*2*4
`–50 to 0 to +50
With this setting you can adjust the contrast of blue
color. “–50” is the least. “+50” is the greatest.
■ Gamma*2*4
` –3 to 0 to +3
With this setting, you can adjust the incoming
picture’s R (red), G (green), and B (blue) color signal
in relation to the output color signal.
■ Red Brightness*2*4
` –50 to 0 to +50
With this setting you can adjust the brightness of red
color. “–50” is the darkest. “+50” is the brightest.
■ Red Contrast*2*4
` –50 to 0 to +50
With this setting you can adjust the contrast of red
color. “–50” is the least. “+50” is the greatest.
■ Contrast*1*2*4
` –50 to 0 to +50
With this setting, you can adjust contrast. “–50” is the
least. “+50” is the greatest.
■ Green Brightness*2*4
` –50 to 0 to +50
With this setting you can adjust the brightness of
green color. “–50” is the darkest. “+50” is the
brightest.
■ Hue*1*2*4
` –50 to 0 to +50
With this setting, you can adjust the color hue
between “–50” and “+50”.
■ Green Contrast*2*4
` –50 to 0 to +50
With this setting you can adjust the contrast of green
color. “–50” is the least. “+50” is the greatest.
En-75
Note
• “Picture Adjust” cannot be used when:
– The “NET”, “USB” or “BLUETOOTH” input selector is
selected, or
– “Monitor Out” is set to “Sub”.
*1 This procedure can also be performed on the remote
controller by using the Quick Setup (➔ page 57).
*2 When the “Picture Mode” setting is set to anything other
than “Custom”, this setting cannot be used.
*3 If the “Resolution” setting is set to “4K” (➔ pages 63,
75), this setting is fixed at “Off”.
*4 Press CLR if you want to reset to the default value.
*5 If the “Game Mode” setting is set to “On”, this setting is
fixed at “Off”.
*6 When a 3D video source is input, “Wide Mode” is fixed to
“Full”.
*7 With some TVs, video signals are processed in the same
way as “Through” when this setting is set to “4K”.
*8 When signal is 1080p input at 24 frames per second, it
will be 1080p output at 24 frames per second.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
Advanced Operations
Audio Selector
■ Audio Selector
` ARC:
The audio signal from your TV tuner can be sent
to HDMI OUT MAIN of the AV receiver.*1
With this selection, the TV’s audio can be
automatically selected as a priority among other
assignments.
` HDMI:
This can be selected when HDMI IN has been
assigned as an input source. If both HDMI
(HDMI IN) and digital audio inputs (COAXIAL IN
or OPTICAL IN) have been assigned, HDMI
input is automatically selected as a priority.
` COAXIAL:
This can be selected when COAXIAL IN has
been assigned as an input source. If both
coaxial and HDMI inputs have been assigned,
coaxial input is automatically selected as a
priority.
` OPTICAL:
This can be selected when OPTICAL IN has
been assigned as an input source. If both optical
and HDMI inputs have been assigned, optical
input is automatically selected as a priority.
` Analog:
The AV receiver always outputs analog signals.
You can set priorities of audio output when there are
both digital and analog inputs.
Note
• This setting can be made only for an input source that is
assigned to HDMI IN, COAXIAL IN, or OPTICAL IN.
• This setting cannot be used with the “NET”, “USB” and
“BLUETOOTH” input selectors.
• When using the Whole House Mode, this setting cannot be
selected.
• With the GAME2 input selector, “Analog” cannot be used.
*1
You can select “ARC” if you select the TV/CD input
selector. But you cannot if you’ve selected “Off” in the
“Audio Return Channel” setting (➔ page 79).
Setting the Incoming Digital Signal (Fixed
Mode)
■ Fixed Mode
` Off:
The format is detected automatically. If no digital
input signal is present, the corresponding analog
input is used instead.
` PCM:
Only 2-channel PCM format input signals will be
heard. If the input signal is not PCM, the PCM
indicator will flash and noise may also be
produced.
` DTS:
Only DTS (but not DTS-HD) format input signals
will be heard. If the input signal is not DTS, the
dts indicator will flash and there will be no
sound.
When “HDMI”, “COAXIAL” or “OPTICAL” is selected
in the “Audio Selector” setting, you can then specify
the signal type in “Fixed Mode”.
Normally, the AV receiver detects the signal format
automatically. However, if you experience either of
the following issues when playing PCM or DTS
material, you can manually set the signal format to
PCM or DTS.
• If the beginnings of tracks from a PCM source are
cut off, try setting the format to PCM.
• If noise is produced when fast forwarding or
reversing a DTS CD, try setting the format to DTS.
Note
5. Listening Mode Preset
You can assign a default listening mode to each input
source that will be selected automatically when you
select each input source. For example, you can set
the default listening mode to be used with Dolby
Digital input signals. You can select other listening
modes during playback, but the mode specified here
will be resumed once the AV receiver has been set to
standby.
1
Use q/w to select the input source that you
want to set, and then press ENTER.
The following menu appears.
5-1. Listening Mode Preset
BD/DVD
Analog/PCM
Mono/Multiplex Source
2ch Source
Dolby D/Dolby D Plus/TrueHD
DTS/DTS-ES/DTS-HD
Other Multich Source
Last Valid e r
Last Valid
Last Valid
Last Valid
Last Valid
Last Valid
Default listening mode for analog and PCM sources.
2
Use q/w to select the signal format that you
want to set, and then use e/r to select a
listening mode.
Only listening modes that can be used with each
input signal format can be selected (➔ pages 45
to 52).
The “Last Valid” option means that the listening
mode selected last will be used.
The “Straight Decode” option means that
straight decoding listening mode (Dolby Digital,
DTS, etc.) is selected.
Note
• The setting will be reset to “Off” when you change the
setting in “Audio Selector”.
En-76
• For the “TUNER” input selector, only “Analog” will be
available.
• For the “NET” or “USB” input selector, “Digital” and
“TrueHD” will be available.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
Advanced Operations
• For the “BLUETOOTH” input selector, only “Digital” is
available.
■ Analog/PCM/Digital
With this setting, you can specify the listening mode
used when an analog (CD, TV, LD, VHS, MD,
turntable, radio, cassette, cable, satellite, etc.) or
PCM digital (CD, DVD, etc.) audio signal is played.
Note
• For the “GAME2” input selector, only “PCM” is available.
■ Mono/Multiplex Source
With this setting, you can specify the listening mode
used when a mono digital audio signal is played
(DVD, etc.).
■ 2ch Source
With this setting, you can specify the listening mode
used when 2-channel (2/0) stereo digital sources,
such as Dolby Digital or DTS, are played.
■ Dolby D/Dolby D Plus/TrueHD
With this setting, you can specify the listening mode
used when Dolby Digital or Dolby Digital Plus format
digital audio signals are played (DVD, etc.). Specifies
the default listening mode for Dolby TrueHD sources,
such as Blu-ray or HD DVD (input via HDMI).
■ DTS/DTS-ES/DTS-HD
With this setting, you can specify the listening mode
used when DTS or DTS-HD High Resolution format
digital audio signals are played (DVD, LD, CD, etc.).
Specifies the default listening mode for DTS-HD
Master Audio sources, such as Blu-ray or HD DVD
(input via HDMI).
■ Other Multich Source
Specifies the default listening mode for multichannel
PCM sources from HDMI IN such as DVD-Audio, and
DSD multichannel sources such as Super Audio CD.
6. Miscellaneous
Volume Setup
■ Volume Display
` Absolute:
Displayed range is Min, 0.5 to 99.5, Max.
` Relative(THX):
Displayed range is –QdB, –81.5dB to +18.0dB.
With this setting, you can choose how the volume level
is displayed.
The absolute value 82 is equivalent to the relative
value 0 dB.
Note
• If the absolute value is set to 82, “82.0Ref” will appear on
the display and the THX indicator will flash.
■ Muting Level
` –QdB (fully muted), –50dB to –10dB in 10 dB
steps.
This setting determines how much the output is muted
when the muting function is used (➔ page 54).
■ Headphone Level
`–12dB to 0dB to +12dB
With this setting, you can specify the headphone
volume relative to the main volume. This is useful if
there’s a volume difference between your speakers
and your headphones.
OSD Setup
■ On Screen Display
`On
`Off
This preference determines whether operation details
are displayed on-screen when an AV receiver
function is adjusted.
Even when “On” is selected, operation details may
not be output if the input source is connected to an
HDMI IN.
■ Language
(North American models)
`English, Deutsch, Français, Español, Italiano,
Nederlands, Svenska
■ Maximum Volume
` Off, 50 to 99 (Absolute display)
` Off, –32dB to +17dB (Relative display)
With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume.
To disable this setting, select “Off”.
(European and Australian models)
`English, Deutsch, Français, Español, Italiano,
Nederlands, Svenska, Русский язык, 中文
This setting determines the language used for the onscreen menus.
■ Power On Volume
` Last, Min, 1 to 99 or Max (Absolute display)
` Last, –QdB, –81dB to +18dB (Relative display)
With this preference, you can specify the volume
setting to be used each time the AV receiver is turned
on.
To use the same volume level that was used when
the AV receiver was turned off, select “Last”.
The “Power On Volume” setting cannot be set higher
than the “Maximum Volume” setting.
■ Screen Saver
`3min, 5min, 10min
`Off
With this setting, you can set the time until the screen
saver activates itself. Once active, the screen saver
will go off and the screen will return to its previous
state if the AV receiver is operated in any way.
En-77
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
Advanced Operations
7. Hardware Setup
Tuner
■ AM/FM Frequency Step (North American
models)
` 10kHz/200kHz:
` 9kHz/50kHz:
Select the frequency step according to your
area.
■ AM Frequency Step (European and Australian
models)
` 10kHz:
` 9kHz:
Select the frequency step according to your
area.
For AM/FM tuning to work properly, you must specify
the AM/FM frequency step used in your area.
Note
• When this setting is changed, all radio presets will be
deleted.
HDMI
■ HDMI CEC (RIHD)
` Off
` On
Turn this setting on to allow p-compatible
components connected via HDMI to be controlled by
the AV receiver (➔ page 20).
Note
• When the setting is set to “On” and the menu is closed, the
names of connected p-compatible components and
“RIHD On” are displayed on the AV receiver.
“Search…” → “(name)” → “RIHD On”
When the AV receiver cannot receive the name of the
component, it is displayed as “Player*” or “Recorder*”, etc.
(“*” shows up and indicates the number of components,
when two or more are received).
• When an p-compatible component is connected to
the AV receiver via an HDMI cable, the name of the
connected component is displayed on the AV receiver
display. For example, while you are watching TV
broadcasting, if you operate a Blu-ray Disc/DVD player
(being powered on) with the remote control of the AV
receiver, the name of the Blu-ray Disc/DVD player will be
displayed on the AV receiver.
• Set it to “Off” when a connected piece of equipment is not
compatible or it is unclear whether the equipment is
compatible or not.
• If operation is not normal when set to “On”, change the
setting to “Off”.
• Refer to the connected component’s instruction manual for
details.
• When the “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” setting is set to “On”, the
power consumption on standby mode slightly increases.
(Depending on the TV status, the AV receiver will enter
standby mode as usual.)
• The HDMI component (connected to HDMI IN 1/2/3/AUX
INPUT) selected for Zone 2 cannot be operated with the
remote controller through the AV receiver using RIHD
function and also cannot be operated on the TV connected
to HDMI OUT MAIN using CEC function.
• The HDMI component (connected to HDMI IN 1/2/3/AUX
INPUT) selected for Zone 2 can be operated on the TV in
Zone 2 using CEC function.
• When the source equipment is connected with the u
connection, it may malfunction if “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” is set
to “On”.
En-78
■ HDMI Through
`Off
`BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, STB/DVR, GAME1, GAME2,
PC, AUX, TV/CD, PHONO:
Selects the input source for which the HDMI
Through function is enabled.
`Last:
The HDMI Through function is activated on the
input source selected at the time of setting the
AV receiver to standby mode.
When enabling the HDMI Through function,
regardless of whether the AV receiver is on or in
standby, both audio and video streams from an HDMI
input will be output to the TV or other components via
HDMI connection. The HDMI indicator will be dimly-lit
in standby mode. Note that the indicator may not light
under certain conditions (➔ page 26).
This setting is fixed to “Auto” automatically when the
above “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” setting is set to “On”,
resulting in automatic input source selection.
Note
• Only an input source assigned to an HDMI IN via
“HDMI Input” setting is enabled (➔ page 63).
• The power consumption in standby mode will increase
during the HDMI Through function; however in the following
cases, the power consumption can be saved:
– The TV is in standby mode.
– You are watching a TV program.
• Refer to the connected component’s instruction manual for
details.
• Depending on the connected component, the correct input
source may not be selected with the setting fixed to “Auto”.
• This setting is set to “Off” automatically when the “HDMI
CEC (RIHD)” setting is set to “Off”.
• This function is only available for the HDMI OUT MAIN jack.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
Advanced Operations
■ Audio TV Out (Main)
` Off
` On
This preference determines whether the incoming
audio signal is output from HDMI OUT MAIN. You
may want to turn this preference on if your TV is
connected to HDMI OUT MAIN and you want to listen
to the audio from a connected component through
your TV’s speakers. Normally, this should be set to
“Off”.
Note
• If “On” is selected and the audio can be output from the TV,
the AV receiver will output no sound through its speakers.
In this case, “TV Speaker” appears on the AV receiver’s
display by pressing DISPLAY.
• When “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” is set to “On”, this setting is
fixed to “Auto”.
• When “Speakers Type(Front)” is set to “Digital
Crossover”, this setting is fixed to “Off”.
• This setting is fixed to “Off” when “Monitor Out” is set to
“Sub” (➔ page 62).
• With some TVs and input signals, no sound may be output
even when this setting is set to “On”.
• When “Audio TV Out (Main)” or “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” is set
to “On” and you’re listening through your TV’s speakers,
turning up the AV receiver’s volume control will make the
sound be output from the AV receiver’s front left and right
speakers. To stop the AV receiver’s speakers producing
sound, change the settings, change your TV’s settings, or
turn down the AV receiver’s volume.
• Listening mode cannot be changed when this setting is set
to “On” and the audio is output from the TV.
• If the audio signal from the player is not supported by the
TV, the audio is not output from the TV even if this setting
is enabled. When the audio cannot be output from the TV,
(When “Monitor Out” is set to “Both”, the audio cannot be
output form the TV connected to both HDMI OUT MAIN and
HDMI OUT SUB) the audio is output from the speakers
connected to the AV receiver.
■ Audio TV Out (Sub)
` Off
` On
This preference determines whether the incoming
audio signal is output from HDMI OUT SUB. You may
want to turn this preference on if your TV is
connected to HDMI OUT SUB and you want to listen
to the audio from a connected component through
your TV’s speakers. Normally, this should be set to
“Off”.
Note
• If “On” is selected and the audio can be output from the TV,
the AV receiver will output no sound through its speakers.
In this case, “TV Speaker” appears on the AV receiver’s
display by pressing DISPLAY.
• When “Speakers Type(Front)” is set to “Digital
Crossover”, this setting is fixed to “Off”.
• This setting is fixed to “Off” when “Monitor Out” is set to
“Main” (➔ page 62).
• When “Monitor Out” is set to “Both” (➔ page 62), and this
setting is enabled, set audio output of source component to
2ch PCM.
• With some TVs and input signals, no sound may be output
even when this setting is set to “On”.
• When “Audio TV Out (Sub)” is set to “On” and you’re
listening through your TV’s speakers, turning up the AV
receiver’s volume control will make the sound be output
from the AV receiver’s front left and right speakers. To stop
the AV receiver’s speakers producing sound, change the
settings, change your TV’s settings, or turn down the AV
receiver’s volume.
• Listening mode cannot be changed when this setting is set
to “On” and the audio is output from the TV.
• When “Monitor Out” is set to “Both” (➔ page 62) and only
“Audio TV Out (Sub)” is set to “On”, the audio is not output
from the TV connected to HDMI OUT SUB except in the
case the audio input is via HDMI.
• If the audio signal from the player is not supported by the
TV, the audio is not output from the TV even if this setting
is enabled. When the audio cannot be output from the TV,
(When “Monitor Out” is set to “Both”, the audio cannot be
output form the TV connected to both HDMI OUT MAIN and
En-79
HDMI OUT SUB) the audio is output from the speakers
connected to the AV receiver.
■ Audio Return Channel
`Off
`Auto:
The audio signal from your TV tuner can be sent
to HDMI OUT MAIN of the AV receiver.
The audio return channel (ARC) function allows an
ARC capable TV to send the audio stream to HDMI
OUT MAIN of the AV receiver. To use this function,
you must select the TV/CD input selector and your TV
must be ARC capable. Default setting: “- - - - -”
Note
• This setting is fixed to “- - - - -” when the “HDMI CEC
(RIHD)” setting is set to “Off”.
• This setting is set to “Auto” automatically when the “HDMI
CEC (RIHD)” setting is set to “On” for the first time.
• If you set “Audio Return Channel” to “Auto”, the “Audio
Selector” settings of the TV/CD input selector will be
automatically switched to “ARC” (➔ page 76).
Tip
• After changing the settings of the “HDMI CEC (RIHD)”,
“HDMI Through” or “Audio Return Channel”, turn off the
power on all connected pieces of equipment and then turn
them on again. Refer to the user’s manuals for all
connected pieces of equipment.
■ Lip Sync
`Off
`On
This function allows the AV receiver to automatically
correct any delay between the video and the audio,
based on the data from the connected monitor.
Note
• This function works only if your HDMI-compatible TV
supports HDMI Lip Sync.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
Advanced Operations
■ InstaPrevue
These settings apply to “InstaPrevue” of the Home
menu (➔ page 56) and specify the preview display of
HDMI video streams.
Sub Window
` Multi:
Displays preview thumbnails all at once.
` Single:
Displays preview thumbnails one-by-one.
With this setting, you can set the number of preview
thumbnails displayed.
Position
(with “Sub Window” set to “Multi”)
` Top, Bottom, Left, Right
(with “Sub Window” set to “Single”)
` Upper Left, Upper Right, Lower Left, Lower
Right
With this setting, you can set the position of preview
thumbnails on the TV screen.
Note
• Depending on video signals, the picture may not be
properly rendered on the preview thumbnails of
InstaPrevue.
Auto Standby
■ Auto Standby
` Off
` On
When “Auto Standby” is set to “On”, the AV receiver
will automatically enter standby mode if there is no
operation for 30 minutes with no audio and no video
signal input.
“Auto Standby” will appear on the AV receiver’s
display and OSD 30 seconds before the Auto
Standby comes on.
Default setting: On (European and Australian
models), Off (North American models)
Network
Note
• Set to “On”, the Auto Standby function may activate itself
during playback with some sources.
• The Auto Standby function does not work when Zone 2/3 is
on.
■ HDMI Through
` Off
` On
This setting enables or disables the Auto Standby
during HDMI Through by detecting the audio/video
input signal.
When this setting is set to “On”, the AV receiver will
automatically enter standby mode if there is no audio
and no video signal input during HDMI Through for 30
minutes. (The Auto Standby function does not work
when Zone 2/3 is on.)
When this setting is set to “Off”, the status of HDMI
Through is continued regardless of audio/video input
signal.
Tip
• Entering standby mode is possible by setting “HDMI CEC
(RIHD)” to “On” and using CEC-compatible component
regardless of the above-mentioned setting.
See “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” in “7. Hardware Setup” for linked
operation (➔ page 78).
• When the HDMI Through is enabled, the power
consumption slightly increases.
Note
• This setting is fixed to “Off” when “Auto Standby” is set to
“Off”.
This section explains how to configure the AV
receiver’s network settings manually.
After modifying the network settings, you must
confirm the changes by executing “Save”.
If your router’s DHCP server is enabled, you don’t
need to change any of these settings, as the AV
receiver is set to use DHCP to configure itself
automatically by default (i.e., DHCP is set to
“Enable”). If, however, your router’s DHCP server is
disabled (you’re for example using static IP), you’ll
need to configure these settings yourself, in which
case, a knowledge of Ethernet networking is
essential.
What’s DHCP?
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is used
by routers, computers, the AV receiver, and other
devices to automatically configure themselves on a
network.
What’s DNS?
The DNS (Domain Name System) translates domain
names into IP addresses. For example, when you
enter a domain name such as www.onkyousa.com in
your Web browser, before accessing the site, your
browser uses DNS to translate this into an IP
address, in this case 63.148.251.142.
■ Network Connection
`Wired
`Wireless
This setting determines whether you connect the AV
receiver to network by wired LAN or wireless LAN. If
you connect by wireless LAN, select “Wireless”. See
“Performing Wireless LAN Setup” for setting
(➔ page 31).
Tip
• The same setting is available even if “Wireless” is selected
in “Network Connection” in initial setup (➔ page 27).
En-80
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
Advanced Operations
■ MAC Address
This is the AV receiver’s MAC (Media Access
Control) address. This address cannot be changed.
■ Proxy Port
If you’re using a Web proxy, enter a proxy port
number here.
■ DHCP
` Enable
` Disable
This setting determines whether or not the AV
receiver uses DHCP to automatically configure its IP
Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS Server
settings.
■ Network Standby
` On
` Off
This setting enables or disables control over the
network.
When enabled, the NET indicator will be dimly-lit
while the AV receiver is in standby mode. Note that
the indicator may not light under certain conditions
(➔ page 26).
Note
• If you select “Disable”, you must configure the “IP
Address”, “Subnet Mask”, “Gateway”, and “DNS Server”
settings yourself.
■ IP Address
` Class A:
“10.0.0.0” to “10.255.255.255”
` Class B:
“172.16.0.0” to “172.31.255.255”
` Class C:
“192.168.0.0” to “192.168.255.255”
Enter a static IP address provided by your Internet
Service Provider (ISP).
Most routers use Class C IP addresses.
■ Subnet Mask
Enter the subnet mask address provided by your ISP
(typically 255.255.255.0).
Tip
• If pairing setting is not set, “Ready” appears on-screen
display. The name of the device paired with the AV receiver
is displayed if pairing setting is set.
• For details on the Bluetooth connection, refer to the
instruction manual of the Bluetooth-enabled device.
• The pairing can be done by holding down BLUETOOTH
button on the AV receiver until BLUETOOTH indicator
flashes.
Note
• This setting cannot be selected if you’ve selected NET or
USB as input selector in Multi Zone.
Initial Setup
Note
• When set to “On”, the power consumption slightly
increases in standby mode.
■ Update Notice
` Enable
` Disable
When this setting is enabled, you will be notified if a
firmware update via network of high importance is
available.
If you skipped the initial setup wizard, for example on
first-time use, you can reaccess it from here.
See “Initial Setup” (➔ page 26).
Note
• This setting cannot be selected if the “Monitor Out” setting
is set to “Sub”.
Note
• Selecting “Never Remind me” on the notification window
will switch this setting to “Disable” (➔ page 26).
• For details on the update notification, see “Firmware
Update Notification” (➔ page 26).
■ Gateway
Enter the gateway address provided by your ISP.
■ Bluetooth
This setting enables the AV receiver to pair with
Bluetooth-enabled device.
■ DNS Server
Enter the DNS server address provided by your ISP.
Status
Press ENTER button to display “Now Pairing” and
start pairing.
■ Proxy URL
To use a Web proxy, enter its URL here.
En-81
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
Advanced Operations
8. Remote Controller Setup
9. Lock Setup
Remote ID
With this preference, you can protect your settings by
locking the setup menus.
■ Remote ID
` 1, 2, or 3
When several Onkyo components are used in the
same room, their remote ID codes may overlap. To
differentiate the AV receiver from other components,
you can change its remote ID from “1”, to “2” or “3”.
■ Setup
` Locked
` Unlocked
When “Locked” is selected, the setup menus will be
locked and you cannot change any setting.
Note
• If you do change the AV receiver’s remote ID, be sure to
change the remote controller to the same ID (see below),
otherwise, you won’t be able to control it with the remote
controller.
Changing the remote controller’s ID
1
While holding down RECEIVER, press and
hold down Q SETUP until the RECEIVER lights
(about 3 seconds).
2
Use the number buttons to enter ID 1, 2, or 3.
RECEIVER flashes twice.
Remote Mode Setup
See “Looking up for Remote Control Codes”
(➔ page 87).
En-82
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
Advanced Operations
Multi Zone
In addition to the main listening room, you can also enjoy playback in the other room, or as we call Multi Zone. And, you can select a different source for each room.
Making Multi Zone Connections
Connecting Your Zone Speakers Directly to the AV receiver
Connecting the Zone Speakers to an Additional Amplifier
This setup allows you to select different sources for Main room and Zone 2/3. This
is called Powered Zone, as the Zone 2/3 speakers are powered by the AV
receiver.
This setup allows 9.1-channel playback in your main listening room and 2-channel
stereo playback in Zone 2/3.
To use this setup, you must activate the Powered Zone 2/3 setting (➔ page 65).
Main room
Main room
AV receiver
AV receiver
Zone 3
Zone 2
Zone 2
Zone 3
Receiver/
integrated amp
R
L
R
Receiver/
integrated amp
L
Note
• With this setup, the volume of Zone 2/3 is controlled by the AV receiver.
• When Powered Zone 2 is used, playback in the main room is reduced to 7.1 channels.
• When Powered Zone 3 is used, playback in the main room is reduced to 5.1 channels.
Note
• The volume of Zone 2/3 must be set on the Zone 2/3 amplifier.
En-83
Advanced Operations
12V Trigger Out
1
Note
When Zone 2/3 is turned on, the output from the 12V
TRIGGER OUT jack goes high (+12 V and max.
150 mA for Zone 2, +12 V and max. 25 mA for
Zone 3). Connecting this jack to a 12-volt trigger input
on a component in Zone 2/3 will make that
component turn on or off as the AV receiver turns on
or off the Zone 2/3.
• If you use HDMI OUT ZONE 2, make sure to set “Zone 2
Monitor Out” to “Use” (➔ page 62).
• Video and audio signals from an HDMI input will be output
to HDMI OUT ZONE 2.
• The information of connected component appears on a TV
in Zone 2 by pressing DISPLAY.
Zone 2 Video Output
■ Operating on the AV receiver
Tip
• The corresponding trigger output goes high (+12 V).
Controlling Multi Zone Components
To select AM or FM, press ZONE 2 or ZONE 3
and the TUNER input selector repeatedly.
To select the same source as the main room’s,
press ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 twice. “Zone 2
Selector: Source” or “Zone 3 Selector: Source”
appears on the AV receiver’s display.
Input selector buttons
Tip
• The on-screen information appears on the TV screen in
Zone 2 by connecting the TV to HDMI OUT ZONE 2 of the
AV receiver with HDMI cable.
To turn on Zone 2/3 and select an input source,
press ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 followed by an input
selector button within 8 seconds.
Zone 2/3 turns on, the Z2 or Z3 indicator lights on
the AV receiver’s display.
8ON/STANDBY
MASTER VOLUME
2
The AV receiver allows you to enjoy the HDMI
audio/video in Zone 2 by connecting the TV of
Zone 2.
To turn off Zone 2/3, press ZONE 2 or ZONE 3
followed by 8ON/STANDBY within 8 seconds.
The zone is turned off.
Tip
Main room
• The corresponding trigger output goes low (0 volts).
TV
ZONE 2 ZONE 3
AV receiver
Tip
• The Whole House Mode function shares the input source of
main room with Multi Zone (➔ page 54).
■ Operating on the remote controller
To control Zone 2/3, you must press ZONE on the
remote controller first.
ZONE turns red when Zone 2 is on, and green when
Zone 3 is on.
8RECEIVER
ZONE
Input selector buttons
Zone 2
MUTING
TV
VOLq/w
En-84
Advanced Operations
1
Press ZONE repeatedly, then point the remote
controller at the AV receiver and press
8RECEIVER.
Zone 2/3 turns on, the Z2 or Z3 indicator lights on
the AV receiver’s display.
Muting Zones
■ Operating on the remote controller
1
Press ZONE repeatedly, and then press
MUTING.
Tip
• The corresponding trigger output goes high (+12 V).
2
3
To select an input source for Zone 2/3, press
ZONE repeatedly, followed by an INPUT
SELECTOR button.
To select AM or FM, press ZONE and the TUNER
input selector repeatedly.
To turn off Zone 2/3, press ZONE repeatedly,
followed by 8RECEIVER.
The zone is turned off.
Tip
• The corresponding trigger output goes low (0 volts).
Adjusting the Volume for Zones
■ Operating on the remote controller
1
2
Press ZONE repeatedly.
Use VOL q/w.
■ Operating on the AV receiver
1
Press ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 (the Z2/Z3 indicator
on the AV receiver’s display flashes).
2
Use MASTER VOLUME control within 8
seconds.
If your Zone 2/3 speakers are connected to a receiver
or integrated amplifier in Zone 2/3, use its volume
control to adjust the volume.
Tip
• To unmute, press ZONE followed by MUTING again. Zones
can also be unmuted by adjusting the volume.
Note
• ZONE 2 LINE OUT and ZONE 2 L/R output 2ch PCM,
analog, NET or USB input sources. To listen to the PCM
source, you need to make an HDMI connection.
• Only analog, NET or USB input source is output from the
ZONE 3 LINE OUT jacks and ZONE 3 L/R terminals.
• You cannot select different AM or FM radio stations for your
main room and Zone 2/3. The same AM/FM radio station
will be heard in each room. Namely, if you have selected an
FM station for the main room, that station will also be output
in Zone 2/3.
• If an HDMI component selected in Zone 2 outputs the
sound other than PCM, the sound is not output from
ZONE 2 L/R and ZONE 2 LINE OUT.
• Both audio and video outputs from an HDMI component
may interrupt when the main room and Zone 2 are set to
share the same source or not.
• You cannot select different input selector NET or USB for
your main room and Zone 2/3. Namely, if you have selected
USB input selector for Zone 2/3, USB input selector will be
selected in main room even if NET has been selected for
main room.
• “BLUETOOTH” cannot be selected as input selector in
Multi Zone. If you play audio from Bluetooth-enabled device
in Multi Zone, select “Zone 2 Selector: Source” or “Zone 3
Selector: Source”, and “BLUETOOTH” as input selector in
Main room.
• When Zone 2/3 is activated and its input selector is
selected, the power consumption of standby mode slightly
increases.
• While Zone 2/3 is on, u functions will not work.
En-85
• The component connected to HDMI input other than HDMI
IN 1/2/3/AUX INPUT is selected as an input source for
Zone 2, the linked operations of p may not work
properly. In this case, set the linked operations to Off on the
source component.
• When setting the AV receiver to standby mode while Zone
2/3 is active, the Z2 or Z3 indicator is dimly lit.
• Activating Zones in the main room when the listening mode
is set to Pure Audio will automatically switch it to Direct.
• “GAME2” cannot be selected as input sources for Zone 3.
• When “GAME2” is the input source of Main room and
Zone 3 is set to share the same source, no sound will be
output from Zone 3.
• Even if you repeatedly press the remote controller’s ZONE
to select zones, the last zone selection will be retained once
you have switched to other components by pressing other
REMOTE MODE after pressing ZONE.
Advanced Operations
Using the Remote Controller in
Zone and Multiroom Control Kits
Using a Multiroom Kit with Other
Components
From the connecting block
Miniplug cable
To control the AV receiver with the remote controller
while you’re in Zone, you’ll need a commercially
available multiroom remote control kit for each zone.
• Multiroom kits are made by Niles and Xantech.
These kits can also be used when there isn’t a clear
line of sight to the AV receiver’s remote sensor, such
as when it’s installed inside a cabinet.
In this setup, an IR emitter is connected to the AV
receiver’s IR OUT jack and placed in front of the other
component’s remote control sensor. Infrared signals
received at the AV receiver’s IR IN jack are fed
through to the other component via the IR emitter.
Signals picked up by the AV receiver’s remote control
sensor are not output.
AV receiver
Signal flow
Using a Multiroom Kit with Zone
Using a Multiroom Kit with a Cabinet
In this setup, the IR receiver in Zone picks up the
infrared signals from the remote controller and feeds
them through to the AV receiver in the main room via
the connecting block.
In this setup, the IR receiver picks up the infrared
signals from the remote controller and feeds them to
the AV receiver located in the cabinet via the
connecting block.
IR IN
IR OUT
IR
receiver
Connecting
block
AV receiver
IR Emitter
IR IN
Remote controller
Connecting
block
IR
receiver
Connecting
block
Other component
IR
receiver
Signal flow
IR IN
The IR emitter should be connected to the AV
receiver’s IR OUT jack, as shown below.
Remote controller
Main room
Zone
Signal flow
Inside
cabinet
Remote controller
From the connecting block
Miniplug cable
Other component
Remote control sensor
Signal flow
AV receiver
The miniplug cable from the connecting block should
be connected to the AV receiver’s IR IN jack, as
shown below.
Emitter
Miniplug
IR Emitter
Signal flow
En-86
Controlling Other Components
Controlling Other
Components
You can use the AV receiver’s remote controller to
control your other AV components, including those
made by other manufacturers. This section explains
how to enter the remote control code for a component
that you want to control: DVD, TV, CD, etc.
See “Learning Commands” for learning commands
directly from another component’s remote controller
(➔ page 94).
See “Using Normal Macros” for programming
ACTIVITIES to perform a sequence of remote control
actions (➔ page 95).
Preprogrammed Remote Control
Codes
1
2
Press RECEIVER followed by HOME.
3
Use q/w to select “Remote Controller Setup”,
and then press ENTER.
4
Use q/w to select “Remote Mode Setup”, and
then press ENTER.
5
Use q/w to select a remote mode, and then
press ENTER.
The menu of category selection appears.
6
7
The following REMOTE MODE buttons are
preprogrammed with remote control codes for
controlling the components listed. You do not need to
enter a remote control code to control these
components.
For details on controlling these components, see the
indicated pages.
BD/DVD Onkyo Blu-ray Disc player (➔ page 89)
TV/CD
Onkyo CD player (➔ page 88)
STB/DVR Apple TV
Looking up for Remote Control Codes
You can look up for an appropriate remote control
code from the on-screen menu.
8
9
Use e/r or q/w to select “Setup”, and then
press ENTER.
Use q/w to select a category, and then press
ENTER.
The keyboard screen for brand name input
appears.
Use q/w/e/r to select a character, and then
press ENTER.
Repeat this step for the first three characters of
the brand name.
When you have entered the 3rd character, select
“Search” and press ENTER.
A list of brand names is retrieved.
If the desired brand name is not found:
Use r to select “Not Listed”, and then press
ENTER.
The keyboard screen for brand name input
appears.
Use q/w to select a brand, and then press
ENTER.
A remote control code with its instructions are
displayed. Follow the procedure.
Note
If you can control the component, use q/w to
select “OK”, and then press ENTER.
The on-screen menu returns to the “Remote
Mode Setup” front screen.
If you cannot control the component, use q/w
to select “Try Next Code” and press ENTER.
The next code is displayed.
Entering Remote Control Codes
You’ll need to enter a code for each component that
you want to control.
1
Look up the appropriate remote control code
in the separate Remote Control Codes list.
The codes are organized by category (e.g., DVD
player, TV, etc.).
2
While holding down the REMOTE MODE
button to which you want to assign a code,
press and hold down DISPLAY (about 3
seconds).
The REMOTE MODE button lights.
Note
• Remote control codes cannot be entered for
RECEIVER and the multi zone button.
• Only TV remote control codes can be entered for TV.
• Except for RECEIVER, TV, and the multi zone button,
remote control codes from any category can be
assigned for the REMOTE MODE buttons. However,
these buttons also work as input selector buttons, so
choose a REMOTE MODE button that corresponds
with the input to which you connect your component.
For example, if you connect your CD player to the CD
input, choose TV/CD when entering its remote control
code.
• You need to connect your TV to the HDMI output (HDMI
OUT MAIN) to make the following on-screen setting.
En-87
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
Controlling Other Components
3
Within 30 seconds, use the number buttons to
enter the 5-digit remote control code.
The REMOTE MODE button flashes twice.
If the remote control code is not entered
successfully, the REMOTE MODE button will
flash once slowly.
Note
• Though the provided remote control codes are correct at
the time of release, they are subject to change.
Remapping Colored Buttons
You can change the configuration of colored buttons,
with which REMOTE MODE buttons are preset.
1
2
While holding down the REMOTE MODE
button that you want to program, press and
hold down A (Red) until the REMOTE MODE
button lights (about 3 seconds).
You can only change colored buttons for
components whose codes belong to categories
of the Remote Control Codes list (BD/DVD
player, TV, cable set-top box, etc).
Within 30 seconds, press the colored buttons
in the order that you want to reassign them.
The button presses are assigned to each button
from left to right. The REMOTE MODE button
flashes twice, indicating that the sequence has
been successfully assigned. If the sequence is
not successfully assigned, the REMOTE MODE
button will flash once slowly.
Tip
• To reset the REMOTE MODE buttons to their default
settings, see “Resetting the REMOTE MODE Buttons”.
`30627:
Onkyo DVD player without u
`71817:
Onkyo CD player without u
`32900/33100/33500:
Onkyo Blu-ray Disc player
`32901/33104/33504:
Onkyo HD DVD player
`70868:
Onkyo MD recorder without u
`71323:
Onkyo CD recorder without u
`82990:
Onkyo Dock without u
Note
• If any other button than the colored buttons is pressed, the
operation will be cancelled.
• This operation cannot be done while the AV receiver is in
Receiver mode or when Zone 2/3 is active.
Remote Control Codes for Onkyo
Components Connected via RI
Onkyo components that are connected via u are
controlled by pointing the remote controller at the AV
receiver, not the component. This allows you to
control components that are out of view, in a rack, for
example.
1
2
3
Make sure the Onkyo component is connected
with an u cable and an analog audio cable
(RCA).
See “Connecting Onkyo RI Components” for
details (➔ page 24).
Enter the appropriate remote control code for
a REMOTE MODE button, by referring to the
previous section.
` 42157:
Onkyo cassette tape deck with u
` 81993:
Onkyo Dock with u
Press the REMOTE MODE button, point the
remote controller at the AV receiver, and
operate the component.
Controlling Onkyo components without u
If you want to control an Onkyo component by
pointing the remote controller directly at it, or you
want to control an Onkyo component that’s not
connected via u, use the following remote control
codes:
En-88
Resetting the REMOTE MODE Buttons
You can reset a REMOTE MODE button to its default
remote control code.
1
While holding down the REMOTE MODE
button that you want to reset, press and hold
down HOME until the REMOTE MODE button
lights (about 3 seconds).
2
Within 30 seconds, press the REMOTE MODE
button again.
The REMOTE MODE button flashes twice,
indicating that the button has been reset.
Each REMOTE MODE button is preprogrammed
with a remote control code. When a button is
reset, its preprogrammed code is restored.
Note
• The learning command is also reset.
Controlling Other Components
Resetting the Remote Controller
You can reset the remote controller to its default
settings.
1
While holding down RECEIVER, press and
hold down HOME until RECEIVER lights
(about 3 seconds).
2
Within 30 seconds, press RECEIVER again.
RECEIVER flashes twice, indicating that the
remote controller has been reset.
Controlling Other Components
By pressing the REMOTE MODE button that’s been
programmed with the remote control code for your
component, you can control your component as
described below.
For details on entering a remote control code for other
components, see “Entering Remote Control Codes”
(➔ page 87).
Controlling a TV
TV is preprogrammed with the remote control code
for controlling a TV that supports the p*1
(limited to some models). The TV must be able to
receive remote control commands via p and
be connected to the AV receiver via HDMI. If
controlling your TV via p doesn’t work very
well, program your TV’s remote control code into TV
and use the TV remote mode to control your TV.
Use the following remote control codes:
` 11807/13100/13500:
TV with p
Controlling Apple TV
By programming the supplied remote controller with
the appropriate remote control code, you can use it to
operate your Apple TV.
Use the following remote control codes:
` 02615:
Apple TV
Controlling MHL-Enabled Mobile Device
By programming the supplied remote controller with
the appropriate remote control code, you can use it to
operate your MHL-enabled mobile device.
Connect your MHL-enabled mobile device to the AUX
INPUT MHL jack. We advise you to program the
remote control code on the AUX button.
Use the following remote control codes:
(North American models)
` 33101:
MHL-enabled mobile device
(European and Australian models)
` 32910:
MHL-enabled mobile device
Note
• With some mobile devices, reliable operation cannot be
guaranteed.
En-89
Controlling a Blu-ray Disc/DVD Player, HD
DVD Player or DVD Recorder
BD/DVD is preprogrammed with the remote control
code for controlling a component that supports the
p*1 (limited to some models). The component
must be able to receive remote control commands via
p and be connected to the AV receiver via
HDMI.
Use the following remote control codes:
`32910/33101/33501/31612:
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player with p
*1
The p supported by the AV receiver is the CEC
system control function of the HDMI standard.
Controlling Other Components
■ TV operation
Press the appropriate REMOTE
MODE button first.
■ DVD player/DVD recorder operation
Available buttons
Available buttons
a 8, INPUT, TV VOL q/w
b GUIDE
h
i
Number: +10*1
a
b
c
d
k
l
m
i 8SOURCE
j MUTING
k CH +/–
h DISPLAY
d SETUP
j MUTING
k CH +/–
e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,
7, 6
l PREV CH
m RETURN
f A (Red)*1
B (Green)
e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,
7, 6*1
n CLR
C (Yellow)*1
DISC +/–
l MENU
m RETURN
n CLR
D (Blue)*1
C (Yellow)*1
D (Blue)*1
■ Blu-ray Disc player/HD DVD player operation
Available buttons
g Number: 1 to 9, 0
Number: +10*1
■ VCR/PVR operation
b TOP MENU
h DISPLAY
Available buttons
c q/w/e/r, ENTER
i 8SOURCE
b GUIDE
h DISPLAY
j MUTING
k CH +/–
c q/w/e/r, ENTER
i 8SOURCE
d SETUP
j MUTING
k CH +/–
d SETUP
e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,
7, 6
C (Yellow)
DISC +/–
l MENU
m RETURN
n CLR
D (Blue)
f
h DISPLAY
c q/w/e/r, ENTER
d SETUP
f A (Red)
B (Green)
e
b TOP MENU
c q/w/e/r, ENTER
f A (Red)*1
B (Green)*1
j
g Number: 1 to 9, 0
e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,
7, 6
g Number: 1 to 9, 0
Number: +10
l PREV CH
m RETURN
n CLR
■ Cassette tape deck operation
g Number: 1 to 9, 0
Number: +10*1
Available buttons
e 1, t (Reverse
i 8SOURCE
Playback), 2, 5, 4, j MUTING
7, 6
g
n
En-90
Controlling Other Components
■ Satellite receiver/Cable receiver operation
Press the appropriate REMOTE
MODE button first.
Available buttons
b GUIDE
g Number: 1 to 9, 0
Number: +10
c q/w/e/r, ENTER
h
i
d SETUP
h DISPLAY
e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,
7, 6
i 8SOURCE
f A (Red)
B (Green)
j
k
b
c
d
l
m
C (Yellow)
l PREV CH
m RETURN
D (Blue)
n CLR
■ CD player/CD recorder/MD recorder operation
Available buttons
g Number: 1 to 9, 0
c q/w/e/r, ENTER
d SETUP
Number: +10
e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,
7, 6
h DISPLAY
f SEARCH
REPEAT
j MUTING
k DISC +/–
RANDOM
e
j MUTING
k CH +/–
i 8SOURCE
n CLR
MODE
Note
f
g
n
• With some components, certain buttons may not work as
expected, and some may not work at all.
• See “Controlling Your iPod/iPhone” about the operation of
iPod/iPhone (➔ page 93).
*1 The p function is not supported. The p
supported by the AV receiver is the CEC system control
function of the HDMI standard.
En-91
Controlling Other Components
Using the Onkyo Dock
RI Dock
With the RI Dock, you can easily play the music of
your iPod/iPhone, or watch the slideshows and
videos of your iPod/iPhone on a TV. In addition, the
on-screen display (OSD) allows you to view,
navigate, and select your iPod/iPhone model’s
contents on your TV, and with the supplied remote
controller, you can control your iPod/iPhone from the
comfort of your sofa. You can even use the AV
receiver’s remote controller to operate your
iPod/iPhone.
Note
• Enter the appropriate remote control code before using the
AV receiver’s remote controller for the first time
(➔ page 88).
• Connect the RI Dock to the AV receiver with an u cable
(➔ page 24).
• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to “HDD” or
“HDD/DOCK”.
• Set the AV receiver’s Input Display to “DOCK”
(➔ page 54).
■ System Function
System On
When you turn on the AV receiver, the RI Dock and
iPod/iPhone turn on automatically. In addition, when
RI Dock and iPod/iPhone are on, the AV receiver can
be turned on by pressing 8SOURCE.
Auto Power On
If you press the remote controller’s 1 (Playback)
while the AV receiver is on standby, the AV receiver
will automatically turn on, select your iPod/iPhone as
the input source, and your iPod/iPhone will start
playback.
Direct Change
If you start iPod/iPhone playback while listening to
another input source, the AV receiver will
automatically switch to the input to which the RI Dock
is connected.
Other Remote Operations
You can use the remote controller that came with the
AV receiver to control other iPod/iPhone functions.
The available functionality depends on the AV
receiver.
Note
• If you use your iPod/iPhone with any other accessories,
iPod/iPhone playback detection may not work.
• The System On function may not work depending on the RI
Dock.
iPod Alarm
If you use the Alarm function on your iPod to start
playback, the AV receiver will turn on at the specified
time and select your iPod as the input source
automatically.
Note
• Depending on your iPod/iPhone model and generation,
some of the linked operations may not be available.
• This linked operation won’t work while a video is being
played or when the sound set for the alarm is a built-in
sound (Beep).
• This linked operation won’t work with models on which
music files cannot be used to set the alarm sound.
■ Operating Notes
• Use the AV receiver’s volume control to adjust the playback
volume.
• While your iPod/iPhone is inserted in the RI Dock, its
volume control has no effect.
• If you do adjust the volume control on your iPod/iPhone
while it’s inserted in the RI Dock, be careful that it’s not set
too loud before you reconnect your headphones.
En-92
The Dock is sold separately. Models sold are
different depending on the region.
For the latest information on the Onkyo Dock
components, see the Onkyo web site at:
http://www.onkyo.com
Before using the Onkyo Dock components, update
your iPod/iPhone with the latest software, available
from the Apple web site.
For supported iPod/iPhone models, see the
instruction manual of the Onkyo Dock.
Controlling Other Components
■ u Dock operation
Controlling Your iPod/iPhone
Press the appropriate REMOTE
MODE button first.
By pressing the REMOTE MODE button that’s been
programmed with the remote control code for your
Dock, you can control your iPod/iPhone in the Dock
with the buttons described further in this section.
See “Entering Remote Control Codes” for details on
entering a remote control code (➔ page 87).
See the Dock’s instruction manual for more
information.
e
f
RI Dock
g
h
i
• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to “HDD” or
“HDD/DOCK”.
• 8SOURCE may not work with a remote control
code (without u). In this case, make an u
connection and enter the remote control code 81993
(with u).
b
■ With the RI Control
Make an u connection and enter the remote control
code 81993 (with u).
• Set the AV receiver’s Input Display to “DOCK”
(➔ page 54).
c
■ Without the RI Control
You must enter the remote control code 82990 first
(➔ page 88).
Available buttons
j
a
d
k
En-93
a TOP MENU*1
e DISPLAY*2
b q/w/e/r, ENTER
f 8SOURCE*3
PLAYLIST e/r
g MUTING
c 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,
7, 6
h ALBUM +/–
d REPEAT
RANDOM
j MENU
k MODE*4
i VOL q/w
• With some iPod/iPhone models, generations and RI Docks,
certain buttons may not work as expected.
• For detailed operation of iPod/iPhone, please refer to the
instruction manual of the RI Dock.
*1 TOP MENU works as the mode button when used with
the DS-A2 RI Dock.
*2 DISPLAY turns on the backlight for a few seconds.
*3 This button does not turn the Onkyo DS-A2 or DS-A2X
RI Dock on or off. Also, your iPod/iPhone may not
respond the first time you press this button, in which case
you should press it again. This is because the remote
controller transmits the On and Standby commands
alternately, so if your iPod/iPhone is already on, it will
remain on when the remote controller transmits the On
command. Similarly, if your iPod/iPhone is already off, it
will remain off when the remote controller transmits the
Off command.
*4 Resume mode
With the Resume function, you can resume playback of
the song that was playing when you removed your
iPod/iPhone from the Onkyo DS-A2 RI Dock.
Controlling Other Components
If the command is learned successfully, the
REMOTE MODE button flashes twice.
Learning Commands
The AV receiver’s remote controller can learn the
commands of other remote controllers. By
transmitting, for example, the Play command from
your CD player’s remote controller, the supplied
remote controller can learn it and then reproduce the
exact same command when its 1 is pressed in CD
remote mode.
This is useful when some buttons don’t work as
expected though you entered the appropriate remote
control code (➔ page 87).
Within about
4 inches (10 cm)
Supplied remote
controller
8RECEIVER
REMOTE
MODE
4
To learn more commands, repeat steps 2 and
3.
Press any REMOTE MODE button when
you’ve finished. The REMOTE MODE button
flashes twice.
Note
1
While holding down the REMOTE MODE
button for the mode in which you want to use
the command, press and hold down
8RECEIVER until the REMOTE MODE button
lights (about 3 seconds).
2
On the supplied remote controller, press the
button to which you want to assign the new
command.
3
Point the remote controllers at each other,
within about 4 inches (10 cm) apart, and then
press and hold the button whose command
you want to acquire until the REMOTE MODE
button flashes.
• The following buttons cannot learn new commands:
8RECEIVER, ALL OFF, MY MOVIE, MY TV, MY MUSIC,
REMOTE MODE, MODE.
• The remote controller can learn approximately 70 to 90
commands, although this will be less if commands that use
a lot of memory are learned.
• Remote controller buttons such as Play, Stop, and Pause
are preprogrammed with commands for controlling Onkyo
CD players, cassette decks, and DVD players. However,
they can learn new commands, and you can restore the
preprogrammed commands at any time by resetting the
remote controller (➔ page 89).
• To overwrite a previously acquired command, repeat this
procedure.
• Depending on the remote controller used, some buttons
may not respond as expected, or the learning process itself
may not be possible.
• Only commands from infrared remote controllers can be
acquired.
En-94
• When the remote controller runs out of batteries, all
commands acquired will be lost and will have to be learned
all over again. Therefore, do not discard your other remote
controllers.
■ Deleting Acquired Commands
1. While holding down the REMOTE MODE button
for the mode from which you want to delete a
command, press and hold down 8TV until the
REMOTE MODE button lights (about 3 seconds).
2. Press the REMOTE MODE button or the button
from which you want to delete the command.
The REMOTE MODE button flashes twice.
When you press the REMOTE MODE button, all
commands learned in that mode will be deleted.
Controlling Other Components
3
Using Normal Macros
You can program the remote controller’s ACTIVITIES
to perform a sequence of remote control actions.
Example:
To play a CD you typically need to perform the
following actions:
1. Press RECEIVER to select the Receiver remote
controller mode.
2. Press 8RECEIVER to turn on the AV receiver.
3. Press TV/CD to select the TV/CD input source.
4. Press 1 to start playback on the CD player.
You can program ACTIVITIES so that all four actions
are performed with just one button press.
Making Macros
Each ACTIVITIES can store one macro, and each
macro can contain up to 32 commands.
ALL OFF
MY MOVIE,
MY TV,
MY MUSIC
RECEIVER
1
2
While holding down RECEIVER, press and
hold down MY MOVIE, MY TV, or MY MUSIC
until MY MOVIE, MY TV, or MY MUSIC lights
(about 3 seconds).
Press the buttons whose actions you want to
program into the macro in the order you want
them performed.
For the CD example above, you would press the
following buttons: 8RECEIVER, TV/CD, 1.
When you’ve finished, press ACTIVITIES
again.
ACTIVITIES button flashes twice.
If you enter 32 commands, the process will
finish automatically.
Note
• MODE cannot be operated during the macro-making
process.
• Once you assign new macro commands, the previously
registered macro will no longer work. If you wish to retrieve
it, you will have to reassign the commands with the macromaking.
Running Macros
1
Press MY MOVIE, MY TV, or MY MUSIC.
The commands in the macro are transmitted in
the order in which they were programmed. Keep
the remote controller pointed at the AV receiver
until all of the commands have been transmitted.
Macros can be run at any time, regardless of the
current remote controller mode.
Deleting Macros
1
2
While holding down HOME, press and hold
down ALL OFF until ALL OFF lights (about 3
seconds).
Press ALL OFF again.
ALL OFF flashes twice.
Note
• When Normal macros are deleted, ACTIVITIES are
restored to their default settings, namely the Easy macro
commands (➔ page 55).
• When using Normal macros, Easy macros cannot be used,
which includes changing the source components.
En-95
Appendix
Troubleshooting
If you have any trouble using the AV receiver, look for
a solution in this section. If you can’t resolve the issue
yourself, contact your Onkyo dealer.
The on-screen information appears only on a TV that
is connected to HDMI outputs.
■ There’s no sound, or it’s very quiet
Make sure that the digital input source is selected properly.
(➔ page 64)
Power
■ Can’t turn on the AV receiver
Make sure that the power cord is properly plugged into the
wall outlet.
Resetting the AV receiver
If you can’t resolve the issue yourself, try resetting the
AV receiver before contacting your Onkyo dealer.
To reset the AV receiver to its factory defaults, turn it
on and, while holding down CBL/SAT, press
8ON/STANDBY. “Clear” will appear on the AV
receiver’s display and the AV receiver will enter
standby mode.
Note that resetting the AV receiver will delete your
radio presets and custom settings.
Audio
Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, wait five
seconds or more, then plug it in again.
■ The AV receiver turns off unexpectedly
The AV receiver will automatically enter standby mode
when Auto Standby has been set and launches.
(➔ page 80)
■ The AV receiver turns off and after restoring the
power, it turns off again
The protection circuit has been activated. Remove the
power cord from the wall outlet immediately. Make sure
that all speaker cables and input sources are properly
connected, and leave the AV receiver with its power cord
disconnected for 1 hour. After that, reconnect the power
cord and turn the power on. If the AV receiver turns off
again, avoid resetting it and unplug the power cord. Then
contact your Onkyo dealer. (➔ page 17)
Caution:
• If “CHECK SP WIRE” appears on the AV receiver’s
display, the speaker cables may be shorting.
RECEIVER
WARNING:
• If smoke, smell or abnormal noise is produced by the AV
receiver, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet
immediately and contact your Onkyo dealer.
Make sure that all audio connecting plugs are pushed in all
the way (➔ page 19).
Make sure that the inputs and outputs of all components
are connected properly. (➔ pages 19 to 24)
Make sure that the polarity of the speaker cables is correct,
and that the bare wires are in contact with the metal part of
each speaker terminal. (➔ page 16)
Make sure that the input source is properly selected.
(➔ page 33)
Make sure that the speaker cables are not shorting.
(➔ page 17)
Check the volume. The AV receiver is designed for home
theater enjoyment. It has a wide volume range, allowing
precise adjustment.
If the MUTING indicator is flashing on the AV receiver’s
display, press the remote controller’s MUTING button to
unmute the AV receiver. (➔ page 54)
While a pair of headphones is connected to the PHONES
jack, no sound is output from the speakers. (➔ page 24)
If there’s no sound from a DVD player connected to an
HDMI IN, check the DVD player’s output settings, and be
sure to select a supported audio format.
Check the digital audio output setting on the connected
device. On some game consoles, such as those that
support DVD, the default setting is off.
With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an audio
output format from a menu.
If your turntable uses an MC cartridge, you must connect
an MC head amp, or an MC transformer.
Make sure that none of the connecting cables are bent,
twisted, or damaged.
HOME
Not all listening modes use all speakers. (➔ page 45)
To reset the remote controller to its factory defaults,
while holding down RECEIVER, press and hold down
HOME until RECEIVER lights (about 3 seconds).
Within 30 seconds, press RECEIVER again.
Specify the speaker distances and adjust the individual
speaker levels. (➔ page 66)
Make sure that the speaker setup microphone is not still
connected.
En-96
Appendix
If the input signal format is set to “PCM” or “DTS”. Set it to
“Off”. (➔ page 76)
■ Only the front speakers produce sound
When the Stereo or Mono listening mode is selected, only
the front speakers and subwoofer produce sound.
(➔ page 47)
In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers output
sound if the “Output Speaker” setting is set to “Left /
Right”. (➔ page 69)
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.
(➔ page 65)
■ Only the center speaker produces sound
If you use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, Dolby Pro Logic
IIx Music, or Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game listening mode with
a mono source, such as an AM radio station or mono TV
program, the sound is concentrated in the center speaker.
In the Mono listening mode, only the center speaker output
sound if the “Output Speaker” setting is set to “Center”.
(➔ page 69)
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.
(➔ page 65)
■ The surround speakers produce no sound
When the T-D (Theater-Dimensional), Stereo or Mono
listening mode is selected, the surround speakers produce
no sound.
Depending on the source and current listening mode, not
much sound may be produced by the surround speakers.
Try selecting another listening mode. (➔ page 45)
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.
(➔ page 65)
■ The center speaker produces no sound
■ The front high, front wide and surround back
speakers produce no sound
Depending on the current listening mode, no sound may be
produced by the front high, front wide and surround back
speakers. Select another listening mode. (➔ page 45)
Depending on the sources, the sound produced by the
front high, front wide and surround back speakers may be
weak.
■ The speaker volume cannot be set as required
Check to see if a maximum volume has been set.
(➔ page 77)
If the volume level of each individual speaker has been
adjusted to high positive values, then the maximum master
volume possible may be reduced. Note that the individual
speaker volume levels are set automatically after the
Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 Room Correction and Speaker
Setup has been performed. (➔ pages 28, 66, 67)
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.
(➔ page 65)
■ Noise can be heard
When Powered Zone 2 is used, playback in the main room
is reduced to 7.1 channels and the front wide speakers
produce no sound.
Using cable ties to bundle audio cables with power cords,
speaker cables, and the like may degrade the audio
performance, so refrain from doing it.
When Powered Zone 3 is used, playback in the main room
is reduced to 5.1 channels and the front high, front wide
and surround back speakers produce no sound.
An audio cable may be picking up interference. Try
repositioning your cables.
■ The subwoofer produces no sound
When you play source material that contains no information
in the LFE channel, the subwoofer produces no sound.
■ The Late Night function doesn’t work
Make sure the source material is Dolby Digital, Dolby
Digital Plus, and Dolby TrueHD. (➔ page 59)
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.
(➔ page 65)
Make sure that the “TrueHD Loudness Management”
setting is not set to “Off”. The Late Night function doesn’t
work when this setting is disabled. (➔ page 70)
■ There’s no sound with a certain signal format
■ About DTS signals
Check the digital audio output setting on the connected
device. On some game consoles, such as those that
support DVD, the default setting is off.
When DTS program material ends and the DTS bitstream
stops, the AV receiver remains in DTS listening mode and
the dts indicator remains on. This is to prevent noise when
you use the pause, fast forward, or fast reverse function on
your player. If you switch your player from DTS to PCM,
you may not hear any sound because the AV receiver does
not switch formats immediately. In such case, you should
stop your player for about three seconds and then resume
playback.
With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an audio
output format from a menu.
Depending on the input signal, some listening modes
cannot be selected. (➔ pages 45 to 52)
■ Can’t select the Pure Audio listening mode
The Pure Audio listening mode cannot be selected while
Zone 2/3 is on.
When the Stereo or Mono listening mode is selected, the
center speaker produces no sound.
■ Can’t get 6.1/7.1 playback
In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers output
sound if the “Output Speaker” setting is set to “Left /
Right”. (➔ page 69)
If no surround back speakers, front wide speakers and
front high speakers are connected, or the Zone 3 speakers
are being used, 6.1/7.1 playback is not possible.
With some CD and LD players, you won’t be able to
playback DTS material properly even though your player is
connected to a digital input on the AV receiver. This is
usually because the DTS bitstream has been processed
(e.g., output level, sampling rate, or frequency response
changed) and the AV receiver doesn’t recognize it as a
genuine DTS signal. In such cases, you may hear noise.
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.
(➔ page 65)
Depending on the number of connected speakers, it is not
always possible to select all of the listening modes.
(➔ pages 45 to 52)
Playing DTS program material, using the pause, fast
forward, or fast reverse function on your player may
produce a short audible noise. This is not a malfunction.
En-97
Appendix
■ The beginning of audio received by an HDMI IN
can’t be heard
■ There’s no picture from a source connected to
an HDMI IN
Make sure that the batteries are installed with the correct
polarity. (➔ page 13)
Since it takes longer to identify the format of an HDMI
signal than it does for other digital audio signals, audio
output may not start immediately.
Reliable operation with an HDMI-to-DVI adapter is not
guaranteed. In addition, video signals from a PC are not
guaranteed. (➔ page 107)
Install new batteries. Don’t mix different types of batteries,
or old and new batteries. (➔ page 13)
■ There’s no sound during Whole House Mode
When the resolution is set to any resolution not supported
by the TV, no video is output from the HDMI outputs.
(➔ page 63)
Make sure that the remote controller is not too far away
from the AV receiver, and that there’s no obstruction
between the remote controller and the AV receiver’s
remote control sensor. (➔ page 13)
If the message “Resolution Error” appears on the AV
receiver’s display, this indicates that your TV does not
support the current video resolution and you need to select
another resolution on your DVD player.
Make sure that the AV receiver is not subjected to direct
sunshine or inverter-type fluorescent lights. Relocate if
necessary.
Make sure you’ve selected an analog audio, NET or USB
input.
Video
■ There’s no picture
Make sure that all video connecting plugs are pushed in all
the way. (➔ page 22)
Make sure that each video component is properly
connected. (➔ page 19)
If your TV is connected to the HDMI output(s), select
“- - - - -” in the “HDMI Input” setting to watch composite
video, and component video sources. (➔ page 63)
If the video source is connected to a component video
input, you must assign that input to an input selector, and
your TV must be connected to either the HDMI output(s) or
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT. (➔ pages 19, 64)
If the video source is connected to a composite video input,
your TV must be connected to the HDMI output(s) or the
corresponding composite video output. (➔ page 19)
If the video source is connected to an HDMI input, you
must assign that input to an input selector, and your TV
must be connected to the HDMI output(s). (➔ pages 19,
63)
■ The on-screen menus don’t appear
On your TV, make sure that the video input to which the AV
receiver is connected is selected.
When the AV receiver is not connected to a TV via HDMI
OUT MAIN, on-screen menus are not displayed.
■ The on-screen information does not appear
Depending on the input signal, the on-screen information
may not appear when the input signal from HDMI IN is
output to a device connected to the HDMI output.
Tuner
If the AV receiver is installed in a rack or cabinet with
colored-glass doors, the remote controller may not work
reliably when the doors are closed.
Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote controller
mode. (➔ pages 12, 89)
When using the remote controller to control other
manufacturers’ AV components, some buttons may not
work as expected.
Make sure you’ve entered the correct remote control code.
(➔ page 87)
Make sure to set the same ID on both the AV receiver and
remote controller. (➔ page 82)
■ Can’t control other components
■ Reception is noisy, FM stereo reception is noisy,
or the FM STEREO indicator doesn’t light
Relocate your antenna.
Move the AV receiver away from your TV or computer.
Listen to the station in mono. (➔ page 42)
If it’s an Onkyo component, make sure that the u cable
and analog audio cable are connected properly.
Connecting only an u cable won’t be enough.
(➔ page 24)
Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote controller
mode. (➔ pages 12, 89)
While the Pure Audio listening mode is selected, the
analog video circuitry is turned off and only video signals
input through HDMI IN can be output. (➔ page 45)
When listening to an AM station, operating the remote
controller may cause noise.
On your TV, make sure that the video input to which the AV
receiver is connected is selected.
Concrete walls weaken radio signals.
If you’ve connected an cassette tape deck to the TV/CD IN
jack, or an RI Dock to the TV/CD IN or GAME 1 IN jacks,
for the remote controller to work properly, you must set the
input display appropriately. (➔ page 54)
If nothing improves the reception, install an outdoor
antenna.
If you cannot operate it, you will need to enter the
appropriate remote control code. (➔ page 87)
Remote Controller
To control another manufacturer’s component, point the
remote controller at that component. (➔ page 87)
When the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Both”, the “HDMI
Through” setting is only available for the HDMI OUT MAIN
jack. (➔ pages 62, 78)
Passing cars and airplanes can cause interference.
■ The remote controller doesn’t work
Before operating this unit, be sure to press RECEIVER.
En-98
To control an Onkyo component that’s connected via u,
point the remote controller at the AV receiver. Be sure to
enter the appropriate remote control code first.
(➔ page 88)
Appendix
To control an Onkyo component that’s not connected via
u, point the remote controller at the component. Be sure
to enter the appropriate remote control code first.
(➔ page 88)
Make sure you’ve selected the right remote mode.
(➔ page 93)
The entered remote control code may not be correct. If
more than one code is listed, try each one.
If you still can’t control your iPod/iPhone, start playback by
pressing your iPod/iPhone model’s Play button. Remote
operation should then be possible.
■ Can’t learn commands from another remote
controller
When learning commands, make sure that the transmitting
ends of both remote controllers are pointing at each other.
(➔ page 94)
Are you trying to learn from a remote controller that cannot
be used for learning? Some commands cannot be learned,
especially those that contain several instructions.
RI Dock for iPod/iPhone
■ There’s no sound
Make sure your iPod/iPhone is actually playing.
Make sure your iPod/iPhone is properly inserted in the
Dock.
Make sure the AV receiver is turned on, the correct input
source is selected, and the volume is turned up.
Make sure the plugs are pushed in all the way.
Try resetting your iPod/iPhone.
■ There’s no video
Make sure that your iPod/iPhone model’s TV OUT setting
is set to On.
Make sure the correct input is selected on your TV or the
AV receiver.
When you use the AV receiver’s remote controller, point it
toward your AV receiver.
Try resetting your iPod/iPhone.
Depending on your iPod/iPhone, some buttons may not
work as expected.
■ The AV receiver unexpectedly selects my
iPod/iPhone as the input source
Always pause iPod/iPhone playback before selecting a
different input source. If playback is not paused, the Direct
Change function may select your iPod/iPhone as the input
source by mistake during the transition between tracks.
■ iPod/iPhone doesn’t work properly
Try reconnecting your iPod/iPhone.
Cannot receive radio wave due to a bad connection.
Shorten the distance from wireless LAN access point or
remove obstacles for a good visibility, and try again. Place
the AV receiver away from microwave ovens or other
access points.
2.4 GHz band for wireless LAN may not be enough.
Connect the ETHERNET port and router with the Ethernet
cable after selecting “Wired” in “Network Connection”
setting in “Network”. (➔ pages 20, 80)
Place the AV receiver away from the devices emitting
electromagnetic waves on the 2.4 GHz band (microwave
ovens, game consoles, etc.). If this does not solve the
problem, stop using other devices which emit
electromagnetic waves.
When other wireless LAN devices are used near the AV
receiver, several issues such as interrupted playback and
communication may occur. You can avoid these issues by
changing the channel of your Wi-Fi router. For instructions
on changing channels, see the instruction manual provided
with your Wi-Fi router.
If there is a metallic object near the AV receiver, wireless
LAN connection may not be possible as the metal can
effect on the radio wave.
Zone 2/3
■ There’s no sound
Audio can be output only when analog, NET, USB or HDMI
(2ch PCM) input source is selected in Zone 2.
Audio can be output only when analog, NET or USB input
source is selected in Zone 3.
■ The Zone 2/3 speakers produce no sound
To use the Zone 2 speakers, you must set the “Powered
Zone 2” setting to “Yes”. (➔ page 65)
Some versions of the iPod/iPhone do not output video.
To use the Zone 3 speakers, you must set the “Powered
Zone 3” setting to “Yes”. (➔ page 65)
■ The AV receiver’s remote controller doesn’t
control my iPod/iPhone
Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Network
Make sure your iPod/iPhone is properly inserted in the
Dock. If your iPod/iPhone is in a case, it may not connect
properly to the Dock. Always remove your iPod/iPhone
from the case before inserting it into the Dock.
■ Cannot access to Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) network
or Sound playback is interrupted and
communication doesn’t work
The iPod/iPhone cannot be operated while it’s displaying
the Apple logo.
The setting of SSID and encryption (WEP, etc.) is not
correct. Make the same settings for network and the AV
receiver.
En-99
If there is more than one access point in the network,
separate each access point.
It is recommended to place the Wi-Fi router (access point)
and the AV receiver in the same room.
Bluetooth
■ Music playback is unavailable on the AV
receiver even after successful Bluetooth
connection
Depending on the characteristics or specifications of your
Bluetooth-enabled device, playback on the AV receiver is
not guaranteed.
■ The audio quality is poor after connection with a
Bluetooth-enabled device
The Bluetooth reception is poor. Move the Bluetoothenabled device closer to the AV receiver or remove any
obstacle between the Bluetooth-enabled device and the AV
receiver.
Appendix
■ Cannot connect with the AV receiver
The Bluetooth-enabled device does not support the profiles
required for the AV receiver.
The Bluetooth function of the Bluetooth-enabled device is
not enabled. Refer to the instruction manual of the
Bluetooth-enabled device for how to enable the function.
If the server is serving large music files to several
networked devices simultaneously, the network may
become overloaded and playback may be interrupted.
Reduce the number of playback devices on the network,
upgrade your network, or use a switch instead of a hub.
If an MHL-enabled mobile device connected to the AUX
(front) input is charged, the power consumption in standby
mode will increase than the figure above. (➔ page 20)
■ The sound changes when I connect my
headphones
■ Bluetooth connection cannot be built
■ Can’t connect to the AV receiver from a Web
browser
When building a Bluetooth connection between the AV
receiver and your Bluetooth-enabled device for the first
time, if the connection is fail, you need to power off your
Bluetooth-enabled device and power on again to clear the
device name, and build the connection again.
If you’re using DHCP, your router may not always allocate
the same IP address to the AV receiver, so if you find that
you can’t connect to a server or Internet radio station,
recheck the AV receiver’s IP address on the “Network”
screen. (➔ page 80)
If there is metallic object near the AV receiver, Bluetooth
connection may not be possible as the metal can effect on
the radio wave.
Check the “Network” settings. (➔ page 80)
■ The display doesn’t work
USB Device Playback
The display is turned off when the Pure Audio listening
mode is selected.
If the wireless LAN and Bluetooth connections are used at
the same time, try to connect the ETHERNET port and
router with the Ethernet cable after selecting “Wired” in
“Network Connection” setting in “Network” for a better
connection. (➔ pages 20, 80)
Music Server and Internet Radio
■ Can’t access the server or Internet radio
Certain network service or contents available through this
device may not be accessible in case the service provider
terminates its service.
Check the network connection between the AV receiver
and your router or switch. (➔ page 20)
Make sure that your modem and router are properly
connected, and make sure they are both turned on.
Make sure the server is up and running and compatible
with the AV receiver. (➔ page 108)
Check the “Network”settings. (➔ page 80)
■ Playback stops while listening to music files on
the server
Make sure your server is compatible with the AV receiver.
(➔ page 108)
If you download or copy large files on your computer,
playback may be interrupted. Try closing any unused
programs, use a more powerful computer, or use a
dedicated server.
■ Can’t access the music files on a USB device
Make sure the USB device is plugged in properly.
The AV receiver supports USB devices that support the
USB mass storage device class. However, playback may
not be possible with some USB devices even if they
conform to the USB mass storage device class.
(➔ page 108)
Depending on the type of format, the playback from a USB
device may not be performed normally. Check the type of
the file formats that is supported. (➔ page 109)
USB memory devices with security functions cannot be
played.
Others
■ Standby power consumption
In the following cases, the power consumption in standby
mode may reach up to a maximum of 9.0 W:
– The “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” setting is set to “On”.
(Depending on the TV status, the AV receiver will enter
standby mode as usual.)
– The “HDMI Through” setting is set to other than “Off”.
– The “Network Standby” setting is set to “On”.
(➔ pages 78, 81)
En-100
When a pair of headphones is connected, the listening
mode is set to Stereo, unless it’s already set to Stereo,
Mono, Direct, or Pure Audio.
■ The speaker distance cannot be set as required
The values entered may be automatically adjusted with
values best-suited for your home theater.
■ How do I change the language of a multiplex
source
Use the “Multiplex” setting in the “Audio Adjust” menu to
select “Main” or “Sub”. (➔ page 69)
■ The u functions don’t work
To use u, you must make an u connection and an
analog audio connection (RCA) between the component
and AV receiver, even if they are connected digitally.
(➔ page 24)
While Zone 2/3 is selected, the u functions don’t work.
(➔ page 24)
■ The functions System On/Auto Power On and
Direct Change don’t work for components
connected via u
These functions don’t work when Zone 2/3 is turned on.
(➔ page 24)
■ When performing Automatic Speaker Setup, the
measurement fails and the message “Ambient
noise is too high.” is displayed.
This can be caused by a malfunction in your speaker unit.
Check if the unit produces normal sounds.
Appendix
■ The following settings can be made for the
composite video inputs
You must use the buttons on the unit to make these
settings.
On the AV receiver, press the input selector for the
input source that you want to set and the HOME
button simultaneously. While holding down the input
selector button, press HOME until “Video ATT :On”
appears on the AV receiver’s display. Then, release
both buttons. To turn the setting off, repeat the above
process so that “Video ATT :Off” appears on the AV
receiver’s display, and release the buttons.
• Video Attenuation
This setting can be made for the BD/DVD,
CBL/SAT, STB/DVR, GAME 1 or AUX input.
If you have a game console connected to the
composite video input, and the picture isn’t very
clear, you can attenuate the gain.
Video ATT :Off: The gain is not changed (default).
Video ATT :On: The gain is reduced by the values
specified below.
– 2 dB for the HDMI output.
– 6 dB for the MONITOR OUT V output.
■ If the picture on your TV/monitor connected to
the HDMI output(s) is unstable, try switching the
DeepColor function off
To turn off the DeepColor function, simultaneously
press the STB/DVR and 8ON/STANDBY buttons on
the AV receiver. While holding down STB/DVR, press
8ON/STANDBY until “Deep Color:Off” appears on
the AV receiver’s display. Then, release both buttons.
To reactivate the DeepColor function, repeat the
above process until “Deep Color:On” appears on the
AV receiver’s display and release the buttons.
Radio Wave Caution
The AV receiver uses a 2.4 GHz radio wave
frequency, which is a band used by other wireless
systems as 1 and 2 described below.
1. Devices which use a 2.4 GHz radio wave
frequency
• Cordless phones
• Cordless facsimiles
• Microwave ovens
• Wireless LAN devices (IEEE802.11b/g/n)
• Wireless AV equipment
• Wireless controllers for game systems
• Microwave oven-based health aids
• Video transmitter
• Specific type of external monitor and LCD
display
2. Less common devices which use a 2.4 GHz
radio wave frequency
• Anti-theft systems
• Amateur radio stations (HAM)
• Warehouse logistic management systems
• Discrimination systems for train or emergency
vehicles
If these devices and the AV receiver are used at the
same time, the audio may be undesirably stopped or
disturbed due to a radio wave interference.
Suggestions for improvement
• Switch off the devices which emit the radio
wave.
• Place the interfering devices away from the AV
receiver.
• The AV receiver uses radio wave, and a third
person can receive the wave on purpose or
accidentally. Do not use the communication for
important or fatal matters.
En-101
• We assume no responsibility whatsoever for any
error or damage of network environment or access
device resulting from the use of this apparatus.
Confirm with the provider or access device maker
for more information.
Scope of Operation
Use of the AV receiver is limited to home use.
(Transmission distances may be reduced depending
on communication environment.)
In the following locations, poor condition or
inability to receive radio waves may cause the
audio to be interrupted or stopped:
• In reinforced concrete buildings or steel framed or
iron framed buildings.
• Near large metallic furniture.
• In a crowd of people or near a building or obstacle.
• In a location exposed to the magnetic field, static
electricity or radio wave interference from radio
communication equipment using the same
frequency band (2.4 GHz) as the AV receiver, such
as a 2.4 GHz wireless LAN device
(IEEE802.11b/g/n) or microwave oven.
• If you live in a heavily populated residential area
(apartment, townhouse, etc.) and if your neighbor’s
microwave oven is placed near your AV receiver,
you may experience radio wave interference. If this
occurs, move your AV receiver to a different place.
When the microwave oven is not in use, there will be
no radio wave interference.
Appendix
Radio Wave Reflections
The radio waves received by the AV receiver include
the radio wave coming directly from the devices and
waves coming from various directions due to
reflections by walls, furniture and building (reflected
waves). The reflected waves (due to obstacles and
reflecting objects) further produce a variety of
reflected waves as well as variation in reception
condition depending on locations. If the audio cannot
be received properly due to this phenomenon, try
moving the location of the wireless LAN device a little.
Also note that audio may be interrupted due to the
reflected waves when a person crosses or
approaches the space between the AV receiver and
the wireless LAN device.
• We assume no responsibility whatsoever for any
damages resulting from the use of this apparatus
except in the cases deemed acceptable under the
applicable laws and regulations.
• Operation in all environment is not guaranteed for
wireless LAN. The communication may not be
possible or have desirable communication speed.
Precautions
■ Electronic device which requires cautions
Hearing aid, pace maker, other medical electronic
devices, fire alarm, automatic door, and other
automatic control device.
When using a pace maker or other medical electronic
devices, confirm with the medical electronic device
maker or dealer for the effect of the radio wave.
The AV receiver contains a microcomputer for
signal processing and control functions. In very rare
situations, severe interference, noise from an
external source, or static electricity may cause it to
lockup. In the unlikely event that this happens,
unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, wait at
least five seconds, and then plug it back in.
Onkyo is not responsible for damages (such as CD
rental fees) due to unsuccessful recordings caused
by the unit’s malfunction. Before you record
important data, make sure that the material will be
recorded correctly.
Before disconnecting the power cord from the wall
outlet, set the AV receiver to standby.
• Do not use this apparatus near an electronic device
handling high-accuracy controls or weak signals.
Doing so may cause an accident due to a
malfunction of the device.
• Do not use this apparatus in use prohibited location
such as an aircraft equipment or a hospital. Doing
so may cause an accident due to a malfunction of
an electronic device or an electro-medical
apparatus. Follow the instructions of the medical
facilities.
En-102
Appendix
DISCLAIMER
Through this device you are able to link to other services or websites which are not under the
control of any company which has designed, manufactured or distributed/have distributed this
device, and its affiliates (collectively, “Company”). We have no control over the nature, content
and availability of those services. The inclusion of any links does not necessarily imply a
recommendation or endorse the views expressed within them.
All information, content and services available through this device belong to third parties and
are protected by copyright, patent, trademark and/or other intellectual property laws of
applicable countries. The information, content and services provided through this device are
for your personal, noncommercial use only. Any information, content or services may not be
used in any manner other than previously approved by the appropriate content owner or
service provider.
You may not modify, copy, republish, translate, exploit, create derivative works, upload, post,
transmit, sell or distribute in any manner any information, content or services available
through this device, unless expressly permitted by the appropriate copyright, patent,
trademark and/or other intellectual property owner, including, without limitation, content owner
or service provider.
THE CONTENT AND SERVICES AVAILABLE THROUGH THIS DEVICE ARE PROVIDED
“AS IS”. COMPANY DOES NOT WARRANT INFORMATION, CONTENT OR SERVICES SO
PROVIDED, EITHER EXPRESSLY OR IMPLIEDLY, FOR ANY PURPOSE.
COMPANY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT,
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Company makes no representation or warranty of any kind, express or implied, about the
completeness, accuracy, validity, legality, reliability, suitability or availability with respect to
the information, content or services available through this device. Company shall not be liable,
whether in contract or tort, including negligence and strict liability, for any direct, indirect,
special, incidental or consequential damages or any other damages arising out of, or in
connection with, any information contained in, or as a result of the use of any content or
service by you or any third party, even if Company has been advised of the possibility of such
damages, nor shall Company be liable for any third party claims against users of this device
or any third party.
In no event shall Company be responsible nor liable for, without limiting the generality of the
foregoing, any interruption or suspension of any information, content or service available
through this device. Company is neither responsible nor liable for customer service related to
the information, content and services available through this device.
Any question or request for service relating to the information, content or services should be
made directly to the appropriate content owners and services providers.
Video Resolution Chart
The following tables show how video signals at different resolutions are output by
the AV receiver.
✔: Output available
Output
HDMI
Component
Composite
PC IN (Analog
HDMI
4K*1
Input
1080p/24
1080p
1080i
720p
480p/576p
480i/576i
4K
✔*2
1080p/24
✔
1080p
✔
✔*2
1080i
✔
✔
✔*2
720p
✔
✔
✔
✔*2
480p/576p
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔*2
480i/576i
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
1080p
✔
✔*2
1080i
✔
✔
✔*2
✔
720p
✔
✔
✔
✔*2
480p/576p
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔*2
480i/576i
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔*2
✔
480i/576i
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔*2
✔
✔*5
✔*2
RGB)*3*4
Output
✔
✔
✔
✔
720p
480p/576p
480i/576i
Component
✔*2
Composite
s
1080p
Input
HDMI
1080i
480i/576i
4K
1080p/24
1080p
1080i
720p
480p/576p
480i/576i
Component
1080p
1080i
720p
480p/576p
480i/576i
Composite
480i/576i
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
PC IN (Analog RGB)*3*4
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
En-103
Supported resolutions: [3840 × 2160 30 Hz], [3840 × 2160 25 Hz], [3840 × 2160 24 Hz],
[4096 × 2160 24 Hz]
Supported resolutions for HDMI OUT SUB.
Available resolutions: [640 × 480 60 Hz], [800 × 600 60 Hz], [1024 × 768 60 Hz],
[1280 × 1024 60 Hz], 480p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p
The resolution below is output at the same resolution and with no conversion:
[640 × 480 60 Hz], [800 × 600 60 Hz], [1024 × 768 Hz], [1280 × 1024 60 Hz]
When video signals of personal computers connected to PC IN are output from HDMI
OUT SUB, they may not display properly on some TVs.
576p output is not supported.
Appendix
Firmware Update
To update the firmware of the AV receiver, you can
choose from the following two methods: update via
network, or update via USB storage. Choose the one
that best suits your environment. Before proceeding
with the update, please read the corresponding
explanations carefully.
■ Update via network
You need a Internet connection to update the
firmware.
■ Update via USB storage (➔ page 105)
Please prepare a USB storage device such as a USB
flash memory stick. You need at least 50 MB of
available space to update the firmware.
Limitation of liability
The program and accompanying online
documentation are furnished to you for use at your
own risk. Onkyo will not be liable and you will have
no remedy for damages for any claim of any kind
whatsoever concerning your use of the program or
the accompanying online documentation,
regardless of legal theory, and whether arising in
tort or contract. In no event will Onkyo be liable to
you or any third party for any special, indirect,
incidental, or consequential damages of any kind,
including, but not limited to, compensation,
reimbursement or damages on account of the loss
of present or prospective profits, loss of data, or for
any other reason whatsoever.
See the Onkyo web site for latest information.
Before Starting
• Set the “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” setting to “Off”
(➔ page 78).
• Turn off the controller device connected via RS232
and network.
• Turn off Multi Zone if this function is present.
• Stop playback of contents from Internet Radio, USB
or servers, etc.
Update Procedure
1
Press RECEIVER followed by HOME on the
remote controller.
The Home menu appears on the TV screen.
2
Select “Firmware Update” and press ENTER.
Note that the “Firmware Update” option will be
grayed out for a short while after the AV receiver
is turned on. Please wait until it becomes
operable.
3
Select “Update via NET” and press ENTER.
Note that this option will not be available if there
is no firmware file newer than the currently
installed version. If the AV receiver is not
connected to the internet, “Update via NET” is
not displayed.
4
Select “Update” and press ENTER.
The update process will begin.
During the update process, the on-screen display
may disappear depending on the updated
program. When this occurs, you can still view the
update progress on the AV receiver’s display.
The on-screen display will reappear after the
update is complete, and upon turning the AV
receiver off and on again.
5
The message “Completed!” appears on the AV
receiver’s display, indicating that the update
has been completed.
Note
• Check the network connection before updating.
• Do not touch any cable or device connected to the AV
receiver during the update process.
• Do not attempt to access the AV receiver from your PC
while it is being updated.
• Do not shutdown the power of the AV receiver while it is
being updated.
• The storage media in the USB card reader may not work.
• If the USB device is partitioned, each section will be treated
as an independent device.
• If the USB device contains a lot of data, the AV receiver
may take a while to read it.
• Operation is not guaranteed for all USB devices, which
includes the ability to power them.
• Onkyo takes no responsibility whatsoever for the loss or
damage of data resulting from the use of a USB device with
the AV receiver. Onkyo recommends that you back up your
important music files beforehand.
• If you connect a USB hard disk drive to the USB port,
Onkyo recommends that you use its AC adapter to power it.
• USB hubs and USB devices with hub functions are not
supported. Do not connect your USB device via a USB hub.
• USB devices with security functions are not supported.
Updating the Firmware via Network
The AV receiver allows you to update the firmware using
network connection.
Note
• Make sure your AV receiver and TV are turned on and the
AV receiver is connected to the Internet.
• Never unplug or turn off the AV receiver while it is being
updated.
• Never plug or unplug an HDMI or Ethernet cable during the
update process.
• Do not attempt to access the AV receiver from your PC
while it is being updated.
• Never unplug the power cord during the update process.
• It takes up to 20 minutes to complete the firmware update.
• The AV receiver will retain all your settings after the update
is finished.
En-104
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
Appendix
6
Press 8ON/STANDBY on the front panel.
The AV receiver will enter standby mode.
Do not use 8RECEIVER on the remote
controller.
The AV receiver will enter standby mode
automatically in 3 minutes regardless of whether
8ON/STANDBY is pressed.
Congratulations! You now have the latest
firmware installed on your Onkyo AV receiver.
Troubleshooting
Case 1:
If an error occurs, “Error!! *-**” is displayed on the AV
receiver’s display. (Alpha-numeric characters on the
front display are denoted by asterisks.) Refer to the
following table and take appropriate action.
■ Errors during an update via network
Error Code
Description
*-01, *-10
The Ethernet cable was not detected.
Reconnect the cable properly.
*-02, *-03,
Internet connection error.
Check the following items:
• Make sure the IP address, subnet mask,
gateway address, and DNS server are
configured properly.
• Make sure the router is turned on.
• Make sure the AV receiver and the router
are connected with an Ethernet cable.
• Make sure your router is configured
properly. See the instruction manual of
the router.
• If your network allows only one client
connection and there is any other device
already connected, the AV receiver will
not be able to access the network.
Consult your Internet Service Provider
(ISP).
• If your modem does not function as a
router, you will need a router. Depending
on your network, you may need to
configure the proxy server if necessary.
See the document provided by your ISP.
If you are still unable to access the
Internet, the DNS or proxy server may be
temporarily down. Contact your ISP.
*-04, *-05,
*-06, *-11,
*-13, *-14,
*-16, *-17,
*-18, *-20,
*-21
Others
Retry the update procedure from the
beginning. If the error persists, please
contact Onkyo Support and provide the
error code.
En-105
Case 2:
If an error occurs during the update process,
disconnect then reconnect the AC power cord and try
again.
Case 3:
If you do not have an Internet connection to the
network, please contact Onkyo Support.
Updating the Firmware via USB
The AV receiver allows you to update the firmware
using a USB device.
Note
• Never unplug or turn off the AV receiver during the update
process.
• Never plug or unplug an HDMI cable or a USB device
during the update process.
• Never unplug the USB storage device containing the
firmware file or the AC power cord during the update
process.
• Do not attempt to access the AV receiver from your PC
while it is being updated.
• It takes up to 20 minutes to complete the firmware update.
• The AV receiver will retain all your settings after the update
is finished.
Before Starting
• Set the “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” setting to “Off”
(➔ page 78).
• Turn off the controller device connected via RS232
and network.
• Turn off Multi Zone if this function is present.
• Stop playback of contents from Internet Radio, USB
or servers, etc.
• If there is any data in the USB device, remove it first.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
Appendix
Update Procedure
1
Connect a USB device to your PC. If there is
any data in the USB device, remove it first.
2
Download the firmware file from the Onkyo
web site. The file name is as follows:
ONKAVR****_************.zip
10
Unzip the downloaded file. The numbers of
folders and files differ according to the model.
3
Copy all the extracted folders including all
folders and files to the root folder of the USB
device. Be careful not to copy the zip file.
4
Remove the USB device from your PC and
connect it to the USB port on the AV receiver.
5
Make sure the AV receiver and TV are turned
on.
If the AV receiver is in standby mode, press
8ON/STANDBY on the AV receiver to light up
the front display.
6
Select the USB input source.
“Now Initializing...” appears on the AV receiver’s
display and then the name of the USB device is
displayed. It takes 20 to 30 seconds to recognize
the USB device.
7
Press RECEIVER followed by HOME on the
remote controller.
The Home menu appears on the TV screen.
8
Select “Firmware Update” and press ENTER.
9
Select “Update via USB” and press ENTER.
Note that this option will not be available if there
is no firmware file newer than the currently
installed version. If the AV receiver is not
connected to the internet, “Update via USB” is
not displayed.
11
12
Select “Update” and press ENTER.
The update process will begin.
During the update process, the on-screen display
may disappear depending on the updated
program. When this occurs, you can still view the
update progress on the AV receiver’s display.
The on-screen display will reappear after the
update is complete, and upon turning the AV
receiver off and on again.
Do not turn off the AV receiver and do not
remove the USB device during the update
process.
Troubleshooting
Case 1:
If an error occurs, “Error!! *-**” is displayed on the AV
receiver’s display. (Alpha-numeric characters on the
front display are denoted by asterisks.) Refer to the
following table and take appropriate action.
■ Errors during an update via USB
Error Code
Description
*-01, *-10
The message “Completed!” appears on the AV
receiver’s display, indicating that the update
has been completed.
Remove the USB device.
The USB device was not detected. Make
sure the USB flash memory or USB cable is
properly connected to the USB port. If the
USB storage device has its own power
supply, use it to power the USB device.
*-05, *-13,
Press 8ON/STANDBY on the front panel.
The AV receiver will enter standby mode.
Do not use 8RECEIVER on the remote
controller.
The AV receiver will enter standby mode
automatically in 3 minutes regardless of whether
8ON/STANDBY is pressed.
Congratulations! You now have the latest
firmware installed on your Onkyo AV receiver.
The firmware file was not found in the root
folder of the USB device, or the firmware
file is for another model. Retry and
download the file on the support page of
the web site, following the on-site
instructions. If the error persists, please
contact Onkyo Support and provide the
error code.
Others
En-106
*-20, *-21
Retry the update procedure from the
beginning. If the error persists, please
contact Onkyo Support and provide the
error code.
Case 2:
If an error occurs during the update process,
disconnect then reconnect the AC power cord and try
again.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
Appendix
About HDMI
Designed to meet the increased demands of digital
TV, HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) is a
new digital interface standard for connecting TVs,
projectors, Blu-ray Disc/DVD players, set-top boxes,
and other video components. Until now, several
separate video and audio cables have been required
to connect AV components. With HDMI, a single
cable can carry control signals, digital video, and up
to eight channels of digital audio (2-channel PCM,
multichannel digital audio, and multichannel PCM).
The HDMI video stream (i.e., video signal) is
compatible with DVI (Digital Visual Interface)*1, so
TVs and displays with a DVI input can be connected
by using an HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable. (This may
not work with some TVs and displays, resulting in no
picture.)
The AV receiver uses HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital
Content Protection)*2, so only HDCP-compatible
components can display the picture.
Supported Audio Formats
• 2-channel linear PCM (32–192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit)
• Multichannel linear PCM (up to 7.1 ch, 32–192 kHz,
16/20/24 bit)
• Bitstream (DSD, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus,
Dolby TrueHD, DTS, DTS-HD High Resolution
Audio, DTS-HD Master Audio)
Your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player must also support
HDMI output of the above audio formats.
About Copyright Protection
The AV receiver supports HDCP (High-bandwidth
Digital Content Protection)*2, a copy-protection
system for digital video signals. Other devices
connected to the AV receiver via HDMI must also
support HDCP.
*1
*2
*3
The AV receiver’s HDMI interface is based on the
following:
Audio Return Channel, 3D, x.v.Color, DeepColor, Lip
Sync, 4K (up-scaling and Passthrough), DTS-HD
Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, Dolby
TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DSD and Multichannel
PCM.
DVI (Digital Visual Interface): The digital display interface
standard set by the DDWG*3 in 1999.
HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection): The
video encryption technology developed by Intel for
HDMI/DVI. It’s designed to protect video content and
requires a HDCP-compatible device to display the
encrypted video.
DDWG (Digital Display Working Group): Lead by Intel,
Compaq, Fujitsu, Hewlett Packard, IBM, NEC, and
Silicon Image, this open industry group’s objective is to
address the industry’s requirements for a digital
connectivity specification for high-performance PCs and
digital displays.
Note
• The HDMI video stream is compatible with DVI (Digital
Visual Interface), so TVs and displays with a DVI input can
be connected by using an HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable.
(Note that DVI connections only carry video, so you’ll need
to make a separate connection for audio.) However,
reliable operation with such an adapter is not guaranteed.
In addition, video signals from a PC are not supported.
• The HDMI audio signal (sampling rate, bit length, etc.) may
be restricted by the connected source component. If the
picture is poor or there’s no sound from a component
connected via HDMI, check its setup. Refer to the
connected component’s instruction manual for details.
En-107
Appendix
Network/USB Features
Network Requirements
■ Ethernet Network
For the best results, a 100Base-TX switched Ethernet
network is recommended. Although it’s possible to
play music on a computer that’s connected to the
network wirelessly, playback may be unreliable, so it
is recommended to use wired connections.
■ Ethernet Router
A router manages the network, data-routing and
supplying of IP addresses. Your router must support
the following:
• NAT (Network Address Translation). NAT allows
several networked computers to access the Internet
simultaneously via a single Internet connection. The
AV receiver needs Internet access for Internet radio.
• DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol).
DHCP supplies IP addresses to the network
devices, allowing them to configure themselves
automatically.
• A router with a built-in 100Base-TX switch is
recommended.
Some routers have a built-in modem, and some
Internet Service Providers (ISP) require you to use
specific routers. Please consult your ISP or computer
dealer if you’re unsure.
■ CAT5 Ethernet cable
Use a shielded CAT5 Ethernet cable (straight-type) to
connect the AV receiver to your home network.
■ Internet Access (for Internet radio)
To receive Internet radio, your Ethernet network must
have Internet access. A narrowband Internet
connection (e.g., 56K modem, ISDN) will not provide
satisfactory results, so a broadband connection is
strongly recommended (e.g., cable modem, xDSL
modem, etc.). Please consult your ISP or computer
dealer if you’re unsure.
Note
• To receive Internet radio with the AV receiver, your
broadband Internet connection must be working and able to
access the Web. Consult your ISP if you have any problems
with your Internet connection.
• The AV receiver uses DHCP to configure its network
settings automatically. If you want to configure these
settings manually, see “Network” (➔ page 80).
• The AV receiver does not support PPPoE settings, so if you
have a PPPoE-type Internet connection, you must use a
PPPoE-compatible router.
• Depending on your ISP, you may need to specify a proxy
server to use Internet radio. If your computer is configured
to use a proxy server, use the same settings for the AV
receiver (➔ page 81).
Server Requirements
■ Server playback
The AV receiver can play digital music files stored on
a computer or media server and supports the
following technologies:
• Windows Media Player 11
• Windows Media Player 12
• DLNA-certified media server
• The computer or media server must be on the same
network as the AV receiver.
• Up to 20,000 folders can be displayed, and folders
may be nested up to 16 levels deep.
Note
• Depending on the media server, the AV receiver may not
recognize it, or may not be able to play its music files.
■ Remote playback
• Windows Media Player 12
• DLNA-certified (within DLNA Interoperability
Guidelines version 1.5) media server or controller
device.
En-108
The setting varies depending on the media server or
controller devices. Refer to your devices’ instruction
manual for details.
If the operating system of your personal computer is
Windows 8/Windows 7, Windows Media Player 12 is
already installed. For more information, see the
Microsoft web site.
USB Device Requirements
• USB mass storage device class (but not always
guaranteed).
• FAT16 or FAT32 file system format.
• If the storage device has been partitioned, each
section will be treated as an independent device.
• Up to 20,000 folders can be displayed, and folders
may be nested up to 16 levels deep.
• USB hubs and USB devices with hub functions are
not supported.
Note
• If the media you connect is not supported, the message “No
Storage” will be displayed.
• If you connect a USB hard disk drive to the AV receiver’s
USB port, we recommend that you use its AC adapter to
power it.
• The AV receiver supports USB MP3 players that support
the USB Mass Storage Class standard, which allows USB
devices to be connected to computers without the need for
special drivers or software. Note that not all USB MP3
players support the USB Mass Storage Class standard.
Refer to your USB MP3 player’s instruction manual for
details.
• Protected WMA music files on an MP3 player cannot be
played.
• Onkyo accepts no responsibility whatsoever for the loss or
damage to data stored on a USB device when that device
is used with the AV receiver. We recommend that you back
up your important music files beforehand.
• MP3 players containing music files that are managed with
special music software are not supported.
Appendix
• Operation is not guaranteed for all USB devices, which
includes the ability to power them.
• Do not connect your USB device via a USB hub. The USB
device must be connected directly to the AV receiver’s USB
port.
• If the USB device contains a lot of data, the AV receiver
make take a while to read it.
• USB devices with security functions cannot be played.
Supported Audio File Formats
The AV receiver does not support playback of video
files.
For server playback and playback from a USB device,
the AV receiver supports the following music file
formats.
Variable bit-rate (VBR) files are supported. However,
playback times may not display correctly.
Note
• With remote playback, the AV receiver does not support the
following music file formats: FLAC, Ogg Vorbis, DSD and
Dolby TrueHD.
• In the case of server playback, the following file formats
may not be played depending on the server type.
■ MP3 (.mp3 or .MP3)
• MP3 files must be MPEG-1/MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3
format with sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz,
12 kHz, 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz,
44.1 kHz, 48 kHz and bitrates of between 8 kbps
and 320 kbps. Incompatible files cannot be played.
■ WMA (.wma or .WMA)
WMA stands for Windows Media Audio and is an
audio compression technology developed by
Microsoft Corporation. Audio can be encoded in WMA
format by using Windows Media® Player.
• WMA files must have the copyright option turned off.
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
48 kHz, bitrates of between 5 kbps and 320 kbps,
and WMA DRM are supported.
• WMA Pro/Voice formats are not supported.
■ WMA Lossless (.wma or .WMA)
• Sampling rates of 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz,
96 kHz are supported.
• Quantization bit: 16 bit, 24 bit
■ WAV (.wav or .WAV)
WAV files contain uncompressed PCM digital audio.
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, 176.4 kHz and
192 kHz are supported.
• Quantization bit: 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit
*
For playback from a USB device, sampling rates of
176.4 kHz and 192 kHz are not supported.
■ AAC
(.aac/.m4a/.mp4/.3gp/.3g2/.AAC/.M4A/.MP4/
.3GP or .3G2)
AAC stands for MPEG-2/MPEG-4 Audio.
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz and bitrates of
between 8 kbps and 320 kbps are supported.
■ FLAC (.flac or .FLAC)
FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data
compression.
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, 176.4 kHz and
192 kHz are supported.
• Quantization bit: 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit
■ Ogg Vorbis (.ogg or .OGG)
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
48 kHz and bitrates of between 48 kbps and
En-109
500 kbps are supported. Incompatible files cannot
be played.
■ LPCM (Linear PCM)
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz and 96 kHz are
supported.
• Quantization bit: 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit
*
Only for playback via network.
■ Apple Lossless (.m4a/.mp4/.M4A/.MP4)
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz and 96 kHz are
supported.
• Quantization bit: 16 bit, 24 bit
■ DSD (.dsf or .DSF)
• The sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz is supported.
■ Dolby TrueHD (.vr/.mlp/.VR/.MLP)
• Sampling rates of 48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz,
96 kHz, 176.4 kHz and 192 kHz are supported.
*
For playback from a USB device, sampling rates only of
48 kHz and 64 kHz are supported.
About DLNA
The Digital Living Network Alliance is an international,
cross-industry collaboration. Members of DLNA
develop a concept of wired and wireless interoperable
networks where digital content such as photos,
music, and videos can be shared through consumer
electronics, personal computers, and mobile devices
in and beyond the home. The AV receiver complies
with the DLNA Interoperability Guidelines version 1.5.
Appendix
License and Trademark
Information
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
Manufactured under a license from U.S. Patent No’s:
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535; 6,226,616;
7,212,872; 7,272,567; 7,668,723; 7,392,195; 7,930,184;
7,333,929; 7,548,853; 7,003,467 and 7,283,634. DTS, the
Symbol, and DTS and the Symbol together are registered
trademarks & DTS Neo:X | 11.1 is a trademark of DTS, Inc.
©2012 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby, Pro Logic, Surround EX and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Music Optimizer™ and “WRAT” are trademarks of Onkyo
Corporation.
THX and the THX logo are trademarks of THX Ltd. which
are registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.
THX Select2 Plus
Before any home theater component can be THX Select2
Plus certified, it must pass a rigorous series of quality and
performance tests. Only then can a product feature the
THX Select2 Plus logo, which is your guarantee that the
Home Theater products you purchase will give you superb
performance for many years to come. THX Select2 Plus
requirements define hundreds of parameters, including
power amplifier performance, and pre-amplifier
performance and operation for both digital and analog
domains. THX Select2 Plus receivers also feature
proprietary THX technologies (e.g., THX Mode) which
accurately translate movie soundtracks for home theater
playback.
This product is protected by certain intellectual property
rights of Microsoft. Use or distribution of such technology
outside of this product is prohibited without a license from
Microsoft.
Windows and the Windows logo are trademarks of the
Microsoft group of companies.
Qdeo and QuietVideo are trademarks of Marvell or its
affiliates.
“Xantech” is a registered trademark of Xantech
Corporation.
“Niles” is a registered trademark of Niles Audio
Corporation.
Re-Equalization and the “Re-EQ” logo are trademarks of
THX Ltd.
Apple, iPod and iPhone are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Apple TV is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
“MHL, the MHL Logo, and Mobile High-Definition Link are
trademarks or registered trademarks of MHL LLC in the
United States and other counties.”
“The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia
Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States
and other countries.”
Manufactured under license from
Audyssey Laboratories™, Inc. U.S. and foreign patents
pending. Audyssey MultEQ® XT32,
Audyssey Dynamic EQ®, Audyssey Dynamic Volume® and
Audyssey DSX® are registered trademarks of
Audyssey Laboratories, Inc.
“DLNA®, the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIED® are
trademarks, service marks, or certification marks of the
Digital Living Network Alliance.”
InstaPrevue and the InstaPrevue logo are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Silicon Image, Inc. in the United
States and other countries.
MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from
Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.
En-110
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a certification mark of the
Wi-Fi Alliance.
Wi-Fi certified logo shows international association
certifying interoperability “Wi-Fi Alliance” ensures the
product has passed the test for compatibility with other
Wi-Fi certified equipment.
Appendix
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by Onkyo is under license. Other trademarks
and trade names are those of their respective owners.
Onkyo does not guarantee Bluetooth compatibility between
the AV receiver and all Bluetooth-enabled devices.
For compatibility between the AV receiver and another
device with Bluetooth technology, consult the device’s
documentation and dealer. In some countries, there may
be restrictions on using Bluetooth devices. Check with your
local authorities.
En-111
Appendix
Specifications
Amplifier Section
Rated Output Power
All channels:
135 watts minimum continuous power
per channel, 8 ohm loads, 2 channels
driven from 20 Hz to 20 kHz, with a
maximum total harmonic distortion of
0.08% (FTC)
(North American)
9 ch × 185 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch
driven of 1% (IEC)
(Others)
Maximum Effective Output Power
9 ch × 230 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch
driven (JEITA)
(Australian)
Dynamic Power*
* IEC60268-Short-term maximum output power
300 W (3 Ω, Front)
250 W (4 Ω, Front)
150 W (8 Ω, Front)
THD+N (Total Harmonic Distortion+Noise)
0.08% (20 Hz - 20 kHz, half power)
Damping Factor
60 (Front, 1 kHz, 8 Ω)
Input Sensitivity and Impedance (Unbalance)
200 mV/47 kΩ (LINE)
2.5 mV/47 kΩ (PHONO MM)
Rated RCA Output Level and Impedance
200 mV/470 Ω (PRE OUT)
Maximum RCA Output Level and Impedance
4.6 V/470 Ω (PRE OUT)
Phono Overload
70 mV (MM 1 kHz 0.5% Direct)
Frequency Response 5 Hz - 100 kHz/+1 dB, –3 dB (Direct
mode)
Tone Control Characteristics
±10 dB, 50 Hz (BASS)
±10 dB, 20 kHz (TREBLE)
Signal to Noise Ratio 110 dB (LINE, IHF-A)
80 dB (PHONO MM, IHF-A)
Speaker Impedance 4 Ω - 16 Ω
Video Section
Input Sensitivity/Output Level and Impedance
1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Component Y)
0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (Component PB/CB,
PR/CR)
1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Composite)
Component Video Frequency Response
5 Hz - 100 MHz/+0 dB, –3 dB
Compatible Bluetooth profiles
A2DP 1.2 (Advanced Audio Distribution
Profile)
AVRCP 1.3 (Audio Video Remote
Control Profile)
Supported Codecs
SBC
Transmission range (A2DP)
20 Hz - 20,000 Hz (Sampling frequency
44.1 kHz)
*1
Tuner Section
FM Tuning Frequency Range
87.5 MHz - 107.9 MHz (North American)
87.5 MHz - 108.0 MHz, RDS (Others)
AM Tuning Frequency Range
522/530 kHz - 1611/1710 kHz
Preset Channel
40
The actual range will vary depending on factors such as
obstacles between devices, magnetic fields around a
microwave oven, static electricity, cordless phone,
reception sensitivity, antenna’s performance, operating
system, software application, etc.
General
Power Supply
Network Section
Ethernet LAN
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
Wireless LAN
Compatible standards:
IEEE 802.11 b/g/n standard (Wi-Fi®
standard)
Security:
WEP 64 bit, WEP 128 bit, WPA/WPA2PSK (AES), WPA/WPA2-PSK (TKIP)
Transmission frequency
1 - 11 ch (North American)
10 - 13 ch (France)
1 - 13 ch (Others)
(Wi-Fi® standard)
Radio frequency
2.4 GHz
Bluetooth Section
Communication system
Bluetooth Specification version 2.1 +
EDR (Enhanced Data Rate)
Maximum communication range
Line of sight approx. 15 m*1
Frequency band
2.4 GHz band (2.4000 GHz 2.4835 GHz)
Modulation method
FHSS (Freq Hopping Spread Spectrum)
En-112
AC 120 V, 60 Hz (North American)
AC 220 - 240 V, 50/60 Hz (Others)
Power Consumption 9.1 A (North American)
870 W (Others)
No-sound Power Consumption
120 W
Stand-by Power Consumption
0.1 W (North American)
0.15 W (Others)
Dimensions (W × H × D)
435 mm × 198.5 mm × 437.5 mm
17-1/8" × 7-13/16" × 17-1/4"
Weight
18.5 kg (40.8 lbs.)
■ HDMI
Input
Output
Video Resolution
Audio Format
Supported
IN 1, IN 2, IN 3, IN 4, IN 5, IN 6, IN 7,
IN 8, AUX INPUT
OUT MAIN, OUT SUB/ZONE2 OUT
4K
Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio,
DVD-Audio, DSD
3D, Audio Return Channel, DeepColor,
x.v.Color, Lip Sync, CEC (RIHD), 4K (upscaling and Passthrough), HDMI ZONE2
Appendix
■ Video Inputs
Component
Composite
Analog RGB
IN 1, IN 2
BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, STB/DVR, GAME 1,
AUX
PC IN
■ Video Outputs
Component
Composite
MONITOR OUT
MONITOR OUT
■ Audio Inputs
Digital
Analog
Optical: 2 (Rear), 1 (Front)
Coaxial: 3
BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, STB/DVR, GAME 1,
PC, TV/CD, PHONO, AUX
■ Audio Outputs
Analog
ZONE2 LINE OUT, ZONE3 LINE OUT
Analog Multichannel Pre Outputs
11
Subwoofer Pre Outputs
2
Speaker Outputs
Main (L, R, C, SL, SR, SBL, SBR) + Front
Wide/ZONE2 (L, R) + Front High/ZONE3
(L, R)
Phones
1 (ø 6.3)
■ Others
Setup Mic
RS232
RI
USB
Ethernet
IR Input
IR Output
12 V Trigger Out
2
1
1
1
1 (Front)
1
1
1
2
Specifications and features are subject to change
without notice.
En-113
Appendix
Memo
En-114
Appendix
Memo
En-115
2-1, Nisshin-cho, Neyagawa-shi, OSAKA 572-8540, JAPAN
http://www.onkyo.com/
The Americas
18 Park Way, Upper Saddle River, N.J. 07458, U.S.A.
For Dealer, Service, Order and all other Business Inquiries:
Tel: 201-785-2600 Fax: 201-785-2650
http://www.us.onkyo.com/
For Product Support Team Only:
1-800-229-1687
http://www.us.onkyo.com/
Europe
Liegnitzerstrasse 6, 82194 Groebenzell, GERMANY
Tel: +49-8142-4401-0 Fax: +49-8142-4208-213
http://www.eu.onkyo.com/
Unit 19, Building 6, Croxley Green Business Park, Hatters Lane, Watford, WD18 8YH, UK
Tel: +44 (0)8712-00-19-96 Fax: +44 (0)8712-00-19-95
China
(Hong Kong)
Unit 1033, 10/F, Star House, No 3, Salisbury Road, Tsim Sha Tsui Kowloon, Hong Kong.
Tel: 852-2429-3118 Fax: 852-2428-9039
http://www.hk.onkyo.com/
(Mainland)
1301, 555 Tower, No.555 West NanJing Road, Jing’an District, Shanghai, China 200041,
Tel: 86-21-52131366 Fax: 86-21-52130396
http://www.cn.onkyo.com/
Asia, Oceania, Middle East, Africa
Please contact an Onkyo distributor referring to Onkyo SUPPORT site.
http://www.intl.onkyo.com/support/
The above-mentioned information is subject to change without prior notice.
Visit the Onkyo web site for the latest update.
Y1306-2
SN 29401540EN-A
(C) Copyright 2013 Onkyo Corporation Japan. All rights reserved.
* 2 9 4 0 1 5 4 0 E N - A *
Using Internet Radio
Using Internet Radio
Common Procedures in Internet Radio
Menu
Note
• Available services may vary depending on the region.
• Certain network service or contents available through this
device may not be accessible in case the service provider
terminates its service.
1
2
Press NET.
A list of the network services appears, and the
NET indicator lights. If it flashes, verify that the
Ethernet cable is firmly connected to the AV
receiver.
Select the desired service and press ENTER.
The top page of the selected service appears.
Using Multiple Accounts
The AV receiver supports multiple user accounts,
which means you can freely switch between several
logins. After registering user accounts, login is
performed from the “Users” screen.
Pandora® internet radio
–Getting Started (U.S. only)..................... 2
Using Rhapsody (U.S. only).......................... 3
1
Press MENU while the Users screen is
displayed.
The following menu items appear:
Add new user:
Remove this user:
You can either store a new user account, or
delete an existing one.
Using the SiriusXM Internet Radio
(North American only).............................. 4
Using Last.fm Internet Radio ........................ 5
Tip
• Some of the services don’t allow the use of multiple user
accounts.
• You can store up to 10 user accounts.
• To switch between accounts you must first log out from the
current account, and log in again on the “Users” screen.
En-1
Using Slacker Personal Radio ...................... 6
Using MP3tunes ............................................. 7
Using Internet Radio
Pandora® internet radio
–Getting Started (U.S. only)
Pandora is a free, personalized Internet radio service
that plays the music you know and helps you discover
music you’ll love.
1
Use q/w to select “I have a Pandora Account”
or “I’m new to Pandora” and then press
ENTER.
If you are new to Pandora select “I’m new to
Pandora”. You will see an activation code on
your TV screen. Please write down this code. Go
to an Internet connected computer and point your
browser to www.pandora.com/onkyo
Enter your activation code and then follow the
instructions to create your Pandora account and
your personalized Pandora Internet radio
stations. You can create your stations by entering
your favorite tracks and artists when prompted.
After you have created your account and stations
you can return to your Onkyo receiver and press
enter to begin listening to your personalized
Pandora Internet radio.
If you have an existing Pandora account, you can
add your Pandora account to your Onkyo
receiver by selecting “I have a Pandora
Account” and logging in with your email and
password.
2
To play a station, use q/w to select the station
from your station list, and then press ENTER.
Playback starts and the playback screen
appears.
Create a New Station:
Enter the name of a track, artist, or genre and
Pandora will create a unique radio station for you
based on the musical qualities of that track, artist,
or genre.
■ Menu Items
I like this track:
Give a track “thumbs-up” and Pandora will play
more music like it.
I don’t like this track:
Give a track “thumbs-down” and Pandora will ban
that track from the current station.
Why is this track playing?:
Discover some of the musical attributes that
Pandora uses to create your personal radio
stations.
I’m tired of this track:
If you are tired of a track, you can put the track to
sleep and Pandora will not play it for one month.
Create station from this artist:
Creates a radio station from this artist.
Tip
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using
Multiple Accounts” (➔ page 1). Login can be made
from the “Users” screen.
En-2
Delete this station:
This will permanently delete a station from your
Pandora account. All of your thumbs feedback
will be lost should you choose to re-create the
station with the same track or artist.
Create station from this track:
Creates a radio station from this track.
Rename this station:
Lets you rename the current radio station.
Bookmark this artist:
Pandora will bookmark your favorite artist for
your profile on www.pandora.com.
Bookmark this track:
Pandora will bookmark the current track and
allow you to buy them all from Amazon or iTunes
in one step!
Add to My Favorites:
Adds a station to My Favorites list.
PANDORA, the PANDORA logo, and the Pandora
trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks
of Pandora Media, Inc. Used with permission.
Using Internet Radio
Using Rhapsody (U.S. only)
1
Use q/w to select “Sign in to your account”
and then press ENTER.
To use Rhapsody, you need an account. If you
don’t have one yet, you can create a new
account at
www.rhapsody.com/onkyo
If you have an existing Rhapsody account, select
“Sign in to your account” and press ENTER.
Enter your user name (usually your email) and
password in the next keyboard screen, or in Web
Setup.
■ Using the keyboard screen
1. Use q/w/e/r and ENTER to enter your user
name and password.
2. Select “OK”.
3. Press ENTER. The “Confirm your entries”
screen appears.
4. Press ENTER.
Tip
2
Use q/w to select the menu, then press
ENTER.
Search:
You can search for music by Artist, Album, or
Track.
Music Guide:
You can play tracks from Genres, Top Artists,
Top Albums, Top Tracks, New Releases, and
Staff Picks.
Rhapsody Channels:
Listen to radio channels programmed by
Rhapsody’s top-notch editors.
Playlists:
Play your own personal playlists.
My Library:
Bookmark your favorite albums and tracks from
the Rhapsody catalog using My Library.
Account Info:
Confirm your account information.
Sign Out:
Sign out from your Rhapsody account.
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using
Multiple Accounts” (➔ page 1). Login can be made
from the “Users” screen.
3
Use q/w to select a channel, and press ENTER
or 1 to start playback.
Playback starts and the playback screen
appears.
You can control the tracks with the buttons on the
remote control.
Enabled buttons: 1, 3, 2, 5, 4, 7,
6, RANDOM, REPEAT
Note
• On Rhapsody Channels, some of the buttons don’t
work.
■ Menu Items
Add track to My Library:
Bookmark currently-playing tracks.
Add album to My Library:
Bookmark currently-playing albums.
Add playlist to My Library:
Bookmark currently-playing playlists.
Add channel to My Channels:
Bookmark currently-playing Rhapsody radio
channels.
Add to My Favorites:
Adds a track, channel or playlist to My Favorites
list.
Tip
• You can remove bookmarked tracks, albums, and
Rhapsody Channels from My Library.
En-3
Using Internet Radio
Using the SiriusXM Internet Radio
(North American only)
1
Your Onkyo AV receiver includes a free trial of
SiriusXM Internet Radio. The “Account Info” screen
shows how many days are left in your trial. After the
trial period expires, if you want to continue listening to
the service, you must subscribe. To subscribe go to
www.siriusxm.com/internetradio with your
computer.
Use q/w to select “Sign In”, and then press
ENTER.
If you have an existing SIRIUS account, you can
sign in by selecting “Sign In”. Enter your user
name and password in the next keyboard screen,
or in Web Setup. If you don’t know your
username or password, call Sirius XM at (888)
539-7474 for assistance.
Tip
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using
Multiple Accounts” (➔ page 1). Login can be made
from the “Users” screen.
When you subscribe, you will be provided with a
username and password which has to be entered into
the AV receiver.
■ Using the keyboard screen
1. Use q/w/e/r and ENTER to enter your user
name and password.
2. Select “OK”.
3. Press ENTER. The “Confirm your entries”
screen appears.
4. Press ENTER.
“Please wait...” appears and then “SiriusXM
Internet Radio” screen appears which displays
the category available for selection.
To use SiriusXM Internet Radio, you must have your
AV receiver connected to the Internet. Using the
remote control, follow these steps:
2
Use q/w to select the category and then press
ENTER.
The channel list screen for the selected category
appears.
En-4
3
Use q/w to select the desired channel and then
press ENTER.
The playback screen for the selected channel
appears and you can listen to SiriusXM Internet
Radio.
You can control the tracks with the buttons on the
remote control.
Enabled buttons: 2, 3, 7, 6
■ Menu Items
Add to My Favorites:
Adds a channel to My Favorites list.
SiriusXM Internet Radio subscriptions are sold
separately and are governed by the Sirius Terms and
Conditions (see www.sirius.com). Be sure to read this
agreement before you purchase your subscription.
Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its
subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
Using Internet Radio
Using Last.fm Internet Radio
1
Last.fm is a music service that learns what you
love...
Your new Onkyo AV receiver is very clever. If you
have a free Last.fm account, it will keep track of all
the songs you’ve just played. When you visit the
Last.fm website, you can see personal charts of the
music you’ve enjoyed, share them with friends and
see what they like, too.
■ Using the keyboard screen
1. Use q/w/e/r and the ENTER to enter your
user name and password.
2. Select “OK”.
3. Press ENTER. The “Confirm your entries”
screen appears.
4. Press ENTER.
“Please wait...” appears and then “Last.fm
Internet Radio” screen appears.
With thousands of biographies, reviews and an
endless choice of personalised, ad-free radio
stations, Last.fm is a great way to discover music.
Pick up your free Last.fm account today at
www.last.fm/join
Get a subscription and you can enjoy the best of adfree Last.fm Radio on your Onkyo AV receiver without
a computer!
Recommended Radio:
Discover smart personalised recommendations that
adapt as your tastes change.
Artist Radio:
Pick any artist and we’ll play you a whole station of
music inspired by your choice.
My Library:
Sit back and enjoy selections from all the music
you’ve heard since you joined Last.fm.
Tag Radio:
Polish funk? Death pop? Think of a style and we’ll
entertain you with it for hours.
Start your free trial straight away when you create
your account and see for yourself what it’s like to
have the world’s music at your fingertips. Latest
prices and full information are available at
www.last.fm/subscribe
Profile:
You can play tracks from “Recently Listened
Tracks”, “Library” and “Neighbours”.
Account Info:
Confirm your account information.
Sign Out:
It signs out from your account.
Use q/w to select “Sign in to your account”,
and then press ENTER.
If you have the existing Last.fm account, you can
sign in to your account to select “Sign in to your
account”. Enter your user name and password in
the next keyboard screen.
3
■ Menu Items
I Love this track:
Track information is saved in Last.fm server, and
playback frequency increases.
Ban this track:
Track information is saved in Last.fm server, and
playback frequency reduces.
Add to My Favorites:
Adds a station to My Favorites list.
Tip
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using
Multiple Accounts” (➔ page 1). Login can be made
from the “Users” screen.
2
Use q/w to select menu and then press
ENTER.
Search Station:
You can search station by Artist, Tag, or User
Name.
Top Artists Station:
You can play tracks of top-rated artists.
Top Tags Station:
You can play tracks of top-rated tags.
Personal Station:
• You can play tracks from personalized station
(“Your Library”, “Your Neighbourhood” and
“Your Recommendations”).
En-5
Use q/w to select a station, and press ENTER
or 1 to start playback.
Playback starts and the playback screen
appears.
■ Using scrobbling control
Use q/w to select “Enable”, and then press ENTER.
*
Internet radio services provided by a third party may be
terminated with or without notice.
Internet radio services may not be available in some areas.
Using Internet Radio
Using Slacker Personal Radio
1
If you do not have an account, create one on
the Slacker website (www.slacker.com) with
your computer.
If you already have a Slacker account, select
“Sign in to your account” and then press
ENTER.
The keyboard screen appears. You can enter
information from the remote control or the keys
on the main unit.
2
If there are no mistakes in the information you
have entered, use q/w/e/r to select “OK”
then press ENTER.
An account information confirmation screen
appears.
3
If you do not have an account, select “Access
without Sign In” and press ENTER to use a
restricted version of the service.
Note that use will be restricted.
Tip
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using
Multiple Accounts” (➔ page 1). Login can be made
from the “Users” screen.
4
Use q/w to select a menu item and then press
ENTER.
To sign out, use q/w to select “Sign out” from
this screen and then press ENTER.
5
Use q/w to select a station and then press
ENTER or 1 to start playback from the
station.
The playback screen appears.
6
You can control the tracks with the buttons on
the remote control.
Enabled buttons: 1, 3, 2, 6
■ Menu Items
Rate Song as Favorite:
Stores information to server, making it more likely
that the song will be played again.
Ban Song:
Stores information to server, making it less likely
that the song will be played again.
Ban Artist:
Stores information to server, making it less likely
that the songs from this artist will be played
again.
Mark Favorite:
Adds the currently playing station to your
favorites.
Unmark Favorite:
Deletes the currently playing station from your
favorites.
Add song to Library:
Adds the currently playing track to your library.
Delete song from Library:
Deletes the currently playing track from your
library.
Add to My Favorites:
Adds a station or song to My Favorites list.
En-6
Using Internet Radio
Using MP3tunes
Listen to your music collection on your home stereo in
complete digital fidelity without a personal computer
plus safely backup all your songs. Here’s how:
Playing Contents on the AV Receiver
Tip
• Before proceeding, you need to select the MP3tunes
service as described in “Common Procedures in Internet
Radio Menu” (➔ page 1).
The track at the top of the music list is automatically
played back.
5
Creating an Account on your Computer
1
From your computer, open a web browser and
go to: www.mp3tunes.com/signup
2
3
Create an account.
4
View, edit and listen to your files by clicking
on Player (www.mp3tunes.com/player).
1
Use q/w to select “Sign in to your account”,
and then press ENTER.
2
Enter the e-mail address and password you
used when creating your account, select “OK”
and press ENTER.
The keyboard screen appears. You can enter
your user name and password from the remote
controller or the buttons on the AV receiver.
Click the Upload link
(www.mp3tunes.com/upload) to add files to
your Locker.
3
If there are no mistakes in the information you
have entered, select “OK” and press ENTER.
An account information confirmation screen
appears.
Tip
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using
Multiple Accounts” (➔ page 1). Login can be made
from the “Users” screen.
4
Use q/w to select the menu, then press
ENTER.
Music:
The place to find your Artists, Albums, and
Playlists.
Shuffle:
Starts playing a random selection of tracks from
your Locker.
Search:
Find a specific Album, Artist, or Song.
Account Info:
Your MP3tunes account information.
Sign Out:
Log out of your MP3tunes account.
En-7
Use q/w to select a track and press ENTER or
1 to start playback.
A playback screen appears.
You can control the tracks with the buttons on the
remote control.
Enabled buttons: 1, 3, 2, 7, 6
■ Menu Items
Go to Menu:
Displays additional menu options.
6
You can view or change your MP3tunes
account settings by going to
www.mp3tunes.com/account.
Utilisation d’une webradio
Utilisation d’une
webradio
Procédures courantes dans le menu de
webradio
Remarque
• Les services disponibles peuvent varier en fonction de la
région.
• Certain services réseau ou contenus disponible via cet
appareil peuvent être inaccessibles au cas où le prestataire
de services terminerait son service.
1
2
Appuyez sur NET.
Une liste des services réseau s’affiche, et le
témoin NET s’allume. S’il clignote, vérifiez que le
câble Ethernet est fermement branché sur
l’ampli-tuner AV.
Sélectionnez le service désiré et appuyez sur
ENTER.
La page principale du service sélectionné
s’affiche.
Utilisation de plusieurs comptes
L’ampli-tuner AV prend en charge plusieurs comptes
utilisateur, ce qui signifie que vous pouvez librement
commuter entre plusieurs connexions. Après avoir
enregistré des comptes utilisateur, l’identification est
réalisée à partir de l’écran « Users ».
1
Appuyez sur MENU lorsque l’écran Users est
affiché.
Les éléments de menu suivants s’affichent :
Add new user :
Remove this user :
Vous pouvez soit stocker un nouveau compte
utilisateur, soit en supprimer un existant.
Pandora® internet Radio
–Pour commencer
(États-Unis uniquement).......................... 2
Utilisation de Rhapsody
(Etats-Unis uniquement).......................... 3
Utilisation de SiriusXM Internet Radio
(Amérique du Nord uniquement) ............ 4
Utilisation de la webradio Last.fm................ 5
Conseil
• Certains des services ne permettent pas l’utilisation de
plusieurs comptes utilisateur.
• Vous pouvez stocker jusqu’à 10 comptes utilisateur.
• Pour commuter entre les comptes, vous devez d’abord
vous déconnecter du compte actuel, puis vous reconnectez
depuis l’écran « Users ».
Fr-1
Utilisation de Slacker Personal Radio ......... 6
Utilisation d’une webradio
Pandora® internet Radio
–Pour commencer (États-Unis
uniquement)
Pandora est un service de radio en ligne libre et
personnalisé vous permettant de lire la musique que
vous connaissez et de découvrir celle que vous
aimez.
1
Utilisez q/w pour sélectionner « I have a
Pandora Account » ou « I’m new to Pandora »,
puis appuyez sur ENTER.
Si vous ne connaissez pas Pandora sélectionnez
« I’m new to Pandora ». Un code d’activation
apparaîtra sur l’écran de votre téléviseur. Notez
ce code. Utilisez un ordinateur branché sur
Internet et connectez le navigateur à
www.pandora.com/onkyo
Saisissez votre code d’activation puis suivez les
instructions pour créer votre compte Pandora et
vos stations webradio Pandora personnalisées.
Lorsque vous y êtes invités, vous pouvez créer
vos stations en saisissant vos pistes et vos
artistes préférés. Après la création de votre
compte et de vos stations, vous pouvez retourner
à votre récepteur Onkyo et appuyez sur entrée
pour écouter votre webradio Pandora
personnalisée.
Si vous disposez d’un compte Pandora, vous
pouvez ajouter votre compte Pandora à votre
récepteur Onkyo en sélectionnant « I have a
Pandora Account » et y accéder en entrant
votre adresse e-mail et votre mot de passe.
2
Pour lire une station, utilisez q/w pour
sélectionner la station dans votre liste de
stations, puis appuyez sur ENTER.
La lecture débute et l’écran de lecture s’affiche.
Create a New Station :
Saisissez le nom d’une piste, d’un artiste ou d’un
genre et Pandora créera une station radio unique
pour vous en fonction des qualités musicales de
la piste, de l’artiste ou du genre choisi.
■ Eléments du menu
I like this track :
Acceptez la piste et Pandora lira d’autres
musiques similaires.
I don’t like this track :
Rejetez la piste et Pandora éliminera cette piste
de la station écoutée.
Why is this track playing? :
Découvrez certains des attributs musicaux que
Pandora utilise pour créer vos stations radio
personnelles.
I’m tired of this track :
Si vous en avez assez d’une piste, vous pouvez
mettre la piste « au repos » et Pandora ne la lira
plus pendant un mois.
Create station from this artist :
Permet de créer une station radio à partir de cet
artiste.
Conseil
• Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes
utilisateur, consultez « Utilisation de plusieurs
comptes » (➔ page 1). L’identification peut être
réalisée à partir de l’écran « Users ».
Fr-2
Delete this station :
Ceci supprimera de façon permanente la station
de votre compte Pandora. Au cas où vous
décideriez de récréer la station avec les mêmes
pistes ou les mêmes artistes, tous vos
acceptations/rejets précédents seront perdus.
Create station from this track :
Permet de créer une station radio à partir de
cette piste.
Rename this station :
Vous permet de renommer la station radio
actuelle.
Bookmark this artist :
Pandora marquera votre artiste préféré pour
votre profil sur www.pandora.com.
Bookmark this track :
Pandora marquera la piste en cours et vous
permettra de toutes les acheter sur Amazon ou
iTunes en une étape !
Add to My Favorites :
Permet d’ajouter une station à la liste My
Favorites.
PANDORA, le logo PANDORA, et l’habillage
commercial Pandora sont des marques
commerciales ou des marques déposées de la
société Pandora Media, Inc. Utilisées avec
autorisation.
Utilisation d’une webradio
Utilisation de Rhapsody (Etats-Unis
uniquement)
1
Utilisez q/w pour sélectionner « Sign in to your
account », puis appuyez sur ENTER.
Vous devez posséder un compte pour utiliser
Rhapsody. Si vous ne disposez pas encore d’un
compte, vous pouvez en créer un à partir de
www.rhapsody.com/onkyo
Si vous possédez déjà un compte Rhapsody,
sélectionnez « Sign in to your account », puis
appuyez sur ENTER.
Saisissez votre nom utilisateur (en général votre
adresse électronique) et votre mot de passe dans
l’écran clavier suivant ou dans Configuration
Web.
■ Utilisation de l’écran clavier
1. Utilisez q/w/e/r et ENTER pour saisir votre
nom d’utilisateur et votre mot de passe.
2. Sélectionnez « OK ».
3. Appuyez sur ENTER. L’écran « Confirm
your entries » s’affiche.
4. Appuyez sur ENTER.
2
Utilisez q/w pour sélectionner le menu, puis
appuyez sur ENTER.
Search :
Vous pouvez rechercher des morceaux par
artiste, par album ou par piste.
Music Guide :
Vous pouvez lire des pistes à partir des
genres,des meilleurs artistes, des meilleurs
albums, des meilleures pistes, des nouveautés et
des sélections du personnel.
Rhapsody Channels :
Écoutez les canaux de radio programmée par les
meilleurs éditeurs de Rhapsody.
Playlists :
Permet de jouer vos listes de lecture
personnelles.
My Library :
Marquez vos albums et vos pistes personnelles
dans le catalogue de Rhapsody à l’aide de My
Library.
Account Info :
Vérifiez les informations de votre compte.
Sign Out :
Déconnectez-vous de votre compte Rhapsody.
Conseil
• Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes
utilisateur, consultez « Utilisation de plusieurs
comptes » (➔ page 1). L’identification peut être
réalisée à partir de l’écran « Users ».
3
Utilisez q/w pour sélectionner un canal, puis
appuyez sur ENTER ou 1 pour démarrer la
lecture.
La lecture débute et l’écran de lecture s’affiche.
Vous pouvez contrôlez les pistes avec les
touches sur la télécommande.
Boutons activés : 1, 3, 2, 5, 4, 7,
6, RANDOM, REPEAT
Remarque
• Sur les canaux Rhapsody, certaines touches ne
fonctionnent pas.
■ Eléments du menu
Add track to My Library :
Marquez les pistes en cours de lecture.
Add album to My Library :
Marquez les albums en cours de lecture.
Add playlist to My Library :
Marquez les listes de lecture en cours de lecture.
Add channel to My Channels :
Marquez les canaux de radio Rhapsody en cours
de lecture.
Add to My Favorites :
Permet d’ajouter une piste, un canal ou une liste
de lecture à la liste My Favorites.
Conseil
• Vous pouvez supprimer des pistes, des albums et des
canaux Rhapsody marqués de My Library.
Fr-3
Utilisation d’une webradio
Utilisation de SiriusXM Internet Radio
(Amérique du Nord uniquement)
1
Votre ampli-tuner AV Onkyo comprend un essai
gratuit de SiriusXM Internet Radio. L’écran « Account
Info » affiche le nombre de jours restants dans votre
essai. Une fois la période d’essai expirée, si vous
souhaitez continuer à écouter le service, vous devez
vous abonner. Pour vous inscrire, accédez à
l’adresse
www.siriusxm.com/internetradio à l’aide de votre
ordinateur.
Utilisez q/w pour sélectionner « Sign In », puis
appuyez sur ENTER.
Si vous possédez déjà un compte SIRIUS, vous
pouvez y accéder en sélectionnant « Sign In ».
Saisissez votre nom utilisateur et votre mot de
passe dans l’écran clavier suivant ou dans
Configuration Web. Si vous ne connaissez pas
votre nom d’utilisateur ou votre mot de passe,
appelez Sirius XM au (888) 539-7474 pour
obtenir une assistance.
Conseil
• Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes
utilisateur, consultez « Utilisation de plusieurs
comptes » (➔ page 1). L’identification peut être
réalisée à partir de l’écran « Users ».
Lorsque vous vous inscrivez, vous devez fournir un
nom est un mot de passe utilisateur qui doivent être
saisis dans l’ampli-tuner AV.
■ Utilisation de l’écran clavier
1. Utilisez q/w/e/r et ENTER pour saisir votre
nom d’utilisateur et votre mot de passe.
2. Sélectionnez « OK ».
3. Appuyez sur ENTER. L’écran « Confirm
your entries » s’affiche.
4. Appuyez sur ENTER.
« Please wait... » s’affiche, puis l’écran
« SiriusXM Internet Radio » affiche la catégorie
que vous pouvez sélectionner.
Pour utiliser SiriusXM Internet Radio, l’ampli-tuner AV
doit être connecté à Internet. Suivez les étapes cidessous à l’aide de la télécommande :
2
Utilisez q/w pour sélectionner la catégorie,
puis appuyez sur ENTER.
L’écran de la liste des canaux de la catégorie
sélectionnée s’affiche.
Fr-4
3
Utilisez q/w pour sélectionner le canal de
votre choix, puis appuyez sur ENTER.
L’écran de lecture du canal sélectionné s’affiche
et vous pouvez écouter SiriusXM Internet Radio.
Vous pouvez contrôlez les pistes avec les
touches sur la télécommande.
Boutons activés : 2, 3, 7, 6
■ Eléments du menu
Add to My Favorites :
Permet d’ajouter un canal à la liste My Favorites.
Les abonnements SiriusXM Internet Radio sont
vendus séparément et sont subordonnés par les
conditions Sirius (voir www.sirius.com). Assurez-vous
de lire cet accord avant d’acquérir votre abonnement.
Sirius, XM et tous les logos et marques afférents sont
des marques déposées de Sirius XM Radio Inc. et de
ses filiales. Tous droits réservés.
Utilisation d’une webradio
Utilisation de la webradio Last.fm
1
Last.fm un service de musique qui apprend ce que
vous aimez…
Votre nouvel ampli-tuner AV Onkyo est très intelligent.
Si vous avez un compte Last.fm gratuit, il garde une
trace de toutes les chansons que vous avez juste
jouées. Quand vous vous rendez sur le site Web de
Last.fm, vous pouvez voir les graphiques personnels
de la musique que vous avez appréciée, les partagez
avec vos amis et également voir ce qu’ils aiment.
■ Utilisation de l’écran clavier
1. Utilisez q/w/e/r et le bouton ENTER pour
saisir votre nom d’utilisateur et votre mot de
passe.
2. Sélectionnez « OK ».
3. Appuyez sur ENTER. L’écran « Confirm
your entries » s’affiche.
4. Appuyez sur ENTER.
« Please wait... » apparait puis l’écran « Last.fm
Internet Radio » apparait.
Avec des milliers de biographies, de revues et un
choix infini de stations de radio personnalisées et
sans pub, Last.fm est excellent moyen de découvrir
de la musique. Créez aujourd’hui votre compte
Last.fm gratuit sur www.last.fm/join
Inscrivez-vous et vous pourrez apprécier le meilleur
de la radio sans pub Last.fm sur votre ampli-tuner AV
Onkyo sans ordinateur !
Recommended Radio :
Découvrez les recommandations personnalisées
futées qui changent en même temps que vos goûts.
Artist Radio :
Sélectionnez n’importe quel artiste et nous vous
jouerons une station entière de musique inspirée par
votre choix.
My Library :
Reposez-vous de retour et appréciez les sélections à
partir de toute la musique que vous avez entendue
depuis que vous avez joint Last.fm.
Tag Radio :
Funk polonaise ? Death pop ? Pensez à un style et
nous vous divertirons avec pendant des heures.
Commencez votre essai gratuit immédiatement à la
création votre compte et découvrez par vous-même
ce que cela fait d’avoir la musique du monde au bouts
des doigts. Les derniers prix et les informations
complètes sont disponibles sur www.last.fm/subscribe
Profile :
Vous pouvez lire des pistes de « Recently
Listened Tracks », « Library » et
« Neighbours ».
Account Info :
Vérifiez les informations de votre compte.
Sign Out :
Pour vous déconnecter de votre compte.
Utilisez q/w pour sélectionner « Sign in to
your account », puis appuyez sur ENTER.
Vous possédez déjà un compte Last.fm, vous
pouvez vous y connecter pour sélectionner
« Sign in to your account ». Saisissez votre
nom utilisateur et votre mot de passe dans
l’écran clavier suivant.
3
■ Eléments du menu
I Love this track :
L’information de la piste est sauvegardée dans le
serveur Last.fm, et la fréquence de lecture
augmente.
Ban this track :
L’information de la piste est sauvegardée dans le
serveur Last.fm, et la fréquence de lecture
diminue.
Add to My Favorites :
Permet d’ajouter une station à la liste My
Favorites.
Conseil
• Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes
utilisateur, consultez « Utilisation de plusieurs
comptes » (➔ page 1). L’identification peut être
réalisée à partir de l’écran « Users ».
2
Utilisez q/w pour sélectionner un menu puis
appuyez sur ENTER.
Search Station :
Vous pouvez rechercher une station par artiste,
par tag ou par nom d’utilisateur.
Top Artists Station :
Vous pouvez lire des pistes des artistes les mieux
évalués.
Top Tags Station :
Vous pouvez lire des pistes des tags les mieux
évalués.
Personal Station :
Vous pouvez lire des pistes de votre station
personnalisée (« Your Library », « Your
Neighbourhood » et « Your
Recommendations »).
Fr-5
Utilisez q/w pour sélectionner une station, puis
appuyez sur ENTER ou 1 pour démarrer la
lecture.
La lecture débute et l’écran de lecture s’affiche.
■ Utilisation du contrôle Scrobbling
Utilisez q/w pour sélectionner « Enable », puis
appuyez sur ENTER.
*
Les services de webradio fournis par un tiers peuvent être
résiliés avec ou sans préavis.
Les services de webradio peuvent ne pas être accessibles
dans certaines zones.
Utilisation d’une webradio
Utilisation de Slacker Personal Radio
1
Si vous ne possédez pas de compte, créez-en
un à partir du site Web de Slacker
(www.slacker.com) à l’aide de votre
ordinateur.
Si vous possédez déjà un compte Slacker,
sélectionnez « Sign in to your account », puis
appuyez sur ENTER.
L’écran clavier s’affiche. Pouvez saisir des
informations à partir de la télécommande ou des
touches sur l’appareil principal.
2
Si les informations que vous avez saisies ne
comportent pas d’erreur, utilisezq/w/e/r
pour sélectionner « OK », puis appuyez sur
ENTER.
L’écran de confirmation des informations du
compte s’affiche.
3
Si vous ne possédez pas de compte,
sélectionnez « Access without Sign In », puis
appuyez sur ENTER pour utiliser une version
restreinte du service.
Veuillez noter que l’utilisation est restreinte.
Conseil
• Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes
utilisateur, consultez « Utilisation de plusieurs
comptes » (➔ page 1). L’identification peut être
réalisée à partir de l’écran « Users ».
4
Utilisez q/w pour sélectionner un élément du
menu, puis appuyez sur ENTER.
Pour vous déconnecter, utilisez q/w pour
sélectionner « Sign out » depuis cet écran, puis
appuyez sur ENTER.
5
Utilisez q/w pour sélectionner une station,
puis appuyez sur ENTER ou 1 pour démarrer
la lecture depuis cette station.
L’écran de lecture apparaît.
6
Vous pouvez contrôlez les pistes avec les
touches sur la télécommande.
Boutons activés : 1, 3, 2, 6
■ Eléments du menu
Rate Song as Favorite :
Permet de stocker des informations sur le
serveur, et d’augmenter la probabilité que le
morceau soit lu de nouveau.
Ban Song :
Permet de stocker des informations sur le
serveur, et de diminuer la probabilité que le
morceau soit lu de nouveau.
Ban Artist :
Permet de stocker des informations sur le
serveur, et de diminuer la probabilité que les
morceaux de cet artiste soient lus de nouveau.
Mark Favorite :
Permet d’ajouter la station en cours de lecture à
vos favoris.
Unmark Favorite :
Permet de supprimer la station en cours de
lecture de vos favoris.
Add song to Library :
Permet d’ajouter la piste en cours de lecture à
votre bibliothèque.
Delete song from Library :
Permet de supprimer la piste en cours de lecture
de votre bibliothèque.
Add to My Favorites :
Permet d’ajouter une station ou un morceau à la
liste My Favorites.
Fr-6
Uso de Internet Radio
Uso de Internet Radio
Procedimientos comunes en el menú
Internet Radio
Nota
• Los servicios disponibles pueden variar de una región a
otra.
• Es posible que determinados servicios de red o contenidos
disponibles a través de este dispositivo no sean accesibles
si el proveedor del servicio da por finalizado el servicio.
1
2
Pulse NET.
Aparecerá una lista de los servicios de red y se
iluminará el indicador NET. Si parpadea,
verifique que el cable Ethernet esté firmemente
conectado al receptor de AV.
Seleccione el servicio deseado y pulse
ENTER.
Aparecerá la página principal del servicio
seleccionado.
Uso de múltiples cuentas
El receptor de AV permite múltiples cuentas de
usuario, lo que quiere decir que se puede cambiar
libremente entre varios usuarios. Después de
registrar las cuentas de usuario, el acceso se realiza
desde la pantalla “Users”.
1
Pulse MENU cuando aparezca la pantalla de
usuarios.
Aparecerán los siguientes elementos del menú:
Add new user:
Remove this user:
Puede guardar una nueva cuenta de usuario o
borrar una existente.
Pandora® Internet Radio
–Primeros pasos (solo EE.UU.)............... 2
Uso de Rhapsody (sólo EE.UU.)................... 3
Uso de SiriusXM Internet Radio
(solo Norteamérica).................................. 4
Uso de Last.fm Internet Radio ...................... 5
Consejo
• Algunos de los servicios no permiten el uso de múltiples
cuentas de usuario.
• Puede guardar hasta 10 cuentas de usuario.
• Para cambiar entre cuentas debe antes cerrar sesión en la
cuenta actual y acceder de nuevo en la pantalla “Users”.
Es-1
Uso de Slacker Personal Radio .................... 6
Uso de Internet Radio
Pandora® Internet Radio
–Primeros pasos (solo EE.UU.)
Pandora es un servicio de radio por Internet gratuito y
personalizado que reproduce la música que usted
conoce y le ayudará a descubrir música que le
encantará.
1
Utilice q/w para seleccionar “I have a Pandora
Account” o “I’m new to Pandora” y luego
pulse ENTER.
Si no conoce Pandora seleccione “I’m new to
Pandora”. Verá un código de activación en la
pantalla del televisor. Tome nota de este código.
Vaya a un ordenador conectado a Internet y dirija
el navegador a www.pandora.com/onkyo
Introduzca su código de activación y siga las
instrucciones para crear su cuenta de Pandora y
sus emisoras de radio por Internet
personalizadas de Pandora. Puede crear sus
propias emisoras introduciendo sus temas y
artistas favoritos cuando aparezca la solicitud
correspondiente. Una vez creada su cuenta y sus
emisoras, puede regresar al receptor Onkyo y
pulsar Enter para empezar a escuchar su radio
por Internet personalizada de Pandora.
Si ya dispone de una cuenta de Pandora, puede
añadirla al receptor Onkyo seleccionando “I have
a Pandora Account” e iniciando la sesión con su
dirección de correo electrónico y contraseña.
2
Utilice q/w para seleccionar la emisora en la
lista de emisoras y luego pulse ENTER.
Se inicia la reproducción y aparece la pantalla de
reproducción.
Create a New Station:
Introduzca el nombre de un tema, artista o
género; Pandora creará una emisora de radio
exclusiva para usted basada en las cualidades
musicales de ese tema, de ese artista o de ese
género.
■ Elementos del menú
I like this track:
Si aprueba (pulgar arriba) un tema, Pandora
reproducirá más música parecida.
I don’t like this track:
Si no aprueba (pulgar abajo) el tema, Pandora
eliminará dicho tema de la emisora actual.
Why is this track playing?:
Descubra algunos de los atributos musicales que
Pandora utiliza para crear sus emisoras de radio
personalizadas.
I’m tired of this track:
Si se cansa de un tema, puede “silenciarlo” de
modo que Pandora no lo reproduzca durante un
mes.
Create station from this artist:
Crea una emisora de radio a partir de este
artista.
Consejo
• Si desea utilizar múltiples cuentas de usuario,
consulte “Uso de múltiples cuentas” (➔ página 1). Se
puede iniciar sesión desde la pantalla “Users”.
Es-2
Delete this station:
Esto eliminará de forma permanente una
emisora de su cuenta de Pandora. Toda la
información sobre sus aprobaciones/
desaprobaciones se perderá si quiere volver a
crear la emisora con el mismo tema o artista.
Create station from this track:
Crea una emisora de radio a partir de este tema.
Rename this station:
Le permite renombrar la emisora de radio actual.
Bookmark this artist:
Pandora marcará su artista favorito para su perfil
en www.pandora.com.
Bookmark this track:
Pandora marcará el tema actual y le permitirá
comprarlos todos en Amazon o iTunes ¡con un
solo paso!
Add to My Favorites:
Añade una emisora a la lista Mis favoritos.
PANDORA, el logotipo de PANDORA logo, y la
imagen corporativa de Pandora son marcas
comerciales o marcas comerciales registradas de
Pandora Media, Inc. Uso con permiso.
Uso de Internet Radio
Uso de Rhapsody (sólo EE.UU.)
1
Utilice q/w para seleccionar “Sign in to your
account” y luego pulse ENTER.
Para utilizar Rhapsody, necesitará una cuenta. Si
todavía no tiene una, puede crear una nueva en
www.rhapsody.com/onkyo
Si ya tiene una cuenta Rhapsody, seleccione
“Sign in to your account” y pulse ENTER.
Escriba su nombre de usuario (normalmente el
correo electrónico) y contraseña en la pantalla de
teclado que aparece a continuación o en la
configuración web.
■ Utilización de la pantalla de teclado
1. Utilice q/w/e/r y ENTER para introducir su
nombre de usuario y su contraseña.
2. Seleccione “OK”.
3. Pulse ENTER. Aparecerá la pantalla
“Confirm your entries”.
4. Pulse ENTER.
Consejo
2
Utilice q/w para seleccionar el menú y luego
pulse ENTER.
Search:
Puede buscar música por artista, álbum o
canción.
Music Guide:
Puede reproducir canciones por géneros, artistas
principales, álbumes principales o canciones
principales, novedades, selección del sitio.
Rhapsody Channels:
Escuche las emisoras de radio programadas por
los principales redactores de Rhapsody.
Playlists:
Reproduzca sus listas personales.
My Library:
Marque sus álbumes y canciones preferidas en
el catálogo de Rhapsody, usando Mi biblioteca.
Account Info:
Confirme los datos de su cuenta.
Sign Out:
Salga de su cuenta Rhapsody.
• Si desea utilizar múltiples cuentas de usuario,
consulte “Uso de múltiples cuentas” (➔ página 1). Se
puede iniciar sesión desde la pantalla “Users”.
3
Utilice q/w para seleccionar una emisora y
luego pulse ENTER o 1 para iniciar la
reproducción.
Se inicia la reproducción y aparece la pantalla de
reproducción.
Puede controlar las pistas con los botones del
mando a distancia.
Botones activados: 1, 3, 2, 5, 4, 7,
6, RANDOM, REPEAT
Nota
• En Rhapsody Channels, algunos de los botones no
funcionan.
■ Elementos del menú
Add track to My Library:
Marca las canciones que se están reproduciendo
actualmente.
Add album to My Library:
Marca los álbumes que se están reproduciendo
actualmente.
Add playlist to My Library:
Marca las listas de reproducción que se están
reproduciendo actualmente.
Add channel to My Channels:
Marca las emisoras de Rhapsody que se están
reproduciendo actualmente.
Add to My Favorites:
Añade una canción, emisora o lista de
reproducción a la lista Mis favoritos.
Consejo
• Puede eliminar las canciones, los álbumes y las
emisoras de Rhapsody marcados de Mi biblioteca.
Es-3
Uso de Internet Radio
Uso de SiriusXM Internet Radio (solo
Norteamérica)
1
Su receptor de AV Onkyo incluye una prueba gratuita
de SiriusXM Internet Radio. La pantalla “Account
Info” muestra los días que quedan de la prueba. Una
vez que termine el periodo de prueba, si desea seguir
escuchando este servicio, deberá contratarlo. para
suscribirse vaya a
www.siriusxm.com/internetradio con su
ordenador.
Utilice q/w para seleccionar “Sign In”, y luego
pulse ENTER.
Si ya tiene una cuenta SIRIUS, puede acceder
seleccionando “Sign In”. Escriba su nombre de
usuario y contraseña en la pantalla de teclado
que aparece a continuación o en la configuración
web. Si no sabe su nombre de usuario o la
contraseña, llame a Sirius XM al número (888)
539-7474 para solicitar asistencia.
Consejo
• Si desea utilizar múltiples cuentas de usuario,
consulte “Uso de múltiples cuentas” (➔ página 1). Se
puede iniciar sesión desde la pantalla “Users”.
Cuando se suscriba, recibirá un nombre de usuario y
una contraseña que deberá introducir en el receptor
de AV.
■ Utilización de la pantalla de teclado
1. Utilice q/w/e/r y ENTER para introducir su
nombre de usuario y su contraseña.
2. Seleccione “OK”.
3. Pulse ENTER. Aparecerá la pantalla
“Confirm your entries”.
4. Pulse ENTER.
Aparecerá “Please wait...” y después la pantalla
“SiriusXM Internet Radio”, que muestra la
categoría disponible para la selección.
Para poder utilizar SiriusXM Internet Radio, el
receptor de AV debe estar conectado a internet. Para
usar el mando a distancia, siga este procedimiento:
2
Utilice q/w para seleccionar la categoría y
luego pulse ENTER.
Aparece una pantalla con una lista de emisoras
de la categoría seleccionada.
Es-4
3
Utilice q/w para seleccionar la emisora
deseada y luego pulse ENTER.
Aparecerá la pantalla de reproducción de la
emisora seleccionada y ahora usted podrá
escuchar SiriusXM Internet Radio.
Puede controlar las pistas con los botones del
mando a distancia.
Botones activados: 2, 3, 7, 6
■ Elementos del menú
Add to My Favorites:
Añade una emisora a la lista Mis favoritos.
Las suscripciones a SiriusXM Internet Radio se
venden por separado y se rigen por las condiciones
de Sirius (consulte www.sirius.com). Lea
atentamente este acuerdo antes de comprar la
suscripción. Sirius, XM y todas las marcas y logotipos
relacionados son marcas comerciales de Sirius XM
Radio Inc. y sus filiales. Todos los derechos
reservados.
Uso de Internet Radio
Uso de Last.fm Internet Radio
1
Last.fm es un servicio musical que sabe lo que le
gusta...
Su nuevo receptor de AV Onkyo es muy inteligente.
Si tiene una cuenta gratuita de Last.fm, hará un
seguimiento de todas las canciones que acaba de
escuchar. Cuando visite el sitio web de Last.fm,
podrá ver listas personales de la música que ha
disfrutado, compartirlas con sus amigos y también
ver lo que les gusta a ellos.
■ Utilización de la pantalla de teclado
1. Utilice q/w/e/r y ENTER para introducir su
nombre de usuario y su contraseña.
2. Seleccione “OK”.
3. Pulse ENTER. Aparecerá la pantalla
“Confirm your entries”.
4. Pulse ENTER.
Aparecerá “Please wait...” y después la pantalla
“Last.fm Internet Radio”.
Con sus miles de biografías, críticas y una infinita
variedad de emisoras de radio personalizadas y sin
publicidad, Last.fm es una forma excelente de
descubrir música. Cree hoy mismo una cuenta
gratuita de Last.fm en www.last.fm/join
Si se suscribe podrá disfrutar de lo mejor de Last.fm
Radio sin anuncios en su receptor de AV Onkyo sin
necesidad de un ordenador.
Recommended Radio:
Descubra nuestras interesantes recomendaciones
personalizadas que se adaptan a sus gustos en cada
momento.
Artist Radio:
Escoja cualquier artista y podrá escuchar una
emisora de radio inspirada exclusivamente en su
elección.
My Library:
Relájese y disfrute de selecciones de toda la música
que ha escuchado desde que se registró en Last.fm.
Tag Radio:
¿Polish funk? ¿Death pop? Piense en un estilo y
podrá escucharlo durante horas.
Profile:
Puede reproducir pistas de “Recently Listened
Tracks”, “Library” y “Neighbours”.
Account Info:
Confirme los datos de su cuenta.
Sign Out:
Se desconecta de su cuenta.
Utilice q/w para seleccionar “Sign in to your
account”, y luego pulse ENTER.
Si ya tiene una cuenta de Last.fm, puede
acceder a ella para seleccionar “Sign in to your
account”. Introduzca su nombre de usuario y
contraseña en la siguiente pantalla de teclado.
3
■ Elementos del menú
I Love this track:
Se guarda la información sobre la canción en el
servidor de Last.fm y aumenta la frecuencia con
la que se reproduce.
Ban this track:
Se guarda la información sobre la canción en el
servidor de Last.fm y se reduce la frecuencia con
la que se reproduce.
Add to My Favorites:
Añade una emisora a la lista Mis favoritos.
Consejo
• Si desea utilizar múltiples cuentas de usuario,
consulte “Uso de múltiples cuentas” (➔ página 1). Se
puede iniciar sesión desde la pantalla “Users”.
2
Utilice q/w para seleccionar un menú y luego
pulse ENTER.
Search Station:
Puede buscar emisoras por artista, etiquetas o
nombre de usuario.
Top Artists Station:
Puede reproducir canciones de los artistas mejor
clasificados.
Top Tags Station:
Puede reproducir canciones con las etiquetas
mejor clasificadas.
Personal Station:
Puede reproducir pistas de una emisora
personalizada (“Your Library”, “Your
Neighbourhood” y “Your Recommendations”).
Pruébelo gratis ahora mismo. Cree una cuenta y verá
por sí mismo lo que significa tener toda la música del
mundo al alcance de sus oídos. Puede consultar los
precios actualizados y toda la información que desee
en www.last.fm/subscribe
Es-5
Utilice q/w para seleccionar una emisora y
luego pulse ENTER o 1 para iniciar la
reproducción.
Se inicia la reproducción y aparece la pantalla de
reproducción.
■ Uso del control de scrobbling
Utilice q/w para seleccionar “Enable”, y luego pulse
ENTER.
*
Los servicios de radio por Internet suministrados por
terceros pueden cancelarse con o sin aviso previo.
Es posible que los servicios de radio por Internet no estén
disponibles en algunas zonas.
Uso de Internet Radio
Uso de Slacker Personal Radio
1
Si no tiene una cuenta, cree una en el sitio web
de Slacker (www.slacker.com) con su
ordenador.
Si ya tiene una cuenta de Slacker, seleccione
“Sign in to your account” y pulse ENTER.
Aparecerá la pantalla de teclado. Puede
introducir información desde el mando a
distancia o desde el teclado de la unidad
principal.
2
Si no hay errores en la información que ha
introducido, utilice q/w/e/r para seleccionar
“OK” y luego pulse ENTER.
Aparecerá una pantalla de confirmación de la
información de la cuenta.
3
Si no tiene una cuenta, seleccione “Access
without Sign In” y pulse ENTER para utilizar
una versión restringida del servicio.
Tenga en cuenta que el uso estará restringido.
Consejo
• Si desea utilizar múltiples cuentas de usuario,
consulte “Uso de múltiples cuentas” (➔ página 1). Se
puede iniciar sesión desde la pantalla “Users”.
4
Utilice q/w para seleccionar un menú y luego
pulse ENTER.
Para salir, utilice q/w para seleccionar “Sign out”
en esta pantalla y luego pulse ENTER.
5
Utilice q/w para seleccionar una emisora y
luego pulse ENTER o 1 para iniciar la
reproducción de la emisora.
Aparecerá la pantalla de reproducción.
6
Puede controlar las pistas con los botones del
mando a distancia.
Botones activados: 1, 3, 2, 6
■ Elementos del menú
Rate Song as Favorite:
Guarda información en el servidor, haciendo que
sea más probable que la canción se vuelva a
reproducir.
Ban Song:
Guarda información en el servidor, haciendo que
sea menos probable que la canción se vuelva a
reproducir.
Ban Artist:
Guarda información en el servidor, haciendo que
sea menos probable que las canciones de este
artista se vuelvan a reproducir.
Mark Favorite:
Añade la emisora que se está reproduciendo
actualmente a los favoritos.
Unmark Favorite:
Elimina la emisora que se está reproduciendo
actualmente de los favoritos.
Add song to Library:
Añade la canción que se está reproduciendo
actualmente a su biblioteca.
Delete song from Library:
Elimina la canción que se está reproduciendo
actualmente de la biblioteca.
Add to My Favorites:
Añade una emisora o canción a la lista Mis
favoritos.
Es-6
Y1212-1
SN 29401478IRUS
* 2 9 4 0 1 4 7 8 I R U S *
Using Internet Radio
Using Internet Radio
Common Procedures in Internet Radio
Menu
Note
• Available services may vary depending on the region.
• Certain network service or contents available through this
device may not be accessible in case the service provider
terminates its service.
1
2
Press NET.
A list of the network services appears, and the
NET indicator lights. If it flashes, verify that the
Ethernet cable is firmly connected to the AV
receiver.
Select the desired service and press ENTER.
The top page of the selected service appears.
Using Multiple Accounts
The AV receiver supports multiple user accounts,
which means you can freely switch between several
logins. After registering user accounts, login is
performed from the “Users” screen.
1
Press MENU while the Users screen is
displayed.
The following menu items appear:
Add new user:
Remove this user:
You can either store a new user account, or
delete an existing one.
Tip
• Some of the services don’t allow the use of multiple user
accounts.
• You can store up to 10 user accounts.
• To switch between accounts you must first log out from the
current account, and log in again on the “Users” screen.
En-1
Using Last.fm Internet Radio ........................ 2
Using Internet Radio
Using Last.fm Internet Radio
1
Last.fm is a music service that learns what you
love...
Your new Onkyo AV receiver is very clever. If you
have a free Last.fm account, it will keep track of all
the songs you’ve just played. When you visit the
Last.fm website, you can see personal charts of the
music you’ve enjoyed, share them with friends and
see what they like, too.
■ Using the keyboard screen
1. Use q/w/e/r and the ENTER to enter your
user name and password.
2. Select “OK”.
3. Press ENTER. The “Confirm your entries”
screen appears.
4. Press ENTER.
“Please wait...” appears and then “Last.fm
Internet Radio” screen appears.
With thousands of biographies, reviews and an
endless choice of personalised, ad-free radio
stations, Last.fm is a great way to discover music.
Pick up your free Last.fm account today at
www.last.fm/join
UK and Germany only:
Get a subscription and you can enjoy the best of adfree Last.fm Radio on your Onkyo AV receiver without
a computer!
Recommended Radio:
Discover smart personalised recommendations that
adapt as your tastes change.
Artist Radio:
Pick any artist and we’ll play you a whole station of
music inspired by your choice.
My Library:
Sit back and enjoy selections from all the music
you’ve heard since you joined Last.fm.
Tag Radio:
Polish funk? Death pop? Think of a style and we’ll
entertain you with it for hours.
Profile:
You can play tracks from “Recently Listened
Tracks”, “Library” and “Neighbours”.
Account Info:
Confirm your account information.
Sign Out:
It signs out from your account.
Use q/w to select “Sign in to your account”,
and then press ENTER.
If you have the existing Last.fm account, you can
sign in to your account to select “Sign in to your
account”. Enter your user name and password in
the next keyboard screen.
3
■ Menu Items
I Love this track:
Track information is saved in Last.fm server, and
playback frequency increases.
Ban this track:
Track information is saved in Last.fm server, and
playback frequency reduces.
Add to My Favorites:
Adds a station to My Favorites list.
Tip
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using
Multiple Accounts” (➔ page 1). Login can be made
from the “Users” screen.
2
Use q/w to select menu and then press
ENTER.
Search Station:
You can search station by Artist, Tag, or User
Name.
Top Artists Station:
You can play tracks of top-rated artists.
Top Tags Station:
You can play tracks of top-rated tags.
Personal Station:
You can play tracks from personalized station
(“Your Library”, “Your Neighbourhood” and
“Your Recommendations”).
Start your free trial straight away when you create
your account and see for yourself what it’s like to
have the world’s music at your fingertips. Latest
prices and full information are available at
www.last.fm/subscribe
En-2
Use q/w to select a station, and press ENTER
or 1 to start playback.
Playback starts and the playback screen
appears.
Enabled buttons: 1, 2, 6
■ Using scrobbling control
Use q/w to select “Enable”, and then press ENTER.
*
Internet radio services provided by a third party may be
terminated with or without notice.
Internet radio services may not be available in some areas.
Internetradio verwenden
Internetradio verwenden
Allgemeine Verfahren bei den
Internetradio-Menüs
Verwendung mehrerer Konten
Der AV-Receiver unterstützt mehrere Nutzerkonten,
was bedeutet, dass Sie frei zwischen mehreren
Logins umschalten können. Nach der Anmeldung der
Nutzerkonten wird das Login vom „Users“ Bildschirm
aus vorgenommen.
Anmerkung
• Die verfügbaren Dienste sind länderabhängig verschieden.
• Bestimmte Netzwerkdienste oder über dieses Gerät zur
Verfügung stehende Inhalte stehen eventuell nicht zur
Verfügung, falls der Service-Anbieter seine Dienstleistung
beendet.
1
2
Drücken Sie NET.
Es erscheint eine Liste der Netzwerkdienste und
die NET-Anzeige leuchtet. Wenn sie blinkt,
überprüfen Sie ob das Ethernet-Kabel fest im AVReceiver eingesteckt ist.
Wählen Sie den gewünschten Service aus und
drücken Sie ENTER.
Die oberste Seite des ausgewählten Services
erscheint.
1
Drücken Sie MENU während der Bildschirm
des Nutzers angezeigt wird.
Das folgende Menü erscheint:
Add new user:
Remove this user:
Sie können entweder ein neues Nutzerkonto
abspeichern oder ein bestehendes löschen.
Tipp
• Einige dieser Dienstleistungen lassen keine mehrfachen
Nutzerkonten zu.
• Sie können bis zu 10 Nutzerkonten speichern.
• Um zwischen den Konten umzuschalten, müssen Sie sich
zuerst aus Ihrem aktuellen Konto ausloggen und sich dann
wieder auf dem „Users“ Bildschirm einloggen.
De-1
Verwendung von Last.fm Internet Radio ..... 2
Internetradio verwenden
Verwendung von Last.fm Internet Radio
Last.fm ist ein Musikdienst, der sich Ihre
Lieblingsmusik merkt...
Ihr neuer Onkyo AV-Receiver ist äußerst clever. Wenn Sie
ein kostenloses Last.fm-Konto eingerichtet haben, werden
darin alle kürzlich abgespielten Titel gespeichert. Wenn Sie
die Last.fm-Website besuchen, können Sie Ihre
persönlichen Charts der von Ihnen abgespielten Musik
anzeigen; teilen Sie diese mit Freunden und sehen Sie
auch, welche Musik Ihre Freunde mögen.
können. Die aktuellen Nutzungspreise und umfassende
Infos sind unter www.last.fm/subscribe erhältlich
1
Nur für Großbritannien und Deutschland:
Holen Sie sich ein Abonnement und Sie können auch
ohne Computer die besten werbefreien Last.fmRadiosender auf Ihrem Onkyo AV-Receiver hören!
Recommended Radio:
Entdecken Sie smarte, persönlich angepasste
Empfehlungen, die sich mit Ihrem Musikgeschmack
verändern.
Artist Radio:
Wählen Sie einen beliebigen Interpreten und wir
spielen für Sie einen ganzen Radiosender mit durch
Ihre Wahl inspirierter Musik.
My Library:
Lehnen Sie sich zurück und erfreuen Sie sich an
einer Auswahl aller Musik, die Sie seit Ihrer
Mitgliedschaft bei Last.fm gehört haben.
Tag Radio:
Polish Funk? Death Pop? Denken Sie an einen
Musikstil und wir unterhalten Sie stundenlang damit.
Starten Sie Ihr kostenloses Probeabo direkt wenn Sie
Ihr Konto erstellen und finden Sie selbst heraus wie es
ist, jederzeit die Musik der ganzen Welt abrufen zu
Verwenden Sie q/w, um „Sign in to your
account“ auszuwählen und dann drücken Sie
ENTER.
Wenn Sie über einen bestehenden Last.fm Konto
verfügen, können Sie sich anmelden und „Sign
in to your account“ wählen. Geben Sie Ihre Ihre
Benutzernamen und das Kennwort in der
folgenden Tastaturanzeige ein.
■ Verwendung der Tastaturanzeige
1. Verwenden Sie q/w/e/r und den ENTER, um
Ihren Nutzernamen und Passwort einzugeben.
2. Wählen Sie „OK“.
3. Drücken Sie ENTER. Die Anzeige „Confirm
your entries“ erscheint.
4. Drücken Sie ENTER.
„Please wait...“ wird angezeigt und danach
erscheint die „Last.fm Internet Radio“-Anzeige.
Mit tausenden von Biografien, Rezensionen und einer
schier endlosen Auswahl an persönlich angepassten,
werbefreien Radiosendern ist Last.fm eine großartige
Gelegenheit, um Musik zu entdecken. Holen Sie sich
Ihr kostenloses Last.fm-Konto noch heute unter
www.last.fm/join
Personal Station:
Sie können Titel aus einem persönlich
angepassten Sender wiedergeben („Your
Library“, „Your Neighbourhood“ und „Your
Recommendations“).
Profile:
Sie können Titel aus „Recently Listened Tracks“,
„Library“ und „Neighbours“ wiedergeben.
Account Info:
Bestätigen Sie Ihre Kontoinformation.
Sign Out:
Zur Abmeldung aus Ihrem Konto.
3
Tipp
• Falls Sie mehrere Nutzerkonten verwenden möchten,
schlagen Sie bitte unter „Verwendung mehrerer
Konten“ nach (➔ Seite 1). Das Login kann vom
„Users“-Bildschirm aus erfolgen.
2
Verwenden Sie q/w, um das Menü
auszuwählen und dann drücken Sie ENTER.
Search Station:
Sie können einen Sender anhand Interpreten,
Tags oder Benutzernamen suchen.
Top Artists Station:
Sie können Titel der am besten bewerteten
Interpreten wiedergeben.
Top Tags Station:
Sie können Titel der am besten bewerteten Tags
wiedergeben.
Verwenden Sie q/w, um einen Sender
auszuwählen und dann drücken Sie ENTER
oder 1 , um die Wiedergabe zu starten.
Die Wiedergabe wird gestartet und die
Wiedergabeanzeige erscheint.
Aktivierte Tasten: 1, 2, 6
■ Menüsymbole
I Love this track:
Titel-Informationen werden auf dem Last.fmServer gespeichert und die Häufigkeit der
Wiedergabe wird erhöht.
Ban this track:
Titel-Informationen werden auf dem Last.fmServer gespeichert und die Häufigkeit der
Wiedergabe wird verringert.
Add to My Favorites:
Fügt einen Sender zu meiner My Favorites Liste hinzu.
■ Scrobbling-Steuerung verwenden
Verwenden Sie q/w, um „Enable“ auszuwählen und
dann drücken Sie ENTER.
*
Von Drittparteien zur Verfügung gestellte InternetradioDienste können unter Umständen ohne Vorankündigung
eingestellt werden.
In bestimmten Gebieten sind Internetradio-Dienste
eventuell nicht verfügbar.
Y1212-1
SN 29401479IREU
* 2 9 4 0 1 4 7 9 I R E U *
Remote Control Codes
Remote Control Codes
1
/
While holding down the REMOTE MODE button to which you want to assign a
code, press and hold down [DISPLAY] (about 3 seconds).
The REMOTE MODE button/Remote indicator lights.
On Integra products, button names are capitalized. For example, “Remote Mode”
button and “Display” button.
Notes:
• Remote control codes cannot be entered for [RECEIVER] and the multi zone button.
• Only TV remote control codes can be entered for [TV].
• Except for [RECEIVER], [TV], and the multi zone button, remote control codes from any
category can be assigned for the REMOTE MODE buttons. However, these buttons also work
as input selector buttons, so choose a REMOTE MODE button that corresponds with the input
to which you connect your component. For example, if you connect your CD player to the CD
input, choose [TV/CD] when entering its remote control code.
2
Within 30 seconds, use the number buttons to enter the 5-digit remote control
code.
The REMOTE MODE button/Remote indicator flashes twice.
If the remote control code is not entered successfully, the REMOTE MODE
button/Remote indicator will flash once slowly.
Notes:
• The flashing element of the remote controller will differ according to your AV receiver’s model.
• The remote controller is preconfigured with remote controller presets of different components.
By entering a code from the Remote Control Code list, you can activate the relevant preset for
that component.
• When there are multiple codes related to one manufacturer, try and enter them one-by-one until
it matches your component.
• Depending on the model and year of your component, compatibility is not guaranteed.
• With some models, the remote controller may not not work or its compatibility may be limited
to part of the component’s functionality.
• Besides, it is not possible to add new codes to the existing remote controller presets.
• Though the provided remote control codes are correct at the time of printing, they are subject to
change by the manufacturer.
1
Remote Control Codes
Codes de télécommande
Códigos de control remoto
1
1
Tout en maintenant enfoncé le bouton REMOTE MODE auquel vous souhaitez
associer un code, pressez et maintenez enfoncé le bouton [DISPLAY] (pendant
environ 3 secondes).
Le bouton REMOTE MODE/le témoin Remote s’allume.
Les noms de boutons sont en manjuscules sur les produits Integra. Par exemple, le
bouton « Remote Mode » et le bouton « Display ».
Remarques :
• Les codes de télécommande ne peuvent pas être entrés pour [RECEIVER] et le bouton multi
zone.
• Seul les code de télécommande de téléviseurs peuvent être entrés pour [TV].
• À l’exception de [RECEIVER], [TV] et du bouton multi zone, vous pouvez affecter des codes
de télécommande de n’importe quelle catégorie pour les boutons REMOTE MODE. Cependant,
ces boutons font également office de bouton de sélecteur d’entrée : par conséquent, choisissez
un bouton REMOTE MODE correspondant à l’entrée à laquelle vous souhaitez raccorder votre
appareil. Par exemple, si vous raccordez votre lecteur CD à l’entrée CD, choisissez [TV/CD]
lorsque vous saisissez le code de télécommande.
2
Manteniendo pulsado el botón REMOTE MODE para el cual desea introducir un
código, pulse y mantenga presionado el botón [DISPLAY] (aproximadamente 3
segundos).
Se iluminará el botón REMOTE MODE/indicador Remote.
En los productos Integra, los nombres de los botones aparecen con mayúsculas. Por
ejemplo, el botón “Remote Mode” y el botón “Display”.
Notas:
• No podrán introducirse códigos de mando a distancia para [RECEIVER] y el botón multizona.
• Únicamente podrán introducirse códigos de mando a distancia de televisor para el botón [TV].
• Con la excepción de [RECEIVER], [TV] y el botón multizona, se pueden asignar códigos de
mando a distancia de cualquier categoría a los botones de REMOTE MODE. No obstante, estos
botones también pueden funcionar como botones de selector de entrada; por tanto, seleccione
un botón REMOTE MODE que se corresponda con la entrada a la cual está conectado el
componente. Por ejemplo, si conecta un reproductor de CD a la entrada de CD, seleccione
[TV/CD] cuando introduzca su código de mando a distancia.
2
Vous disposez de 30 secondes pour saisir le code de télécommande à cinq chiffres
à l’aide des boutons numérotés.
Le bouton REMOTE MODE/le témoin Remote clignote deux fois.
Si le code de télécommande n’a pas été saisi correctement le bouton REMOTE
MODE/l’indicateur Remote ne clignote qu’une seule fois.
Remarques :
Antes de que transcurran 30 segundos, utilice los botones numéricos para
introducir el código de mando a distancia de 5 dígitos.
El botón REMOTE MODE/indicador Remote parpadeará dos veces.
Si el código de mando a distancia no se introduce correctamente, el botón REMOTE
MODE/indicador Remote parpadeará una vez despacio.
Notas:
• El parpadeo del mando distancia será distinto según el modelo de receptor de AV.
• El mando a distancia está preconfigurado con los ajustes predeterminados de los distintos
componentes. Al introducir un código de la lista de códigos del mando a distancia se puede
activar el ajuste predeterminado de ese componente.
• Cuando hay múltiples códigos relacionados con un fabricante, pruebe a introducirlos uno a uno
hasta que coincida con su componente.
• Dependiendo del modelo y el año de su componente, la compatibilidad no está garantizada.
• Con algunos modelos, es posible que el mando a distancia no funcione o que su compatibilidad
esté limitada a una parte de las funciones del componente.
• Además, no es posible añadir nuevos códigos a los ajustes predeterminados existentes del
mando a distancia.
• Los códigos de mando a distancia suministrados son correctos en el momento de la impresión,
pero el fabricante puede realizar cambios.
• L’élément clignotant de la télécommande différera selon le modèle de votre ampli-tuner AV.
• La télécommande est préconfigurée avec des préréglages de télécommande de différents
appareils. En entrant un code de la liste des codes de télécommandes, vous pouvez activer le
préréglage approprié pour cet appreil.
• Quand il y a de multiples codes liés à un fabricant, essayez-les et entrez-les un par un jusqu’à ce
que cela corresponde à votre appareil.
• Selon le modèle et l’année de votre appareil, la compatibilité n’est pas garantie.
• Avec certains modèles, la télécommande peut ne pas fonctionner ou sa compatibilité peut être
limitée à une partie de la fonctionnalité de l’appareil.
• En outre, il n’est pas possible d’ajouter de nouveaux codes aux préréglages de télécommande
existants.
• Bien que les codes de télécommande fournis soient corrects au moment de l’impression de la
liste, ils sont susceptibles d’être modifiés par le fabricant.
2
Remote Control Codes
Codici del telecomando
Fernbedienungscodes
1
1
Tenendo premuto il tasto REMOTE MODE al quale si desidera assegnare il
codice, premere e tenere premuto [DISPLAY] (per circa 3 secondi).
Il tasto REMOTE MODE/l'indicatore Remote si accende.
Sui prodotti Integra, i nomi dei tasti sono scritti con l'iniziale maiuscola. Ad esempio,
tasto “Remote Mode” e tasto “Display”.
Note:
• I codici di controllo del telecomando non possono essere inseriti per [RECEIVER] e i tasti multi
zona.
• Per [TV] è possibile immettere solo codici telecomando del televisore.
• Tranne che per [RECEIVER], [TV], e per il tasto multi zona, è possibile assegnare codici di
controllo di ogni categoria per i tasti REMOTE MODE. Tuttavia, tali tasti fungono anche da
tasti del selettore d'ingresso, quindi scegliere un tasto REMOTE MODE che corrisponda
all'ingresso al quale viene collegato il dispositivo. Per esempio, se si collega il lettore CD
all'ingresso CD, scegliere il [TV/CD] quando si immette il relativo codice telecomando.
2
Halten Sie die REMOTE MODE-Taste gedruckt, fur die Sie den Code eingeben
mochten, und drucken Sie (ca. 3 Sekunden lang) die [DISPLAY]-Taste.
Die REMOTE MODE-Taste/Remote-Anzeige leuchtet.
Bei den Integra-Produkten werden die Namen der Tasten groß geschrieben. Zum
Beispiel „Remote Mode“ (Fernbedienungsmodus)-Taste und „Display“-Taste.
Hinweise:
• Der Fernbedienungscode kann nicht [RECEIVER] und der Multi-Zonen-Taste zugeordnet
werden.
• Der Taste [TV] können nur Fernbedienungscodes für einen Fernseher zugeordnet werden.
• Abgesehen von [RECEIVER], [TV] und der Multi-Zone-Taste, können die
Fernbedienungscodes jeder Kategorie den REMOTE MODE-Tasten zugewiesen werden.
Allerdings dienen diese Tasten auch als Quellenwahltasten. Wählen Sie also nach Möglichkeit
eine REMOTE MODE-Taste, die dem Eingang zugeordnet ist, an den Sie die betreffende Quelle
angeschlossen haben. Wenn Sie z.B. einen CD-Player an den CD-Eingang anschließen, sollten
Sie [TV/CD] wenn Sie den Fernbedienungscode eingeben.
Entro 30 secondi utilizzare i tasti numerici per inserire il codice telecomando a 5
cifre.
Il tasto REMOTE MODE/l'indicatore Remote lampeggia due volte.
Se il codice telecomando non viene inserito correttamente, il tasto REMOTE
MODE/l'indicatore Remote lampeggia lentamente una volta.
Note:
2
• L'elemento lampeggiante del telecomando varia a seconda del modello del ricevitore AV.
• Il telecomando è preconfigurato con preselezioni per diversi apparecchi. Inserendo un codice
dall'elenco dei codici telecomando, è possibile attivare la relativa preselezione per tale
apparecchio.
• Se sono presenti più codici relativi allo stesso produttore, provare a inserirli uno a uno finché
non si arrivi al codice corrispondente dell'apparecchio.
• A seconda del modello e dell'anno dell'apparecchio, la compatibilità non è garantita.
• Con alcuni modelli, il telecomando può non funzionare o la sua compatibilità può essere limitata
a una parte della funzionalità dell'apparecchio.
• Inoltre, non è possibile aggiungere nuovi codici alle preselezioni esistenti del telecomando.
• I codici telecomando specificati sono validi alla data della stampa del presente documento, ma
sono soggetti a variazioni da parte del produttore.
Geben Sie mit den Zifferntasten innerhalb von 30 Sekunden den 5-stelligen
Herstellercode ein.
Die REMOTE MODE-Taste/Remote-Anzeige blinkt zwei Mal.
Wenn der Fernbedienungscode nicht ordnungsgemäß eingegeben wurde, blinkt die
REMOTE MODE-Taste/Remote-Anzeige einmal langsam.
Hinweise:
• Das blinkende Element auf der Fernbedienung unterscheidet sich je nach AV-Receiver-Modell.
• Die Fernbedienung ist mit den Voreinstellungen der Fernbedienung der verschiedenen
Komponenten vorkonfiguriert. Indem ein Code aus der Liste der Fernbedienungscodes
eingegeben wird, können Sie die entsprechende Voreinstellung für die Komponente aktivieren.
• Wenn es mehrere Codes gibt, die sich auf einen Hersteller beziehen, versuchen Sie sie einzeln
einzugeben, bis einer mit Ihrer Komponente übereinstimmt.
• Dies hängt vom Modell und Herstellungsjahr Ihrer Komponente ab und die Kompatibilität ist
nicht garantiert.
• Es kann sein, dass bei einigen Modellen die Fernbedienung nicht funktioniert oder ihre
Kompatibilität sich auf nur auf Teile der Funktionalität der Komponente beschränkt.
• Abgesehen davon ist es nicht möglich, den bestehenden Voreinstellungen der Fernbedienung
neue Codes hinzuzufügen.
• Obwohl die angegebenen Fernbedienungscodes dem Stand bei Drucklegung entsprechen, sind
Änderungen durch den Hersteller vorbehalten.
3
Remote Control Codes
Afstandsbedieningscodes
Fjärrstyrningskoder
1
1
Houd terwijl u de REMOTE MODE toets ingedrukt houdt waarvoor u een code
wilt toewijzen de [DISPLAY] toets ingedrukt (ongeveer 3 seconden).
De toets REMOTE MODE (afstandsbedieningsmodus) / Het indicatielampje
afstandsbediening gaat branden.
Op producten van Integra staan de namen van de toetesn in hoofdletters. Bijvoorbeeld,
de toetsen “Remote Mode” en “Display”.
Opmerkingen:
• Fjärrkontrollkoder kan inte anges för knapparna [RECEIVER] och flerzonsknappen.
• Endast fjärrkontrollkoder för tv kan anges för [TV].
• Förutom [RECEIVER], [TV] och flerzonsknappen, kan fjärrkontrollkoder för vilken som helst
kategori tilldelas för knapparna REMOTE MODE. Dessa knappar fungerar dock även som
ingångväljarknappar, så använd en knapp för REMOTE MODE som motsvarar ingången som
du ansluter utrustningen till. Till exempel, om du ansluter din CD-spelare till CD-ingången ska
du välja [TV/CD] när du anger dess fjärrkontrollkod.
• Er kunnen geen afstandsbedieningscodes worden ingevoerd voor [RECEIVER] en de multi
zone-toets.
• Alleen TV afstandsbedieningscodes kunnen worden ingevoerd voor [TV].
• Behalve voor [RECEIVER], [TV] en de multi zone-toets, kunnen afstandsbedieningscodes
vanuit elke categorie worden toegewezen aan de REMOTE MODE toetsen. Deze toetsen
werken overigens ook als ingangsselectortoetsen, kies dus een REMOTE MODE toets die
overeenkomt met de ingang waarop u uw component wilt aansluiten. Kies indien u bijvoorbeeld
uw CD-speler aansluit op de CD-ingang de [TV/CD] toets bij het invoeren van de
afstandsbedieningscode.
2
Håll ned knappen för det REMOTE MODE som du vill tilldela en kod samtidigt
som du trycker och håller ned [DISPLAY] (i cirka 3 sekunder).
REMOTE MODE-knapp/Fjärrindikatorlampa.
På Integra-produkter, är knappnamnens begynnelsebokstav en versal. Till exempel,
”Fjärrläge”-knapp och ”Display”-knapp.
Anmärkningar:
2
Gebruik binnen 30 seconden de cijfertoetsen om de 5-cijferige
afstandsbedieningscode in te voeren.
De toets REMOTE MODE (afstandsbedieningsmodus) / Het indicatielampje
afstandsbediening knippert tweemaal.
Indien de afstandsbedieningscode niet met succes wordt ingevoerd, zal de toets
REMOTE MODE/Remote-indicator eenmaal traag knipperen.
Opmerkingen:
Använd sifferknapparna för att ange den femsiffriga koden inom 30 sekunder.
REMOTE MODE-knapp/Fjärrindikatorlampa blinkar två gånger.
Om fjärrkontrollkoden inte ställdes in, blinkar REMOTE MODEknappen/fjärrindikatorn långsamt en gång.
Anmärkningar:
• Det blinkande elementet på fjärrkontrollen skiljer sig åt beroende på din modell av AV-receiver.
• Fjärrkontrollen har förkonfigurerats med förvalda kanaler på fjärrkontrollen för olika
komponenter. Genom att ange en kod från fjärrkontrollkodlistan, kan du aktivera relevanta
förvalda kanaler för den utrustningen.
• När det finns flera olika koder för en tillverkare ska du försöka att ange dem en och en tills de
stämmer överens med din utrustning.
• Beroende på utrustningens modell och årgång, går det inte att garantera kompatibilitet.
• På vissa modeller kan det hända att fjärrkontrollen inte fungerar eller så kan dess kompatibilitet
vara begränsad till en del av utrustningens funktion.
• Dessutom går det inte att lägga till nya koder till fjärrkontrollens existerande förvalda kanaler.
• Även om erhållna fjärrkontrollkoder är korrekta vid tryckningen, kan de ändras av tillverkaren.
• Het knippergedeelte van de afstandsbediening zal verschillen ten opzichte van het model van
uw AV-receiver.
• De afstandsbediening is voorgeprogrammeerd met voorkeuzetoetsen van verschillende
componenten. Door het invullen van een code uit de afstandsbediening codelijst kunt u de
voorkeuzetoets voor die component activeren.
• Wanneer er meerdere codes gerelateerd zijn aan één fabrikant, probeer deze dan een voor een
totdat de juiste code overeenkomt met uw component.
• Afhankelijk van het model en het bouwjaar van uw component is de compatibiliteit niet
gegarandeerd.
• Bij sommige modellen werkt de afstandsbediening mogelijk niet of is de compatibiliteit ervan
beperkt tot een deel van de functionaliteit van de component.
• Daarnaast is het niet mogelijk om nieuwe codes aan de bestaande voorkeuzetoetsen van de
afstandsbediening toe te voegen.
• Hoewel de gegeven afstandsbedieningscodes correct zijn op het moment van afdrukken, kunnen
deze door de fabrikant gewijzigd worden.
4
Remote Control Codes
遙控代碼
遥控代码
1
1
在按住想指定編碼的 REMOTE MODE （遙控模式）按鈕時，同時按住
[DISPLAY] （顯示）（約 3 秒）。
REMOTE MODE （遙控模式）按鈕 / 遙控指示燈亮起。
在 Integra 系列產品上，按鈕名稱為大寫。 例如，「Remote Mode」（遙控模式）
按鈕和 「Display」（顯示）按鈕。
注意：
• [RECEIVER （接收机）] 和多区域按钮不能输入遥控编码。
• 只能为 [TV （电视）] 输入电视遥控编码。
• 除 [RECEIVER （接收机）]、[TV （电视）] 和多区域按钮外，不能为 REMOTE MODE （遥
控模式）按钮指定任何类别的遥控编码。 但是，这些按钮仍可用作输入选择器按钮，因
此，选择与设备所要连接的输入端对应的 REMOTE MODE（遥控模式） 按钮。 例如，如果
要将 CD 播放机连接到 CD 输入端，应在输入遥控编码时选择 [TV/CD （电视 /CD）]。
• [RECEIER] （接收機）和多區域按鈕不能輸入遙控編碼。
• 您只能為 [TV] （電視）輸入電視遙控編碼。
• 除 [RECEIVER] （接收機）、[TV] （電視）和多區域按鈕外，您可針對 REMOTE MODE
（遙控模式）按鈕指定任何類別的遙控編碼。 但是，這些按鈕仍可用作為輸入選擇器按
鈕，因此，請選擇與您設備所連接輸入接口對應的 REMOTE MODE 按鈕。 例如，如果
要將 CD 播放機連接到 CD 輸入源上，則需在輸入遙控編碼時選擇 [TV/CD]。
2
按住想指定编码的 REMOTE MODE （遥控模式）按钮的同时，按住 [DISPLAY
（显示）] （大约 3 秒钟）。
REMOTE MODE （遥控模式）按钮 / 遥控指示灯亮起。
Integra 产品上的按钮名称单词首字母大写。例如，“Remote Mode （遥控模
式）”按钮和 “Display （显示）”按钮。
注意：
2
在 30 秒內，使用數字按鈕輸入 5 位數的遙控編碼。
REMOTE MODE （遙控模式）按鈕 / 遙控指示燈閃爍兩次。
如果無法成功輸入遙控編碼，REMOTE MODE （遙控模式）按鈕 / 遙控指示燈
會慢慢地閃爍一次。
注意：
在 30 秒内，使用数字按钮输入 5 位数的遥控编码。
REMOTE MODE （遥控模式）按钮 / 遥控指示灯闪烁两次。
如果不能顺利输入遥控编码，REMOTE MODE （遥控模式）按钮 / 遥控指示灯会
缓慢闪烁一次。
注意：
• 根据 AV 接收机产品类型的不同，遥控器闪烁元素将会不同。
• 遥控器采用不同设备的遥控器预设进行预配置。通过从遥控器编码列表输入编码，便
可激活相应设备的相关预设。
• 单个制造商关联多个编码时，请尝试逐个输入，直至符合当前设备。
• 根据设备的产品类型和年份的不同，无法保证兼容性。
• 对于某些产品类型，遥控器可能无法工作或其兼容性可能受到部分设备功能性的限制。
• 此外，可能无法将新的编码追加到现有的遥控器预设。
• 尽管付印时所提供的遥控编码是正确的，但制造商会随时更改。
• 視您的 AV 接收機型號而定，遙控器的閃爍元件會有不同。
• 遙控器已預先設定有不同設備的遙控器預設值。 透過輸入遙控編碼清單中的編碼，您
可啟用該設備的相關預設值。
• 當有多個編碼與單一製造商相關時，請嘗試一個接著一個輸入，直到與您的設備對應
為止。
• 視設備的型號和年份而定，並不保證與本公司產品相容。
• 在某些型號上，遙控器可能無法作用，或是其相容性限於部份設備功能。
• 除此之外，您無法新增編碼至現有的遙控器預設值。
• 雖然所提供之遙控編碼在本文件列印時為正確，製造商仍可能會對其作出修改。
5
Remote Control Codes
Dedicated Onkyo Receiver
Cable Set Top Box
Default
62503
mio TV
02802
Toshiba
01509
Samsung
Zone 2
62506
Motorola
UPC
01582
Scientific Atlanta
01877, 01982
Zone 3
62507
01376, 00858, 01562,
01982, 01998, 02378
Verizon
02378
Shaw
01376
Moxi
02187
Videotron
01877
Suddenlink
01376, 01877
NEC
01496
Virgin Media
01068, 01060
Thomson
01582
Cable Set Top Box
Cable Set Top Box
Cable/PVR Combination
01877
ADB
02254, 02769
Neuf TV
03107
Visiopass
00817
Time Warner
01376, 01877, 02187
Aon
02769
Noos
00817
VTR
01376
UPC
01582
Arris
02187
NTL
01068, 01060
WideOpenWest
01877
Videotron
01877
AT&T
00858
Numericable
02767
Ziggo
VTR
01376
Bright House
01376, 01877
Ono
01068, 01562
00660, 01666, 02015,
02142, 02447, 02774
BT Vision
02294
Optus
01060
Cable & Wireless
01068
Orange
00817
Cable/PVR Combination
Cable One
01376, 01877
Pace
Arris
02187
IPTV
Cablecom
01582
01376, 01877, 01068,
01060, 01982
Bright House
01376, 01877
ADB
Cablevision
01376, 01877
Panasonic
01488, 01982
Cable One
01376, 01877
Aon
02769
Charter
01376, 01877, 02187
Philips
Cablevision
01376, 01877
AT&T
00858
Cisco
01877, 00858, 01982,
02345, 02378
00817, 01582, 02294,
02767
Charter
01376, 01877, 02187
Pioneer
01877, 01500
BT Vision
02294
Cisco
01877, 01982
01376
02657
00817, 00660, 01666,
02015, 02447
RCN
Canal+
Comcast
Rogers
01877
01376, 01877, 01982,
02187
Cisco
00858, 02345, 02378
00817
01385
01376, 01877, 01982,
02187
Sagem
Kreatel
Cox
01376, 01877
Samsung
01877, 01060, 01666,
02015, 02774
mio TV
02802
Digeo
02187
Motorola
Freebox
01482
01877, 00858, 01982,
02345
01376, 00858, 01998,
02378
Humax
02142, 03051, 03053
Neuf TV
03107
Insight
01376, 01877
Pace
02657
J:COM
03051, 03053
Scientific Atlanta
00858, 02345
Knology
01877
SFR
03107
Mediacom
01376, 01877
SingTel
01998, 02802
Motorola
01376
TeliaSonera
01385
Moxi
02187
Telus
02345
Numericable
02767
Thomson
02769
Pace
01877
Verizon
02378
Panasonic
01982
Com Hem
Comcast
Cox
01376, 01877
Daeryung
01877
Digeo
02187
DX Antenna
01500
SFR
France Telecom
00817
Shaw
Freebox
01482
SingTel
01998, 02802
Fujitsu
01497
Sony
01460
Humax
00660, 02142, 02447,
03051, 03053
Stofa
Suddenlink
01376, 01877
Insight
01376, 01877
Sumitomo
01500
J:COM
03051, 03053
Telewest
Knology
01877
TeliaSonera
01385
Kreatel
01385
Telus
02345
Macab
00817
Thomson
01582, 01982, 02769
Mediacom
01376, 01877
Time Warner
01376, 01877, 02187
Scientific Atlanta
03107
01376
02015
01068
6
WideOpenWest
01877
Ziggo
02142
02254, 02769
Philips
01582, 02767
IPTV/PVR Combination
Pioneer
01877
ADB
02769
Rogers
01877
Aon
02769
Remote Control Codes
IPTV/PVR Combination
CD
AT&T
00858
Goldmund
70157
Restek
70157
BT Vision
02294
Grundig
70157
Revox
70157
Cisco
00858, 02345, 02378
Harman/Kardon
70157
Rotel
70157
Cassette Deck
Kreatel
01385
Hitachi
70032
SAE
70157
Aiwa
70157
Arcam
40076
40029
Motorola
00858, 02378
Integra
CD
71817, 70101
Sansui
MD
Yamaha
70490
40029
Neuf TV
03107
JVC
70072
SAST
70157
Audiolab
Philips
02294
Kenwood
70626, 70157, 70036
Siemens
70157
Carver
40029
40076
Scientific Atlanta
00858
Krell
70157
Silsonic
70036
Denon
SFR
03107
Linn
70157
Simaudio
70157
Grundig
40029
40029
40070
Verizon
02378
CD
Loewe
70157
Sonic Frontiers
70157
Harman/Kardon
Magnavox
70157
Sony
70490, 70000
Inkel
70157
JVC
40244
40070
Marantz
70626, 70029, 70157
Sylvania
Advantage
70032
Matsui
70157
TAG McLaren
70157
Kenwood
AH!
70157
MCS
70029
Tandy
70032
Magnavox
40029
Aiwa
70157
Memorex
70032
Technics
70029, 70303
Marantz
40029
Arcam
70157
Meridian
70157
Thorens
70157
Myryad
40029
Atoll Electronique
70157
70157
Onkyo
42157
Audio Research
70157
70626
Optimus
40027
Audiolab
70157
Mission
70157
Universum
70157
Philips
40029
Audiomeca
70157
Myryad
70157
Victor
70072
Pioneer
40027
Audioton
70157
NAD
70000, 70721
Wards
70000, 70032, 70157
Polk Audio
40029
AVI
70157
Naim
70157
Yamaha
70490, 70032, 70036
Radiola
40029
Balanced Audio
Technology
70157
70157
RCA
40027
Revox
40029
Cairn
70157
California Audio Labs 70029, 70303
Cambridge
70157
Cambridge Audio
70157
Carver
70157
CCE
70157
Cyrus
70157
Denon
70626, 70766
DKK
70000
DMX Electronics
70157
Dynaco
70157
Genexxa
70000, 70032
Micromega
Miro
70157
Thule Audio
70000
NSM
70157
Onkyo
71817
Traxdata
Zonda
70000, 70032
CD-R
Panasonic
70029, 70303
Denon
70626, 70766
Sony
40243
Philips
70626, 70157
JVC
70072
Thorens
40029
70032, 70101
Kenwood
70626
Victor
40244
Polk Audio
70157
Marantz
70626
Wards
40027, 40029
Primare
70157
Onkyo
71323
Yamaha
40097
Proton
70157
Philips
70626
QED
70157
Sony
70000
Quad
70157
Optimus
Pioneer
MD
Sansui
40029
Accessory
Apple
81115
Jamo
82228
Quasar
70029
Radiola
70157
Onkyo
70868
Logitech
82182
70032
Sony
70490, 70000
Onkyo
82990, 81993, 82351
RCA
7
Remote Control Codes
Accessory
Polk Audio
82228
Video - Accessory
Satellite Set Top Box
Satellite Set Top Box
Satellite Set Top Box
Amstrad
00847, 01175, 01662,
01693
CGV
01413, 01567
Durabrand
01284
Chess
01334, 01626
Echostar
Ansonic
02418
CityCom
01176
00775, 00853, 01323,
01409, 02527
Clatronic
01413
Eco-Star
01413
01631
ADB
02254, 02769
Arnion
01300
Aon
02769
ASCI
01334
Clayton
01626
Edision
Apple
02615
AssCom
00853
Com Hem
01176, 01915
Elap
01413, 01567
AT&T
00858
Astro
00173, 01100
Comag
01413
Elbe
02418
BT Vision
02294
Atlanta
02418
Comsat
01413
Energy Sistem
01631, 02418
Canal+
02657
Atsat
01300
Coship
01457
Engel
01251
Cisco
00858, 02345, 02378
AtSky
01334
Crown
01284
EuroLine
01251
Kreatel
01385
Audiola
02418
CS
01631
Europhon
01334
mio TV
02802
Aurora
00879, 00642, 01433
Cyfra+
01409
Europsat
01413, 01611
Motorola
01376, 00858, 01998,
02378
Austar
00879, 00642, 01259
00853, 02527
Expressvu
00775
Avanit
01631
D-box
00723, 01114
Fagor
01611
Neuf TV
03107
Awa
02418
Dantax
01626
Ferguson
01291
Pace
02657
Axil
01413, 01457, 02418
02418
Finlux
01626
Philips
02294
Axitronic
01626
Dgtec
01242, 01631, 02418
Fly Com
01457
Scientific Atlanta
00858, 02345
Balmet
01457
02418
FMD
01413, 01457
SFR
03107
Bell ExpressVu
00775
Dick Smith
Electronics
SingTel
01998, 02802
Belson
02418
TeliaSonera
01385
Big Sat
Telus
02345
Black Diamond
Thomson
02769
Verizon
02378
Cyfrowy Polsat
Denver
Foxtel
00879, 01176, 01356
Digi Raum Electronics 01176
Freesat
02408
01457
Digiality
01334
Fuba
00173, 01251
01284
Digifusion
01645
Galaxis
00853, 00879
Blaupunkt
00173
Digihome
01284
General Satellite
01176
Boshmann
01413, 01631
DigiLogic
01284
Globo
01251, 01334, 01626
Boston
01251
DigiQuest
01300, 01457, 01631
GOI
00775
Boxer
01458
Digisky
01457
Gold Box
00853
British Sky
Broadcasting
00847, 01175, 01662
DigitalBox
01100, 01631
Gold Vision
01631
Satellite Set Top Box
Digiwave
01631
GoldMaster
01334
BskyB
00847, 01175, 01662
@sat
01300
DirecTV
01377, 00099
Goodmans
01284, 01291
Bush
@Sky
01334
01284, 01291, 01626,
01645
Dish Network
00775
Gradiente
00099, 00887
Acoustic Solutions
01284
Canal Digital
00853, 01334
Dishpro
00775
Grandin
01626
ADB
00642, 00887, 01259
Canal Satellite
00853, 02657
DishTV
01300
Grocos
01409, 01457
Akura
01626
Canal+
00853, 02657
DRE
01176
Grundig
01284
CanalSat
00853, 02657
01237
00847, 00853, 00173,
00879, 01284, 01291
Alba
Dream Multimedia
Centrex
01457
02280, 02418
02418
01334
DSE
Haier
Allvision
00879, 00642, 01433
Hallo
01626
Receiver
Onkyo
52503
DSTV
8
Remote Control Codes
Satellite Set Top Box
Satellite Set Top Box
Satellite Set Top Box
Satellite Set Top Box
Hama
01567
Leiko
01626
Pace
Sat Industrie
01611
Hanseatic
01100
Lemon
01334
SAT+
01409
Hirschmann
00173
Lenoxx
01611
Hitachi
01284
Linsar
01284
00847, 00853, 00887,
01175, 01323, 01356,
01423, 01662, 01693,
01850, 02059, 02060,
02211, 02657
Hornet
01300
Listo
01626
Pacific
01284
Schaub Lorenz
02418
HTS
00775
Lodos
01284
Palcom
01409, 01611
Schneider
01206, 01251
Humax
01377, 01176, 01427,
01675, 01808, 01882,
01915, 02144, 02408,
02616
Logik
01284
Panasat
00879, 01433
Schwaiger
01334, 01457, 01631
Macab
00853
Panasonic
00847, 01304, 01404,
03099
Sedea Electronique
01206, 01626
SEG
01251, 01284, 01626
ID Digital
01176
ID Sat
01334
ILLUSION sat
01631
Imperial
01195, 01334
Indovision
00887
Satplus
01100
SatyCon
01631
Manhattan
01300
Maspro
00173
Panda
00173
Servimat
01611
Matsui
00173, 01284, 01626
Pass
01567
ServiSat
01251
Maximum
01334
peeKTon
01457, 02418
Shark
01631
Mediabox
00853
Philips
Sherwood
01409
Mediacom
01206
Siemens
MediaSat
00853
00099, 00853, 00173,
01114, 00887, 00133,
02211
00173, 01334, 01626,
02418
Medion
01334, 01626
Phoenix
02418
Sigmatek
02418
Pino
01334
SKY
Pioneer
00853, 01308
PMB
01611
00099, 00847, 00887,
01175, 01662, 01693,
01850, 02754
00173
Premiere
00723
SKY Brazil
00887
01251
Pro Basic
00853
SKY Deutschland
02754
Movistar
02527, 02761
Proline
01284
SKY Italia
00853, 01693, 01850
Multichoice
00879, 00642, 01433,
02059, 02060
QNS
01404
SKY New Zealand
02211
RCA
01291
SKY PerfecTV!
02299, 02616, 03099
01251
Sky XL
01251
iNETBOX
01237
Inno Hit
01626
Innova
00099
inVion
02418
iotronic
01413
ISkyB
00887
ITT
02418
ITT Nokia
00723
Jadeworld
00642
Jaeger
01334
MySky
01356, 01693, 01850
Regal
JVC
00775
NEOTION
01334
Roadstar
00853
Sky+
01175, 01662
KabelBW
01195, 01882, 01915
Netsat
00099, 00887
Rollmaster
01413
Skymaster
Kaon
01300
Nikko
00723
Rownsonic
01567
01334, 01409, 01567,
01611
Kathrein
00173, 01561, 01567
Nokia
00853, 00723, 01223
SAB
01251, 01300, 01631
Skymax
01413
Nordmende
01611
Sagem
Kenwood
00853
MegaSat
01631
Metronic
01334, 01413, 01631,
02418
Metz
Moserbaer
01114
Koenig
01631
NPG
01631
Saivod
02418
Kreiling
01626
Onn
01284
Samsung
01377, 00853, 01175,
01206, 01458, 01662,
02986
Kreiselmeyer
00173
Optex
01413, 01611, 01626
L&S Electronic
01334
Optus
00879, 01356
Orbis
01334
Orbitech
01100, 01195
LaSAT
Lava
00173
01631
9
Skyplus
01175, 01334
SkySat
01100
Skyvision
01334
SM Electronic
01409
Smart
01404, 01413, 01631
Sansui
01251
SmartVision
01457
Sanyo
01626
Sony
Sat Control
01300
00847, 00853, 01558,
02299
Remote Control Codes
Satellite Set Top Box
Satellite Set Top Box
SAT/PVR Combination
SAT/PVR Combination
Star
00887
UBC
00642
BskyB
01175, 01662
Schneider
01206
Stream System
01300
UEC
00879, 01356
Bush
01645
Sedea Electronique
01206
Strong
00853, 00879, 01284,
01300, 01409, 01626,
02418
United
01251, 01626, 02418
Canal Satellite
02657
SKY
Unitymedia
01882
Canal+
02657
01175, 01662, 01693,
01850, 02754
Universum
00173, 01251
CanalSat
02657
SKY Deutschland
02754
01693, 01850
02211
Sunny
01300
Sunstar
00642
Supernova
00887
Supratech
01413
Systec
01334
Sytech
02418
TBoston
01251, 02418
Teac
01251
Technical
01626
Technika
01284
TechniSat
01100, 01195
Technosat
01206
Techwood
01251, 01284, 01626
TELE System
01251, 01409, 01611
Telefonica
02527, 02761
Telestar
01100, 01195, 01251,
01334, 01626
Televes
01300, 01334
Televisa
00887
Tevion
01409
Thomson
00847, 00853, 01175,
01046, 01291, 01662
Tonna
01611
Topfield
01206
Toshiba
01284
Variosat
00173
Cyfrowy Polsat
02527
SKY Italia
VEA
02418
Digifusion
01645
SKY New Zealand
01300
SKY PerfecTV!
02299, 03099
01662
Vestel
01251, 01284
DigiQuest
Viasat
01195
DirecTV
01377, 00099, 20739
Sky+
Vision
01626
Dish Network
00775
Skyplus
01175, 01334
01631
Visiosat
01413, 01457
Dishpro
00775
Smart
Vitecom
01413
Dream Multimedia
01237
Sony
02299
01300
Vivax
02418
Echostar
00775, 02527
Stream System
Volcasat
02418
Edision
01631
Strong
01300
01300
Wavelength
01413
Expressvu
00775
Sunny
Wharfedale
01284
Foxtel
01356
TechniSat
01195
Humax
01176, 01427, 01675,
01808
Technosat
01206
Telefonica
02527
02418
ID Sat
01334
Telestar
01195
Xsat
00847, 01323
iNETBOX
01237
Thomson
01175, 01662
Xtreme
01300
Kaon
01300
Topfield
01206
Yakumo
01413
Kathrein
01561
Viasat
01195
Yes
00887
Maximum
01334
Xtreme
01300
Zehnder
01251, 01334, 01413,
01631
Mediacom
01206
MegaSat
01631
Television
Zinwell
02280, 02761
Movistar
02527
A.R. Systems
10556, 10037
Multichoice
02059, 02060
Accent
10037
Satellite Set Top Box
MySky
01356, 01693, 01850
Acer
11339
@sat
NEOTION
01334
Acoustic Solutions
11037, 11667
Pace
01175, 01356, 01423,
01662, 01693, 01850,
02059, 02060, 02211,
02657
Action
10650
Wisi
00173
Worldsat
01251
Woxter
01300
Trevi
01251
SAT/PVR Combination
Triax
00853, 01251, 01291,
01413, 01611, 01626,
01631
@sat
01300
Amstrad
01175, 01662, 01693
Tricolor TV
01176
Atsat
01300
Panasonic
01304, 03099
True Visions
02408
Bell ExpressVu
00775
Philips
00099
Twinner
01611
British Sky
Broadcasting
01175, 01662
Samsung
01175, 01206, 01662
Sat Control
01300
10
Addison
10653
AEG
11037, 11324
Agfaphoto
12719
Aiko
10037
Aim
10037, 10499
Remote Control Codes
Television
Akai
Television
10178, 10556, 10037,
10714, 10715, 10208,
11675
Basic Line
Akiba
10037
Akito
Akura
Alba
10037
10037
Dick Smith
Electronics
10698
Cathay
Baur
10037, 10195, 10512
CCE
10037
Digatron
10037
Beaumark
10178
11667
10037
11037
Digihome
Beijing
10208
10037
10037, 10668
10171, 10037, 10714,
10668, 11037, 11363,
11585, 11667, 11709
Centurion
Digiline
Beko
10037, 10714, 10715,
11652
Changhong
10508
Digitek
11709
11666
Digitor
10037, 10698
Clarivox
10037
Dixi
10037
Classic
10499
DL
11363
Clatronic
10037, 10714, 11324
DMTech
12001
Clayton
11037
Domeos
10668
10037
Drean
10037
10698
DSE
10698
Contec
10037
Dual
Cosmel
10037
10037, 11037, 11585,
11667
CPTEC
10625, 11363
Durabrand
10178, 10171, 10714,
11037, 11652
Crown
10037, 10714, 10668,
11037, 10715, 10208,
11652
Dux
10037
10037, 10714, 10668,
11037, 11585
11037
Allstar
10037
Anam
Anam National
10171, 10037, 11037
10037
10037, 10650
Andersson
11585
Anitech
10037
Ansonic
10037, 10668
AOC
10178, 10625, 11365
Ardem
10037, 10714
Belson
10698
Belstar
11037
Beon
10037
Berthen
10556, 10668
Bestar
10037
Bexa
12493
Black Diamond
11037
Blaupunkt
10195
Blue Sky
10556, 10037, 10625,
10714, 10668, 11037,
10715, 10499, 11324,
11363, 11652, 11709
Boca
Centrum
Chimei
Condor
Conrowa
DX Antenna
11817, 13817
11667
Dynatron
10037
D-Vision
10556, 10037
Dynex
12049
Daewoo
10178, 10556, 10037,
10634, 10499, 12098
e-motion
11709
E:max
11324
Dansai
10037, 10208
Easy Living
11666, 11709
Dantax
10714, 11037, 10715,
11652
ECE
10037
Elbe
10556, 10037
11652
Arena
10037
Boman
11324
Aristona
10556, 10037
Bork
11363
ART
Television
Casio
Alien
Amstrad
Television
10556, 10037, 10668,
11037
Cyberpix
11037
BPL
Art Mito
11585
Brandt
10625, 10714, 10560
Asberg
10037
Brimax
11709
Astra
10037
Brinkmann
10037, 10668
ATD
10698
Brionvega
10037
Datsura
10208
Atlantic
10037
Bush
10556, 10037, 10714,
10668, 11037, 10698,
10208, 11585, 11652,
11667, 12719
Electrograph
11755
Dawa
10037
Element
11886
Daytron
10037
Elfunk
11037
De Graaf
10208
ELG
10037
12140, 12209
DEC
11709
Elin
10037
Camper
10037
Decca
10037
Elite
10037
Carad
10668, 11037
Denver
10037, 11709
Emerson
Carena
10037
Desmet
10037
Carrefour
10037
Diamant
10037
10178, 10171, 10037,
10714, 10668, 11394,
11864, 11886
Cascade
10037
Diamond
10698
Audiosonic
10037, 10714, 10715
Audiovox
11564
Audioworld
10698
Aventura
10171
Axxon
10714
Baird
10208
Bang & Olufsen
10565
Barco
10556
Byd:sign
10037, 10208
11
Envision
11365, 11506
Epson
11379
Remote Control Codes
Television
Television
Television
Erres
10037
Genesis
10037
ESA
10171
Genexxa
10037
ESC
10037
GFM
10171, 11864, 11886
Euroman
10037
Godrej
11585
Europa
10037
Goldfunk
10668
Europhon
10037
GoldStar
Evesham
11248, 11667
10178, 10037, 10714,
10715
Excello
11037
Exquisit
10037
Ferguson
10037, 10625, 10560,
10195, 11037, 11585
Fidelity
10171, 10037, 10512
Finlandia
10208
Finlux
10556, 10037, 10714,
10715, 11248, 11667
Firstline
10556, 10037, 10714,
10668, 11037, 10208,
11363
Fisher
10208
Flint
10037
Formenti
10037
Fraba
10037
Friac
10037, 10499
Fujicom
11709
Fujitsu
10809
Fujitsu Siemens
10809, 11248, 11666
Funai
10171, 10714, 10668,
11037, 11394, 11666,
11817, 13817
G-Hanz
11363
Gaba
11037
Galaxi
10037
Galaxis
10037
Gateway
11755
GE
GEC
10178, 11454, 10625,
10560
10037
Goodmans
Hisense
ITV
10037
JGC
11709
10150, 10178, 10037,
10634, 11037, 10508,
10499, 10578, 11576,
11585, 11643, 11667,
11691, 12433
Jinfeng
10208
Jubilee
10556
Hitachi Fujian
10150
JVC
Hitec
10698
10650, 10653, 10508,
11428, 11601, 12271
Hoeher
10714
Kaisui
10037
10037
Karcher
10714, 11324
10556
Hitachi
10556, 10037, 10625,
10714, 10560, 10668,
10634, 11037, 10499,
11585, 11667
Television
10556, 10508, 10208,
11363, 12098
Hornyphon
Jinxing
10556, 10037, 10698
JMB
10556, 10634, 10499
Gorenje
11585
Hugoson
11666
Kathrein
Gradiente
10037
Humax
11295
Kendo
10037, 11037, 11585
10556, 10037, 10714,
10668, 11037, 10715
Kennex
11037
Kioto
10556
Hyundai
11037, 10698
Kiton
10037, 10668
Iberia
10037
KLL
10037
Graetz
Granada
Grandin
Hypson
10714
10037, 10560, 10208
10556, 10037, 10714,
10668, 11037, 10715,
11652
ICE
10037
Kneissel
10556, 10037, 10499
Grundig
10556, 10037, 10195,
11223, 11667, 12625
iLo
11394
Koenig
10037
Imperial
10037
Kolin
GVA
11363, 12098
Indiana
10037
10150, 10037, 11610,
11755
H&B
12001
Ingelen
10714
Kolster
10037
Haier
10037, 10698, 10508
Inno Hit
11037, 11585
Konka
10037, 10714
Hallmark
10178
Innova
10037
Korpel
10037
Hankook
10178
Insignia
10037
Hanseatic
10556, 10037, 10625,
10714, 10634, 10499,
12001
10171, 11423, 11564,
12049
Kosmos
Kunlun
10208
Integra
11807, 13100, 13500
L&S Electronic
10714
Interbuy
10037
Lavic
11363
Interfunk
10037, 10512
Lavis
11037
Internal
10556
Lecson
10037
Intervision
10037
Lenco
10037, 11037
Irradio
10037
Leyco
10037
IRT
10698
LG
Isukai
10037
10178, 10556, 10037,
10714, 10715, 10698,
11423, 11768, 11840,
12182, 12358, 12424,
12834
Liesenkoetter
10037
Hantarex
10037
Hantor
10037
Harwood
10037
Hauppauge
10037
HB
11324
HCM
10037
Highline
10037
Hinari
10037, 10208
Hisawa
10714
12
ITS
10037
ITT
10208
ITT Nokia
10208
Remote Control Codes
Television
Lifetec
Television
10037, 10714, 10668,
11037, 12001
Linsar
11585
Local India TV
10208
Local Malaysia TV
10698
Lodos
11037
Loewe
10037, 10512, 11884
Logik
11037, 10698
Logix
10668
Luma
11037
Lumatron
10037, 10668
Lumenio
10037
Lux May
10037
Luxor
11037, 10208
LXI
10178
M Electronic
10037, 10714, 10634,
10195, 10512, 11652
Madison
10037
Magnavox
10171, 11454, 11365,
11506, 11755, 11867,
12372
Medion
Television
10556, 10037, 10714,
10668, 11037, 10698,
10512, 11248, 11585,
11667, 12001, 12719
Television
Naiko
10037
Onix
10698
Nakimura
10037
Onkyo
11807, 13100, 13500
National
10508, 10208
Onn
11667, 11709
NEC
10178, 10653, 10508,
10499
Onyx
11709
Opera
10037, 10714
Neckermann
10556, 10037
Optimus
10650
NEI
10037, 11037
Orbit
10037
NEO
11324
Orion
Netsat
10037
10556, 10037, 10714,
11037, 12001
NetTV
11755
Orline
10037
Neufunk
10556, 10037, 10714
Ormond
10668, 11037
New Tech
10556, 10037
Osaki
10556, 10037
Newave
10178
Osio
10037
Nikkai
10037
Osume
10037
11614
Nikkei
10714
Otto Versand
Mikomi
11037, 11585
Nikko
10178
10556, 10037, 10195,
10512
Minato
10037
Nokia
10208
Pacific
Minerva
10195, 11248
Norcent
11365
10556, 10714, 11037,
11324
Ministry Of Sound
11667
Nordmende
Palladium
10556, 10037, 10714
Minoka
10037
10037, 10714, 10560,
10195, 11585, 11667,
12001
Megatron
10178
MEI
11037
Memorex
10150, 10178, 11037
Mercury
10037
Mermaid
10037
Metronic
10625
Metz
10037, 10668, 10195,
11037, 11533
MGA
10150, 10178
Micromaxx
Microspot
10037, 10714, 10668,
11037, 11324, 12001
Magnum
10037, 10714, 10715
Mirai
11666
Manesth
10037
Mitsubishi
10150, 11250, 10178,
10556, 10037, 11037,
10512, 11171
Novatronic
10037
Mivar
10609
Novita
11585
Moree
10037
Nu-Tec
10698
Morgan's
10037
O.K.Line
11037, 11324
Moserbaer
11585
Oceanic
10208
MTC
10512
Odys
12719
MTlogic
10714
Okano
10037
Mudan
10208
OKI
11585, 11667
10037, 10668, 11037
Olevia
11610, 12124
Manhattan
10037, 10668, 11037
Marantz
11454, 10556, 10037
Mark
10037, 10714, 10715
Master's
10499
Mastro
10698
Masuda
10037
Matsui
10556, 10037, 10714,
10195, 11037, 10208,
11666, 11667
Normerel
10037
Nortek
10668
Matsushita
10650
Multitec
Maxent
11755
Multitech
10037
Omni
10698
Maxess
12493
Myrica
11666
Onei
11667
Meck
10698
Myryad
10556
Onida
10653
10556, 10037
NAD
10178, 10037
Onimax
10714
Mediator
13
Palsonic
10037, 10698
Panama
10037
Panasonic
11480, 10037, 10650,
10508, 10208, 11636,
12170
Panavision
10037
Panda
10698, 10508, 10208
Pansonic
11636
Penney
10178
Perdio
10037
Perfekt
10037
Petters
10037
Philco
10178, 10171, 10037,
11394
Philips
10178, 10171, 11454,
10556, 10037, 10512,
10605, 10690, 11394,
11506, 11867, 12372
Phocus
10714, 11652
Remote Control Codes
Television
Television
Television
Television
Phoenix
10037
Reflex
10037, 10668, 11037
Sei-Sinudyne
10037
SunBriteTV
11610
Phonola
10556, 10037
Relisys
11585
Serie Dorada
10178
Sungoo
11248
Pioneer
10037, 10698, 10512,
11457, 11636, 12171
Remotec
10171, 10037
Shanghai
10208
Sunny
10037
Reoc
10714
Sharp
Sunstar
10037
Plantron
10037
Revox
10037
10650, 10818, 11165,
11423, 11659
Sunstech
12001
Playsonic
10037, 10714, 10715,
11652
RFT
10037
Shintoshi
10037
Sunwood
10037
Roadstar
10037, 10714, 10668,
11037, 10715
Shivaki
10178, 10037
Supersonic
10208
Siam
10037
SuperTech
10556, 10037
Powerpoint
10037, 10698
Prinston
11037, 10715
Rolson
12001, 12098
Siemens
10037, 10195
Profitronic
10037
Supra
10178
Rowa
10037, 10698
Siera
10556, 10037
Proline
10037, 10625, 10634,
11037
Svasa
10208
Saba
10625, 10714, 10560
Silva
10037
Swisstec
11614, 11775
Sagem
10618
Silva Schneider
10037
Sylvania
Saivod
10037, 10668, 11037
Silver
10715
10171, 11394, 11864,
11886
Salora
10208, 12001
SilverCrest
11037
Symphonic
10171, 11394
Sampo
10178, 10171, 10650,
11755
Sinudyne
10037
Synco
10178, 11755
SKY
10037, 11614, 11775
Syntax
11610
Samsung
10178, 10556, 10037,
10618, 10650, 10208,
12051
Skyworth
10037, 10698
Sysline
10037
Sliding
11324
Tacico
10178
SLX
10668
Talent
10178
Solavox
10037
Tashiko
10650
Prosonic
10037, 10714, 10668,
11324, 11585, 11667,
11709, 12001
Protech
10037, 10668, 11037
Proton
10178
ProVision
10556, 10037, 10714,
11324
Pvision
12001
Pye
10556, 10037
Qingdao
10208
Quasar
10650
Quelle
10037, 10668, 10195,
11037, 10512
R-Line
10037
Radiola
10556, 10037
Radiomarelli
10037
RadioShack
10178, 10037
Radiotone
10037, 10668, 11037
RCA
10178, 11454, 10625,
10560, 10618, 11781,
12247, 12403, 12429,
12434, 12746, 12932
Realistic
10178
Recor
10037
Rectiligne
10037
Redstar
10037
Sansui
10171, 10037, 10714,
11248, 12001
11037, 10508, 10208,
11142, 11365, 11585,
11667, 11974
Soniko
10037
Tatung
10037, 11248, 11324
Soniq
12493
TCL
Sonitron
10208
10698, 12403, 12429,
12434, 13183
SBR
10556, 10037
Sonneclair
10037
TCM
10714, 12001
Schaub Lorenz
10714, 11324, 11363,
11667, 12001
Sonoko
10037
Teac
Schneider
10556, 10037, 10714,
10668, 11037
Sonolor
10208
Sontec
10037
10178, 10171, 10037,
10714, 10668, 11037,
10698, 10512, 11248,
11363, 11709, 11755
Sony
10810, 11505, 11167,
11651, 11825
Tec
10037
Tech Line
10037, 10668
Technica
11037
Sanyo
Schoentech
11037
Scotch
10178
Scott
10178
Sears
10178, 10171
Seaway
10634
Seelver
11037
SEG
10037, 10668, 11037,
12719
SEI
10037
14
Soundesign
10178
Soundwave
10037, 11037, 10715
Sowa
10178
Squareview
10171
Standard
10037, 11037, 11709
Starlite
10037
Strato
10037
Technics
10556, 10650
Technika
11667
TechniSat
10556
Technisson
10714, 11652
Techno
11585
Remote Control Codes
Television
Technosonic
Techvision
Television
10556, 10625, 10499,
11324
Television
VCR
Toyoda
11709
VU
11365, 12098
Humax
TRANS-continents
10556, 10037, 10668,
11037
Walker
11667
Panasonic
20614, 20616
Waltham
10037, 10668, 11037
Philips
20739
10037, 10698, 10512,
11363
Wansa
12098
ReplayTV
20614, 20616
Wards
10178
Sonic Blue
20614, 20616
Watson
10037, 10714, 10668,
11037
Sony
20636
TiVo
20636, 20739
11709
Techwood
11037, 11667
Tecnimagen
10556
Teco
10178, 10653
Triad
10556
Tedelex
10208, 11709
Trio
11248
Teknika
10150
Triumph
10556, 10037
Wega
TELE System
11585
TVTEXT 95
10556
Welltech
10714, 11652
PVR
Telecor
10037
Uher
10037
Weltstar
11037
DirecTV
20739
Telefunken
10037, 10625, 10714,
10560, 10698, 11585,
11667
Ultravox
10037
Westinghouse
11755
Go Video
20614
UMC
11614, 11775
Wharfedale
20739
10037
10556, 10037, 11324,
11667
Humax
Unic Line
10037
Panasonic
20614, 20616
Uniden
12122
White Westinghouse
10037
Telegazi
10037
Philips
20739
United
10556
10037
10556, 10037, 10714,
11037, 10715, 11652
Wilson
Telemeister
ReplayTV
20614, 20616
Windsor
10668, 11037
Telesonic
10037
Unitek
11709
Sonic Blue
20614, 20616
Windy Sam
10556
Telestar
10556, 10037
Universal
10037, 10714
Sony
20636
Wintel
10714
Teletech
10037, 10668, 11037
Universum
10037, 10668, 10195,
11037, 10618, 10512
TiVo
20636, 20739
World-of-Vision
12001
Wyse
11365
TV/VCR Combination
Xenius
10634
Amstrad
10171
Xiahua
10698
Ferguson
10625
XLogic
10698
Fidelity
10171
Xrypton
10037
GoldStar
10037
Yamaha
10650, 11576
Grundig
10556, 10037, 10195
Yamishi
10037
LG
10178
Yokan
10037
Mitsubishi
10556
Yoko
10037
Philips
10556, 10037
YU-MA-TU
10037
Radiola
10556
Zenith
10178, 10037, 11365,
11423, 12358
Saba
10625
Sanyo
11974
Zepto
11585
Schneider
10556, 10037
Zonda
10698
Sharp
10818
Telefusion
Transonic
20739
Teleview
10037
Tennessee
10037
Univox
10037
Tensai
10037, 11037, 10715
V7 Videoseven
11666, 11755
Tesla
10556, 10037, 10714,
11037, 11652
Vestel
10037, 10668, 11037,
11585, 11667
10556, 10037, 10714,
10668, 11037, 11248,
11585, 11667
Vexa
Tevion
10037
Victor
10650, 10653, 11428
Videocon
10037, 10508
Thomson
10037, 10625, 10560
Thorn
10037, 10499, 10512
Vidtech
10178
Thorn-Ferguson
10499
Viewsonic
11365, 11564, 11755,
12049
VideoSystem
10037
TMK
10178
Tokai
10037, 10668, 11037
Vision
10037
Tokaido
11037
Vistron
11363
Topline
10668, 11037
Vivax
11709
Toshiba
10195, 11037, 10618,
10650, 10508, 11169,
11508, 11524, 11652,
12203
Vizio
11758, 12209
Vortec
10037
Voxson
10178, 10037
10037
VCR
15
DirecTV
20739
Go Video
20614
Siemens
10037
Sony
11505
Teac
10178, 10171
Remote Control Codes
TV/VCR Combination
DVD
Technics
10556
Dantax
30539, 30713
Harman/Kardon
30582, 31229, 33228
Maxim
30713
Thomson
10625
Denon
30490, 30634, 31634,
32258, 32748
Henss
30713
MDS
30713
Hitachi
30573, 30713, 31664
Medion
30630, 30741
31152
Hoeher
30713
Memorex
32213
3D LAB
30539
Dick Smith
Electronics
Metz
30571, 30713
30675
30713
31152
Accurian
Digihome
HotMedia
Micromedia
30503, 30539
30713
30713
30646
Acoustic Solutions
DigiLogic
Humax
30713
Micromega
30539
30675
31394
Inno Hit
AEG
Digix Media
30675
30522, 32083
31152
30741, 30675, 32428,
32596
Microsoft
AFK
Disney
Insignia
30533
30675, 31152
30713
Aiwa
DSE
Minax
30503, 30571, 30627,
31612, 31634, 32147
30713
30675
30713
Mitsubishi
Akai
Dual
Alba
30539, 30713
Durabrand
30675, 30713
Irradio
30646
Ambiance
33052
Dynex
32596
JVC
Amstrad
30713
Dyon
33052
Anthem
32820
eBench
31152
30503, 30539, 30623,
30867, 31597, 31602,
32855
Aristona
30539, 30646
Elfunk
30713
ASDA
32213
Elite
31152
Audix
30713
Emerson
30675, 32213
Autovox
30713
EuroLine
30675
Awa
32587
Ferguson
30713
Basic Line
30713
Finlux
30741
Bel Canto Design
31571
Firstline
30713
Black Diamond
30713
Foehn & Hirsch
33052
Blue Parade
30571
Funai
30675
Blue Sky
30713
GE
30522
Brandt
30503
GFM
30675
Bush
30713
Global Sphere
31152
C-Tech
31152
Go Video
30741
DVD
DVD
Integra
DVD
Kendo
30713
Kennex
30713
Kenwood
30490, 30534
Lenco
30713, 33052
Lexicon
LG
32545
30741, 31602
Limit
33052
Lodos
30713
Loewe
30539, 30741, 32474,
32783
Logik
30713
Lumatron
30741, 30713
Momitsu
33052
NAD
30741
NEC
30741, 31602
Onkyo
30503, 30627, 31612,
32147, 30571, 31634
Oppo
30575, 32545
Orion
30713
Ormond
30713
Pacific
30713
Palladium
30713
Panasonic
30503, 30490, 31579,
31641, 32523, 32710,
32859
Pelican Accessories
30533
Philco
30675
Philips
30503, 30539, 30646,
30675, 30713, 31340,
31354, 32056, 32084,
32434, 32689
Lunatron
30741
Luxman
30573
Luxor
30713
Pioneer
Magnavox
30503, 30539, 30646,
30675, 30713, 31354
30571, 30142, 30631,
31571, 32442, 32860
Polk Audio
30539
30713
Presidian
30675
Marantz
30539, 32414, 32432,
33444
ProAudio
31394
California Audio Labs 30490
GoldStar
30741
Cambridge Audio
32808
Goodmans
30713, 31152
Centrum
30675, 30713
GPX
30741
30627
Grandin
30713
Cinetec
30713
Grundig
30539, 30713
Clatronic
30675
H&B
30713
Proscan
30522
Clayton
30713
Haaz
31152
Mark
30713
Proson
30713
Crown
30713
Hanseatic
30741
Matsui
30713
Pye
30539, 30646
Changhong
Manhattan
16
Remote Control Codes
DVD
DVD
DVD
Radionette
30741
Sylvania
30630, 30675
Radiotone
30713
Symphonic
30675
RCA
30522, 30571, 32213,
32587
Tamashi
31394
Tandberg
30713
REC
30490
Targa
30741
Red
32213
Tchibo
30741
Redstar
31394
TCL
32587
TCM
30741
Roadstar
30713
Rotel
30623
Salora
30741
Samsung
30490, 30573, 30199,
30820, 31635, 32069,
32329, 32489, 33195
Sanyo
30713
Schneider
30539, 30646, 30713
Schoentech
30713
Scott
31394
SEG
30713
Semp
Sharp
30571, 30741, 30675,
31394
30713
Technics
30490
Techwood
30713
Teletech
30713
33052
Anthem
32820
Cambridge Audio
32808
Denon
32258, 32748
Dyon
33052
Foehn & Hirsch
33052
Funai
30675
Harman/Kardon
33228
Insignia
30675, 32428, 32596
Integra
32147, 32900, 32910,
33100, 33101, 33500,
33501
30522
Toshiba
30503, 31639, 32277,
32551, 32705, 33157
30503
Transonic
31394
30630, 30675, 30713,
32250, 32474, 32652,
32869
TVE
30713
United
30675, 30713, 31152
Universum
30741, 30713
Urban Concepts
30503
Vestel
30713
Victor
31597
Vizio
32563
Vtrek
32587
Waltham
30713
Wellington
30713
Weltstar
30713
Oppo
30741, 33052
Silva Schneider
30741
SilverCrest
31152
30539, 30713
SM Electronic
31152
Smart
30713
30533, 30864, 31033,
31070, 31431, 31516,
31633, 32180
30503, 30741
Ambiance
Thomson
30533
Blu-ray Disc
30490, 30539, 30646,
30817, 31354, 32298,
32299
Blu-ray Disc
30571
Shinsonic
Sony
Technica
Zenith
Theta Digital
Sherwood
Skantic
Teac
Yamaha
Sony
31516, 32180
Sylvania
30675
Toshiba
32551, 32705, 33157
Vizio
32563
Yamaha
32298, 32299
DVD-R
Accurian
30675
Aristona
30646
Denon
30490
Emerson
30675
Funai
30675
Go Video
30741
GPX
30741
Hitachi
31664
Humax
30646
Irradio
30646
32855
JVC
31597
Lenco
33052
LG
30741
Lexicon
32545
Loewe
30741
30741, 31602
Magnavox
30646, 30675
Limit
33052
Medion
30741
Loewe
32474, 32783
Panasonic
Magnavox
30675
30490, 31579, 32523,
32710, 32859
Marantz
32414, 32432, 33444
Philips
30646, 31340
JVC
LG
Momitsu
Onkyo
33052
32147, 32900, 32910,
33100, 33101, 33500,
33501
Pioneer
30631, 32860
Pye
30646
RCA
30522
Samsung
30490, 31635
32545
Schneider
30646
Wharfedale
30713
Panasonic
31641, 32523, 32859
Sharp
30630, 30675, 32869
30713
Windsor
30713
Philips
32084, 32434, 32689
Sony
Star Clusters
31152
Windy Sam
30573
Pioneer
30142, 32442
31033, 31070, 31431,
31516, 31633, 32180
Strato
31152
Xbox
30522, 32083
Samsung
30199, 33195
Sylvania
30675
Strong
30713
XLogic
31152
Sharp
32250, 32474, 32652
Targa
30741
Supervision
31152
Sherwood
33052
Toshiba
31639, 32277, 32551
Soundwave
17
Remote Control Codes
DVD-R
TV/DVD Combination
Victor
31597
Magnavox
Yamaha
30646
Matsui
11037, 30713
Zenith
30741
Medion
12719
Nordmende
12001
Odys
12719
HD-DVD
12372
Integra
32901, 33104 33504
Panasonic
12170
LG
30741
Philips
Microsoft
32083
11454, 10556, 11394,
30539
10698
Onkyo
32901, 33104 33504
Powerpoint
Xbox
32083
Prosonic
12001
Pvision
12001
TV/DVD Combination
RCA
12746, 12932
Akai
11675
Schaub Lorenz
12001
Black Diamond
11037, 30713
SEG
11037, 12719, 30713
Blue Sky
11037, 30713
Sharp
10818
Bush
11037, 10698, 12719,
30713
Soniq
12493
Sunstech
12001
Centrum
11037, 30713
Sylvania
Crown
11037, 30713
10171, 11394, 11864,
11886, 30630, 30675
10698
DMTech
12001
Teac
Dual
11037, 30713
Technica
11037, 30713
Dynex
12049
Telefunken
10698
Elfunk
11037, 30713
Teletech
11037, 30713
Emerson
11394, 11864, 11886,
30675
Thomson
10625
Toshiba
11524
Ferguson
11037, 30713
Goodmans
11037, 30713
Grandin
30713
Grundig
30539
H&B
12001
Hanseatic
12001
Hitachi
11037, 11667, 30713
Insignia
12049
JVC
12271
LG
11423
Logik
11037, 30713
Luxor
11037, 30713
United
11037, 30713
Universum
30713
Vestel
11037
Viewsonic
12049
Weltstar
11037, 30713
18
Remote Control Codes
Memo
19
Y1303-2
SN 29401094A
* 2 9 4 0 1 0 9 4 A *